- b t y / '
Copy, flo.
November 18, 19^2,
INTELLIGENCE CIRCULAR )
No. 13
This circular consists of extracts from reports written "by
United States Military and Naval personnel (or from authori tative statements and documents quoted and evaluated by such
personnel) concerning Antiaircraft Artillery. While the in formation is considered entirely authentic, it should "be un derstood that many excerpts are merely the observations and
opinions of individual United States Army and Naval officers,
or of foreign officers and officials. Attention is also in vited to the fact that the date on which each report was writ ten appears at the end of the excerpt.
\
The information set forth herein does not modify prescribed
doctrine nor is it intended to be used as instructional matter
in service and troop schools. It is published by the Command ing General, Antiaircraft Command, for the information of re cipients indicated on the distribution list.
Reproduction of the circular is not authorized and its securi
ty classification is to be maintained.
For the Commanding General:
Classification
J U N i 'j 1945
/L
H. N. HERRICK,
Colonel, C.A.C.*
Chief of Staff
1447
R A Y M STQCjfvjk 'A ''f
1st Ltiaf ^
as
Ass't tSiJJtodiAn
f
TABLES OF
LISTS OF BULLETINS AND CIRCULARS ISSUED
I - ORGANIZATION
II - PERSONNEL
• •
Ammunition
Light Antiaircraft Weapons • . Heavy Antiaircraft Guns • • • « Light Antiaircraft Fire Control Heavy Antiaircraft Fire Control Rockets and Rocket Projectors . Antitank •
Miscellaneous Items
Developments . . . . . . . . .
3) 4)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) VI VII VIII
Fage
5
P.
F.
P.
P.
P.
P. P. P. . . P,
• • • • •
• • • • •
30 41 47 54 59
68
72
79
86
Page 100
Concepts (re - tactical employment) Concepts (re - technical employment) Concepts (re - siting) • • • • • • Concepts (re - antitank role) • • • Concepts (re - weapons) « • • « • • Operational Practices (A.D.G.B.)* • Operational Practices (mobile), • • Operational Practices (enemy) • • • Antitank. . . . • • . . . . . . • • Lessons arid Trends • • • • • • • •
V - TRAINING
Page 30
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
2)
3
Page 26
. . .
III - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
1)
Page
. . . . . . . . . . .
P. P. P.
100 108 116
P. 122
P. 126
P. 129
P. 147
P. 156
F* 162
P. '173
Page 185
Schools and Courses F» Individual Training . . . . . . . . P. Unit Training P. Training Films F. Training Devices . « » • • • • • • F. Aircraft Recognition Training . . • F.
185 195 199 206 209 213
AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS . t . I J V i V A V fm-% » i a- B
1 1 W 4 n » 1 Pi % V g ? j$ f» I
1 1 . . ' 9 r i r \ 4.i I
OPERATIONS
Page 260
DISTRIBUTION , . . . f f .
-2
LIST HF INTE3
OFFICE OF % \CBIEF OF 1
ARTILLERY
li >6 ^
Date
Subject Miscellaneous
26 February 19^1
Miscellaneous
9 April119^1
Miscellaneous
19 May 19^1
Miscellaneous
28 July 19^1
25 September 19^1
Barrage Balloons
lU November 19^1
Searchlights
7 February 19^2
Radio Detection
LIST OF INTELLIGENCE CIRCULARS ISSUED BY
HEADQUARTERS ANTIAIRCRAFT COMMAND
Date
Subject AA in Phillipine Islands (Com muniques. from General Wainwright AA in Southwest Pacific (State ments of wounded soldiers)
9 April 19^2
19^2
29 April
British AA in Sumatra
18 May 19^2
Miscellaneous
25 May 19^2
British Light AA Regiment in Libya
2 June 19^2
AA Defense of Tobruk April - October i9*a.
Interview with Air Corps officers
from Far East Combat Zone
I - Employment of AA SLfs,
1939-19^2. a Part II - New Methods of Ir^eree
Operational Prdcf
Part
- 3
13 June 19^2
k2
\
yf
•\
~ 8 July 19^2
List of Circulars (cont'd)
•r No.
Subject
Date
9
Miscellaneous
22 July 19^2
10
Performance of USA Coast Artillery Personnel & Equipment in Phillipines
k August 19^2
11
Airdrome Defense
7 September 19^2
12
Part I - British AA Defense Tactics at Tobruk Part II- Training in Japanese Army 22 October 19^2
-
k
4
\
I - O R G A N I Z A T I
Editorial Note:
In Great" Britain the Jfe^it-ioal' subdivisions of England, Wales,
Scotland, and Northern ^Ireland; are constituted an Antiair craft defense area. Within this area all the antiaircraft
weapons and facilities are under a Command known as the "Anti aircraft Command". The Corrimanding General of the Antiaircraft
is a Royal Artilleryman* He has complete command authority
throughout his command, except as it is limited by a coopera tive practice called "operational control", briefly described
below. ' Under his Command the area mentioned is divided into
three "Antiaircraft Corps", each comprising a definite geo graphical area, and each corps is further divided into two or
more Antiaircraft Divisions, Each divisional command also
comprises a definite geographical area. There are a total of
twelve divisionsc Each divisional command has Antiaircraft
Artillery and Searchlights assigned to it in brigades and regi ments which- are under command of the Division Commander. De fense Commanders are also sometimes designated for sub-areas
within the division areas but there is no fixed uniformity in
this regard, li/hen a Defense Commander is designated he is re sponsible for the Antiaircraft gun defense within his area.
He may control the elements of his command from, or through,
a control post called a "Gun Operations Room".
As mentioned, the Antiaircraft Command functions in a coopera tive manner with the Royal Air Force through what is called
"operational control" exercised by the Fighter Command of •
the Royal Air Force. ' That is to say the Fighter Command is
given authority to control the operations of the Antiaircraft
Command and its elements in those respects considered neces sary by the Royal Air Force to make the Royal Air Force most
fully effective. In practice this' control' is exercised al most entirely through standing operational orders and instruc tions issued by the Antiaircraft Command after-consultation'
with arid approval by. the Commanding General of the Fighter
Command of the Royal Air . Force . The only oral command con-'
trol of any practical importance exercised by-the Fighter Cfim mand in actual operations, in the case of Antiaircraft •gHpSfyrh
is the'order to withhold fire in certain instances
short intervals of time, when -deemed necessary for .JMtfyp'"' of friendly aircraft. Even in such instances thdf&c%ial Com mands are normally issued through Antiaircraftd^^ft^tXe^y' of ficers stationed in Royal Air Force Fighter %$pSl3^Jbpera
-5
* ** I - ORGANIZi^M||j%
Editorial- fiote (cont'd)
tions^ooms. This exercise of "operational control" by the
Royal Air Force appears to function smoothly; partly, per haps, because of the ability of the British to cooperate
easily with.one another, also, perhaps, because of the view point of all concerned that the Antiaircraft Command
should retain unity of command with respect to the impor tant Artillery functions of: (l) Assignment of Personnel, <
(2) Organization,.(3) Training, (4) Technique, and (5) Tac tical dispositions of Antiaircraft units, and yet, at the
same time, should permit the Royal Air Force to have such
control as is necessary to give to the Royal Air Force the
Antiaircraft cooperation and support needed by the Fighter
Command.
As will appear from excerpts herein, there is also mobile
antiaircraft artillery in field force organizations both in
Great Britain and abroad, and there is both mobile and stat ic Antiaircraft Artillery in the Harbor Defenses.
In Germany the Antiaircraft Artillery is organized as a
part of the German Air/Force. It is called "FLAK-" (an ab breviation for "Flugabwehrkanone" « literally "Antiaircraft
gun"). However, antiaircraft artillery units have been or ganized in the German Army in addition to the "Flak" of the
German Air Force..
The REICH and occupied countries are divided into a number
of areas known as' Air Districts (Luftgaue), each of which,
apart from administration, is responsible for the defense
of its territory as far as the German Air Force is concern ed. - — T h e Air District Command controls the "permanent"
Flak defenses, fighter units, Observer Corps, Balloon Bar rage units and Air Raid Precaution organizations. Its con trol of the F3rf%efenses is exercised partly directly arid
partly thr^u^i'lAir Defense Comman$is (Luftverteidigungskom mandos).;,. \v^'The Flak organization itself is divided into
Groups ra&cgruppen) and Sub-Groups iplakuntergruppen) on a
territorial basis. — T h e operational'units are the batteries
(Xbteilungen), a variable number of which make up a regi nt. It is .thought' -that generally speaking a battery mans the area of af^jbrproup, while a regiment mans that of a Group. JL variable tmmber of regiments go in turn to form a brigadftf^' •—Some Divisional Headquarters are also in
I - ORGANIZATION
Editorial Note (cont'd
existence, there bein,
District. A division presumably commands a liurriberTfori gades, but the precise nature of its responsibilities is not
known, The control centre of the Flak defenses in any
area (probably the Flak Group) is thought to operate though
a number of sector controls (probably the.Sub-Groups). it
is assumed that the sector controls are used not only as com munication centres, but'also as operational headquarters as,
for fire control (ordering of barrage fire, etc.). De tailed information is (not) available regarding the
system of inter-communication, but it is known that particu larly close liaison is maintained between the Flak organi zation and the Observer. Corps and Radio Detection Finder net work, and between Flak and fighter units, The basic Anti aircraft defense of a gun defended area is static, guns
usiiaily being in concrete emplacements and hutments being
provided for the personnel. It is known, however, that use
is made of guns on railway mountings and that in some areas
a small proportion of the ordinary defenses is mobile, with
the result that the gun and searchlight densities can be
altered at short notice. It is probable that these mobile
units are chiefly deployed in relation to dummy installa tions, with the object of deception as to the actual loca tion of the target. It is•->—(quite well established)--r that-only the guns on the side of the Gun Defended ..^rea near est to the dummy engage•in the early stages of the attack,
or until it is abundantly clear that,the real target has
been identified, and that; in-addition dummy gun flashes
—-(are) used. » Flak maps — ( a r e ) - — • issued
monthly (by the British to)—- show the disposition of guns
-and searchlights in the greater part;of •the REICH and in the
occupied territories of Western Europe. They provide a rough
guide to the relative strength of the defenses in the various
districts. The estimated scale of defense of twelve selected
(Notes .,:Only , .
target areas (in Germany)-— are. given : Berlin is given here.)—- (From M.A. London 46980-London-March
1942. ' • . . ».
Extent of Gun Defended Area
Heavy
Taking the Potsdamer Platz •
approximately '12• miles .to-;the N., E., and S. and 20 miles t6
the W. Includes Potsdam. 240
-7
^..L^b^^S
*
•. ... • 300
. 125
;•
^ - - ( o n l y ) — - real units of command (among the British
forces) in the War Cabinet, Each of the three Ministries
(War, Admiralty, Air) is separate and there is an en tirely separate chain of command within each up to its own
head. — — If air forces are required (by a Commander
in Great Britain) they are arranged for between the Air
Ministry and the Commander-in-Chief, but they are not under
(the latter'a) command. A similar system is in oper ation in the Middle East, - — I n the Far East the Commander in-Chief is an Air Officer who commands both Army and Royal
Advisory to the
Air Force, but does, not command the Navy, War Cabinet is the Chiefs of Staff Committee, composed of the
Chiefs of Staff of the three Services, This committee meets
daily and arranges for coordination of effort and coopera tion between the three Services, Working under the Chiefs
of Staff Committee is the Committee of Imperial Defense* <
M.A.R.4595S-London-23 December 1941
The antiaircraft and field branche's of the Royal Artillery
are sometimes erroneously regarded as being entirely separ ate - partly because the technical application of antiair craft fire is so different from that of other forms of ar tillery fire that it requires special forms of training,
But Antiaircraft Artillery in the British Service is, like
the field branches, an integral part of the Royal Artillery
and therefore for Field Forces it is considered that the
— Commander Royal Artillery (of the-tank force (or-other
formation) — is responsible for advising the commander in
the employment of antiaircraft units and for coordinating all
; the artillery resources, except that where antiaircraft de fenses are spread over a large area or are required in con junction with-a large air component a special antiaircraft
commander may be appointed.
Army Training Memorandum No. 43
MtA,R,48365-London-llJune 1942
Under the reorganization effective — - 16 June J: and Coast Defense b^ed
e War Office, which is —
^ rectorate of Antiaircraft
"in a new "Directorate of
Royal Artillery."
•'
• M.A.R,48449-London-l6 June 1942
The remaining sections of the'old Directorate of Antiair craft —-(and Coast Defense, except AA4 (plans, operations
and intelligence) and AA5 (training) have become part of
the entirely new — - Directorate of Royal Artillery.
The Director of Royal Artillery is responsible- to the Assis tant Chief of the Imperial General Staff,
• > Ltr.fm,BAS-9 July 1942.AAC#319.13/AUC-74
"Headquarters Antiaircraft Training Establishments", (un der the war office, has under it) Six Antiaircraft Train ing Groups, • Each group commands a number of units di vided on a geographical basis. These units comprise light,
heavy3"searchlight and "Z" antiaircraft - training regiments,
practice camps, driver training regiments, reserve regiments
and —(Operators Fire Control (Radio Detection Finder)— training regiments. They include male, mixed, and auxiliary
territorial service (women)). The Headquarters and Search light 'Wing, Shrivenham, the Gunnery and Trials Wings,'Manor bier, and the Wireless Wing, -Wafccfiet are directly under the
War Office and do not come under the Antiaircraft Training
Establishments. . . . .
M.A.R.47898-London-14 May 1942
2) Air Defenses of Great Britain
Editorial Note;
^The' overall organizatlon'"tJf the "Air Defenses of Great
Britain" have been described above and In previous Intelli gence Bulletins. (See CAC intelligence Bulletins NoTs." 6
and 7)• The following should be: read as supplementing the
information heretofore published on the'subject.
&reat Britain (cont'd)
. .
4 SurTOperations Room is located near • The Sector Opera tions Room is under the orders of the Fighter Group,
which exercises operational control. The Fighter Sector is
commanded by the Sector Commander, The duty officer in the
Sector Operations Room is known as the Sector Controller, The Gun Operations Room is under the command of the Officer in
Charge, Gun Operations Room who is responsible — — for the
discipline and training'' of the Gun Operations Room personnel, A continuous watch is kept by an Ahti-aircraft Defense Com mander who is not a member of the Gun Operations Room staff
and is stationed at the Gun Operations Room as the represent ative of the — Defense Commander to control the fire of the — - antiaircraft Brigades in certain circumstances,
and-by a Gun Control Officer who is a permanent member of the Gun Operations Room staff,
M,A,Rpt.No,44346-London-4 September 1941
is in each relief in each Group Operations Room .
There: (Fighter Command)an Antiaircraft Liaison Officer ,
. Incl. to ltr from B.M.M.-13 September 1941
In addition to the responsibility for the control of Antiair craft fire against unseen targets, (vide*. "Instructions for
Recognition betweien British Forces"')* Fighter Group Command**
ers have been authorized to arrange at any time for any Anti aircraft guns in their Group areas to withhold fire on enemy
or unidentified aircraft if they' consider the tactical or
weather conditions make this action desirable,
M.A.Ept.No.44514-London-15 September 1941
The term "Operational Command" as —'-(distinguished from "op erational control" i s ) — used in -—(connection w i t h ) — the Antiaircraft Command of the Air defenses of Great Britain -T to mean the issuance of all orders, instructions, or in telligence in connection with: Cfrjk Actual enemy activity'in the area, (b) State of Reajdi?n€sS ai^ hours of manning, (c) Ground Defense m e a s u r e £ n d (d) Recognition and engagement of Targets,
-10
It functions somewhat as follows: (1) The creation of new defenses and the reallocation of
heavy and light antiaircraft guns, Antiaircraft "Z" rocket)
projectors, and searchlights, from one defended area to an other can be. ordered by Headquarters, Fighter Command only.'
(2) The redistribution of resources within defended areas
will be ordered by Commanders Antiaircraft Divisions who will
keep •Antiaircraft- Corps, and Antiaircraft Corps will keep An tiaircraft Command informed of such action. The Administra tive and Signal implications of any redistribution must be
fully considered. * • (3) The reallocation of gun layer stations from one de fended area to anoth.ey.,must be approved by Antiaircraft Corps
on authority delegated by. Antiaircraft Command-.
«
(4) For each area or vital point defended by Heavy or
Light Antiaircraft guns or Antiaircraft "Z".projectors, an
Antiaircraft Defensq .Commander is appointed. He exercises
full operational command over all Heavy, Light and Antiair craft "Z". defenses of the- areq. or vulnerable point.
(5) Commanders Antiaircraft Divisions appoint Antiaircraft
Defense Commanders .in large Defended Areas. They may dele gate authority for the appointment of /antiaircraft Defense
Commanders in small,Defended Areas or at vita-1 points to Com manders ^Antiaircraft Brigades. .
(6) The Command post of the fintiaircraft Defense Command er is the Gun Operations Room. • (7) -rs— (Antiaircraft Commissioned)-—, members of - — Staffs
are given the following titles: a) -(In Fighter)—- G^oup
Operations Rooms - iintiaircraft Liaison Officers; b) . (In F i g h t e r ) — Sector Operations .Rooms Antiaircraft Liaison Of ficers (Guns) or Antiaircraft.Liaison Officers (Searchlights);
p) (In) Gun Operations Rooms. •- Duty Officers,
(s)
and Antiaircraft Liaison Officers (Guns)-in Sector Operations
V
*
I - ORGANIZ^¥o:
2|,| (8) (cont'd)
the Royal Air Force and Gun Operations Rooms. -—(These offi c e r s ) - T - are under the control of Commanders, Antiaircraft Div isions. (9) .Antiaircraft Liaison Officers (Searchlights)' are Staff
officers to the Sector Searchlight Commander, and, under his
instructions, issue operational orders to the Searchlights in
the Sector.
(10) The Senior Antiaircraft Officer at a (Fighter)—
Group or (Fighter) Sector Headquarters is responsible
to the Commander Antiaircraft Division for the discipline of
all Antiaircraft Members 'of the Operations Rooms Staff.
(11) Duty Officers are appointed to Gun Operations Rooms.
They are Staff officers to the Antiaircraft Defense Commander
and, under his instructions, issue operational orders to the
Heavy, Light and Antiaircraft "Z" Defensesf
(12) Command for training and administrative purposes is ex ercised through the normal channels, i.e., divisions, brigades,
regiments, and batteries.
M.A.Rpt.44515-London- 15 September 1941
Antiaircraft Gun Batteries are normally divided into two
classes - Heavy and Light. Heavy batteries are equipped with
4.5" static, 3.7" static, 3.7" mobile or 3" guns. Full es tablishments or tables of organization for all these types of
batteries and regimental headquarters —-(have been adopted) . It is probable that for the sake of economy in man poWer in
Heavy Antiaircraft Batteries in 'Air Defenses of Great Britain
-—(tables of organization will, with a few exceptional
cases, be revised so as to provide for .dispersion — ( o f guns)
down to four-rgun sites only. Light .Antiaircraft Batteries
in the -Air Defenses of Great Britain consist of sixteen 40' mm
.Bofors guns. Each .gun detachment is/an entity and guns' are .*
deployed singly. Guns.are controlled manually through open
sights or'by power transmission from a Kerrison predictor. A'
full; team consists of 4 mejguon the gun, 3, on the predictor, 1
on the generator, 2 ammunition numbers and 1 detachment com Mfe&MLtion)--- do not allow for so
<%fypt heavy batteries because the vis es ting almost entirely eliminates night
-• •
•
" % —
f f
I - ORGANIZATION
2). Air Defenses of Great Britain (cont'd; firing. Of the total of 331 personnel in a light
. - craft battery, 119 are administrative and 212 — • ars«8spera .tional. Battery transport is. provided by 1 light car, 1 15 cwt. lorry for rations and 10 motorcycles, .jnmunition is
brought up by Divisional transport, Tables of organiza tion have been adopted, "Zed" Regiments (Antiaircraft Rocket Regiments)—— are now coming into operational use to
man rocket firing equipmentsThe projectors are at present
worked singly in batteries of 64* Experiments have been car , ried out in the employment of multi-barrel projectors (2 bar rels, 4 barrels, 9 barrels and 20 barrels), and these equip ments are now in production. They will be organized into
batteries, some mobile, some static, of 64 2-barrel units, 36
4-barrel units, 12 9-barrel units, or 9 20-barrcl units, Roc . ket detachments, with certain exceptions, are organized in^4 , battery Regiments, 'which are incorporated into the Antiair craft Brigades,
M•A,R•43867-London-l August 1941
The-normal heavy antiaircraft gun site (in the Air Defenses
of Great Britain cpnsists of 4 guns, Predictor, Telescope I**
dentification,Height Finder and Gun Layer (Mk I or Mk II)
— , . In LONDON and a. few other large gun defended areas tjiere
. are a. certain number of 8-gun sites, usually controlled by one
predictor. There are also a small number of 6-gun sites and
2-gun sites, the latter majinly at aerodromes. The 5.25 inch
twin equipments, of which there are only three deployed, are
sited singly in the southwest centre and southeast of LONDON.
3-inch guns form part of the defenses of a gun defended area.
The layout of sites will vary with the characteristics of the
'< area.to be defended, the availability of sites, and the avail ability of equipment. The spacing between gun sites is-any thing from 2500 yards to -6000 yards or more. In all gun de fended areas special protection is given to particularly im portant areas, such as docks, armament factories etc., prob ably entailing a concentration of gun sites around the vital
point with consequent gaps in other parts of the Gun Defended
Area, The gun density aimed at for the protection of a
Vital Point is thirty-six. However, it is rarely possible to
get this density (for more than an) extremely short time.
An aircraft directly approaching at 300 m.p.h. at a height of
20,000 ft. ..cannot be subjected to fire for more than about 50
w
M
'
J
H
V * I• . rel="nofollow">_
I
n (cont'd)
seconds with the limitations of present equipment. The lar gest gun density in Air Defenses' of Great Britain is near ,
where the fire of 80 guns can be brought to bear over the
(protected area) when a barrage is fired. With predictor.
following a density of" about 60 guns can be got.-: The second
largest density is at where' a concentration of about
60 guns can be obtained and vdth Predictor following a den sity of about 40 is obtainable. • The average density for
smaller gun defended areas such as near - — is from 28 to 40 ,
guns for concentrations and 16 to 32 for predictor-following.
, .
The usual combination of equipments is: . . Guns Number 4*5"
Fuze
Predictor
Limitations
Clockwork
Vickers
25 sees, time of flight, maxi mum effective height 29,000 ft.
maximum effective 'slant range
• 10,000 yds.
33 sees, time of flight, maxi mum effective height 25,000 ft,
maximum effective slant range
11,000 yds, • .; •
3.7"
4
Clockwork
Sperry
3.7"
4
Powder
operry 33 sees, time of flight, maxi mum effective height 25,000 ft.
maximum effective slant range,
10,000 yds.
AUC-33-Lortdon.-February 1942
..There are :at present in Antiaircraft Command, Air Defenses of
Great Britain — — the following heavy and .light antiaircraft
..
guns and antiaircraft searchlights?: ,. -
"
•; •
. -Heavy Antiaircraft guns—--'2268. Light'Antiaircraft g u n s — — 890
Antiaircraft Searchlights—-4400. . :..
There are atrpresent, 50' /antiaircraft Searchlight' Regiments,..
There; were about 70 regiments - — o f which approximately 20
were converted to light antiaircraft artillery.. :; •
.: .&,Wi|6818-London-4 March 1.942
- ORGANIZATION
2) Air Defenses of Great Britain (cont'd)
The War Cabinet last November decided that .the
were to be used in - — Antiaircraft Command to man^Z1* bat teries and later heavy anti-aircraft. The. Home(Guar%units
will be separately organized, and they will be operated under
Antiaircraft Command with regular cadres, — - . •
—. M, A»R ,48733-London-6. July 1942
No final provision has been made for the employment of H$>me *
Guards on heavy antiaircraft- gunsites." — - No action will
be taken until the "Z" (rocket batteries) conversion pro gram is completes "Z" batteries each require 1,430 Home
Guards. The total program of 85 batteries will, therefore,
require approximately 122,000 Home Guards,- Of this number
12,000 are at present under training, on .an 8-shift basis. It
is proposed that Auxiliary Territorial Services shall take over
•all Operators Fire Control' (Radio Detection Finder) duties in
"Z" Units, where Home Guard are also employed. It is not con sidered that Home Guards will be employed in Light Antiaircraft
or searchlight units,
' M.A,R,48657-London-l.July 1942
3) Airdrome Defense
•
»
'
Lt, Col, Sherbrooke (British Army) until recently was
-both the commander of the defense troops of the -.—(Binbrock)—
Airdrome and staff adviser to the Airdrome commander, . He. is
most vehement in his contention that the only way to get the
average Royal Air Force Station commander to.take airdrome de fense seriously is to make him responsible for it,' Many of
them have refused to cooperate with the Local Defense Command er in such matters as training, arms, equipment, communica tions and morale, That his views are considered sound is
reflected in his assignment as Airdrome Defense Officer at
Headquarters Southern Command and Group Defense Officer with
the- jj&tfr- Wing — - under the change • whereby -t— the Royal Air
Force has its own defense force, called the Royal Air- Force Regiment« -This absolves the Army from Airdrome defense ex cept for counter-attacking or support missions. It also places
more squarely upon the airdrome commander the responsibility
for his own internal defense,.a matter he was. formerly in clined to neglect in the belief that the Army would protect
him. M.AtR.4S045-Lonaon-25 May 1942
- ORGANIZATION
rcraft Regifttenl
^
fioitt British experience that tremendous quan light antiaircraft guns are needed both in Great
Britain and the near East. The 40 mm Bofors gun is get ting the highest priority in manufacture. • It is consid ered essential that each combat division either infantry or
Armored must have — — one, regiment — — ( o f at least)-— forty-
eight guns of this type as an organic unit. It is recom mended that the reorganization of Antiaircraft be studied with
a view of making light antiaircraft units organic in the divi sion. .
Observor's-report - 10 September 1941-0CCA-/UR
•
r
The light antiaircraft regiment of the British Infantry Div ision is contrary to our usual employment of the light anti aircraft. It is at all times well up in the division ; .
picture and works hand in glove with the Division. Our method
of assignment of antiaircraft units for the protection of cer tain division installations has often resulted in the divi- ,
sion moving and leaving the antiaircraft protecting an empty
field, the division forgetting that it had antiaircraft pro tection.
M.A.R.4£217-London-4 June 1942
The antiaircraft regiment in a —-(British) Division 'is to
remain under the Commander of the divisional Royal Artillery.
He — ( w i l l have as his)—— deputy the Lieut. Colonel, com manding the'antiaircraft regiment. There is a Second
in Command —-(in the regiment) who attends to administra tion and ammunition supply for Antiaircraft units spread over
the Divisional area. •»
.. - M.A.R.4B325-London-9 June 1942
Each —-(British) -armored divisiorknow has its own light
antiaircraft regiment* - — *Jr
&. . BalloCff Notes-AUC-49-March 1942
;/ % V it A
-lfe-'
I - ORGANIZATION
4) Light Antiaircraft Regiments Cc^rW^S
In preparation for ~ — operations (in Libya m
teries (of the 57th Light antiaircraft regiment")
reorganized into four troops of three guns each. -—(Note:
This regiment had the best, record of any like regiment in the
Middle East.) The reorganization was effected with the
primary intention of preventing those, who might be tempted,
from splitting the four gun Troop into two sections of two guns>
which is unsound tactically and administratively. On the other
hand dispersion in the desert necessitates the protection of
a wide area and consequently deployment of light antiaircraft in to "penny packets". The new experiment, for this regiment, (the
three gun troop) proved to be successful, both tactically and
administratively, beyond expectations, — - It proved to be more
flexible, a more suitable one officer, command, of sufficient
fire density to act as a deterrent against small scale attack
of a small vulnerable point and to give detachments a feeling
of mutual support whilst permitting the maximum permissible
dispersion of antiaircraft resources amongst the too numerous
•demands. All battery commanders were pleased with the working
of this organization. A suggested layout for three gun
troop is a triangle with sides of 100 to 700 yards, the apex
to the North and the base to the South so that two guns can
include the danger approach direction of the sun in their pri ority arc. The experience in Libya justifies a strong recom mendation in favor of the suggested reorganization into six-
gun troops each of two sections of three guns. Where a posi tive deterrent against attack was required, a minimum of six
guns per vulnerable point was necessary to meet the intensity
of attack to be found in these operations.
M.A.R.2272-Cairo,Egypt-l March 1942
A new (table-of organization)—for a 54 gun — ( L i g h t An tiaircraft)-— regiment has been adopted increasing the "number
of guns from 12 to 18 per--battery. Light Antiaircraft Regiment
with an Infantry Division will be comprised *of 3 batteries
each of 18 guns, i.e. 54 guns.
May 1942-AA/64/8-AUC-76
As the production -of 40 mm Bofors materiel' has now- exceeded
giments (cont'd)
battalions of Infantry are being converted to Light Anti aircraft Artillery
( r e g i m e n t s ) — T h e Infantry.battal- .
ions have had on the average eighteen months service in
Great Britain and are considered well trained in Infantry
weapons and tactics. They are Considered ideal troops for
conversion to Light Antiaircraft Artillery Regiments for Ser vice with Field Forces, The total time involved in the con version will be about five months• One month will be spent
in basic antiaircraft technical training at a training center,
one month at a practice camp, two. months at operational sites
in the Air Defenses of Great Britain, and. one month mobile
training with a Brigade at an antiaircraft mobile
training center,
• M,A,R.45892-London-22 December 1941
The 25 Infantry Battalions being converted to Light Antiair craft regiments are to be assigned to Corps and Divisions,
M.A.R.46052rLondon*2 January 1942
Question: Where do you consider that cooking should be done
in a divisional light antiaircraft regiment? * •
Answer: The answer (in part) is a small petrol stove
for each detachment . In Air Defenses of Great Brit ain cooking has-been usually done by detachment on the. site.
In the desert it has been about 4 miles around a troop layout.
But in other places road distances may be much increased, A
Cooker has been provided and food taken around in hot con tainers, (It is believed that) centralized cooking by
troops should be provided but.troops should also be
prepared to cook by detachments ,
. . M,A,R,43856-London-3,l July 1941
'•
5)
Communications The JLa
ofcei^^onal system (of the Antiair '"ain)-— is primarily governed by the
'ational system of Fighter Command, A —
-IS
/ 7& * L * t ) & «J — M •, J M rr
Communications fcfer&!d) S-J <~ - "'"Kp^
I - ORGANIZATION 5)
MB ITS :
telephone circuit is provided'^^lfejte'H^&u^pers Royal Air
Force (Fighter) Sector.to the (^un^|emp:on Room."——
Gun Operation Rooms are connected by — teS^Jhone to the gun
stations.
M.A.R, 43868-London-l August 1941
(In the Kir Defenses of Great Britain) regimental and
battery commanders — are not in the intelligence network
that goes from fighter operations rooms to Gun Operations
Rooms and thence direct to firing units.
M,I,D.Rpt.-Uashington-l March 1941
— - Light Antiaircraft Regiments: — — of armored divisions em ploy radio for communications.
Balloch Notes AUC-49-March 1942
— — To what extent is radio for communication employed within
the antiaircraft regiment? .To what extent are telephones and
field wire employed?
Answer: —-(Radio n o w ) — is employed from regimental head quarters down to batteries in. both Heavy and Light (Mo bile Antiaircraft artillery,) ; Telephones and field wire are
issued for use when conditions become static, but are rarely
made use of in mobile exercises as the t,ime during which bat teries or troops remain in one position is so short that they
rarely have time to lay line.
.M„A,R•47497-London-21 April 1942
6)
Airborne Antiaircraft
..
• " The British Airborne Division at present is.well
trained except for continuing shortages of essential equip ' ment, especially gliders, It is now believed that the Divi ' sioiv will be able to operate as a unit early in 1943* (The division includes one Antiaircraft and ^ntitank-Company (24
guns) in each Air Landing Battalion) .
• . „M.A,R.47497-London-21 April 1942
If I|Pf ji
fl
sty'
I - ORGANIZATION
_ 1LS %.;r *
*Antiaircraft Battery of twelve 40 mm. Bofors guns is
contemplated for inclusion in the Air Landing Brigade —-(of
the British Airborne Division.) Several officers in the
division consider that this gun should not be used by the Air borne Division but that it shguld be replaced by more 20 ram.
Hispano-Suizas»
M.A.R.47497-London-21 April 1942
The Airborne Division is being slightly altered , (among other things to) place all artillery in the Division
under a regimental headquarters. (and to)—— increase the
light antiaircraft Battery from 12 to 18 Bofors .
M.A.R.48622-London-29 June 1942
7) Concepts
Question: How many Antiaircraft units can be handled by for mations without special Commander and Staff?
Answer: (by Army Commander - Great Britain) : A divisional
headquarters can control one light antiaircraft regiment as
maximum. Corps and Army must have a special Antiaircraft Com mander. The Antiaircraft Regimental Command can handle one
Regiment. For. more than one regiment a separate Commander and
Staff are necessary. Two or three regiments should be
grouped under a senior Antiaircraft Regimental Commander. The
limiting factor is —-(communications)
M.A.R.45737-London-8 December 1941
antiaircraft Brigades and Regimental organization should
it is suggested, be more flexible, The proposal is to
make all types of antiaircraft Batteries capable of independent
-action and administratively self-supporting; regimental head quarters to be trained to command and control up to six anti aircraft batteries which may be^^p&cture of heavy antiaircraft,
light antiaircraft, or ^ ^ ^ h i ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ t e r i e s . ,
ift directorate—
,43891-London-2 August 1941
-.20
It is the opinion of an Army Commander (Great Britain) that:
1) To avoid withdrawing light, Antiaircraft Artillery from
Divisions
(a) One — - Regiment per Corps is essential as Corps
troops in addition to Divisional regiments,
(b) One Regiment is desirable also as .rmy Troops,
2) No centralized control of Light .Jitiaircraft above Div ision is practicable in mobile operations,
3) Heavy antiaircraft*should be under Army control,
M.A.R.45737-London-8 December 1941
There should be no separate antiaircraft or antitank defense,
For technical training these elements should be organized
separately, but they should not so operate, They must be
included within the Infantry, Artillery, Engineerj Air,
and other components for operational action, -—(Every ele ment of a command,) should have both machine gun and 2 pounder antiaircraft weapons, There should be no heavy
antiaircraft artillery with the Division, This is an army
job and must be provided from army troops,
General DeGaul M.a.R,42326-London-8 February 1941
8) Miscellaneous Items
There were four (German) panzer armies operating in the
eastern,(Russian) front in 1941. It was revealed that an
Antiaircraft Corps was a part of the command of one of these
armies.
M.A.R.Berlin-l6 September 1941
The following shows the approximate number of antiair craft. artillery guns in two of the British theatres of opera tion. - —
tr® a
IS a m H l 1 i ff f'J, % m f i f '- I P I f
II
-21
Middle East
' • , .
324 ^ .
10
70S
M.A.R.4S797-London-9 July 1942
Question: "To what extent are automatic weapons provided for
local protection of other antiaircraft installations (i.e.,
gun, 40 mm. Bofors and searchlights)"? - —
Answer: Each Heavy ,'jrtiaircraft Section (Two guns) is pro vided with one light machine gun for its own protection. One
light machine gun is provided for each Light Antiaircraft
Troop of Bofors guns. Each searchlight in iJ.r Defenses of
Great Britain is provided with one light machine gun and one
3-inch Rocket Ir.ojector, single, used only in a light Antiair craft role. The antiaircraft light machine guns with Heavy
Antiaircraft guns and Searchlights and the 3-inch single pro jector, with Searchlights, M.ve the primary role of defending
the site against low flying or dive bombing attack. Antiair craft light machine guns may only be used against ground at tack if no air targets are in range. The light machine gun is
considered inadequate . The War Office is considering us ing the 20 mm. gun - probably the Sten. The scale (allow ance) of 20 mm guns for local protection of antiaircraft guns
will probably be much higher than those given above.
M.A.R.47422-London-21 April 1942
In the Field Forces workings/backwards from the first line, the
Royal Artillery Ordnance Qforps'provides Light iJitiaircraft
.Regimental Ordnance Worksite,p S^srections for light repairs. Be hind these are Heavy- \ktiaircraft and Searchlight Ordnance Work shop sections and behind thtse come the iirmy Ordnance workshops
and field parks^j^-n^tfi^at the Base is the Base Ordnance and
-22
I - ORGANIZATION
8) Miscellaneous Items (cont'd)*
r, %
ti I
workshops depot,
M. A .R . 43828-London-30 July 1941
.The new Royal Air Force Command is now being brought into ex istence ' (within the Royal lir Force) . The primary func tion of the command is to foster the development of all forms
of air cooperation with the P.rmy, — V'ithin the Army Coopera tion Command there will be two Royal Air Force groups, one of
which will comprise all the squadrons — - ( o f aircraft def initely allocated to the Army in Great Britain. The other
group will comprise the training and development units (in cluding those) which assist in the training of antiaircraft
gunners and searchlight crews. The staffs of the three head quarters, (i.e. the staffs of the army Cooperation Command,
and of the headquarters of the two Royal Air Force groups) as
.also the officers in the units and squadrons, will be a mix ture of Air Force and Army officers.
Ten.Les.Av.Bul.No.14-9 April 1941
(During 1940 2000)-1— soldiers' with' 1000 Light machine guns
were organized to a^siTs.tr in antiaircraft defense of ship ping on coastal vessels. ^JI additional 2,000 men were
provided for manning the armaments uf ships in harbors in
Great Britain to relieve the _ crews while in port. —-Then
in February, 1941, 600 men with 300 ..rmy and 300 Naval light
machine guns were provided for vessels plying between the
United Kingdom and West African ports to run as a shuttle ser vice. In March, 1941, 300 40 mm. Bofors guns each manned by
a detachment of six men, and 2,500 additional men with 2,500
light machine guns, were provided to extend the antiaircraft
protection to Trans-Atlantic vessels. The west African Ser vice -was extended to the Mediterranean and Red Sea Areas, and
the number of light machine guns was increased so that the arm ament became one man per light machine gun instead of two men.
In May, 1941, all military personnel employed in th^ antiair craft defense of shipping were formed into .four regiments-named
the Maritime Antiaircraft, Royal /u^till^^ljlthree' regiments to
administer and operate the light machine .gunners, the fourth
the Bofors o:unners. .n 1 V V 'vo
T M.A.R.45242-London-4 November 1941
in Antiaircraft organization differs from the British
mentally both in control and organization. It forms an
integral part of the Air "Force and is under the control of the
Air Ministry. The basic mobile or semi-mobile uftit is the gun
Abteilung (equivalent to approximately one and a half British
batteries) (equals about four United States batteries)— supported by searchlight, ballo n and transport units. Two or
more Abteilungen of varying types may be regimented together
accoraing to circumstances. Regiments may be grouped into
Brigades and Brigades into Corps. The sub unit of the Abteil ung is the TBatterieT (roughly equivalent to two British Troops).
Heavy Abteilungen are mostly organized on a mixed basis com posed of:
Three heavy Batterien each of four -88 mm.,guns and two -20
mm. guns.
(105 mm. guns may in some cases replace 88 mm. guns), and
two light Batterien of twelve -2u mm guns and four-60 cm.
searchlights.
Light Abteilungen consist of: '—(three light Batterien of
twelve -20mm guns, or (two light batterien of twelve -20 mm
guns and one batterien of nine 37 mm guns) and one search light Batterien of sixteen -60 cm. searchlights.
M..A.R.A3840-London-31 July 1941
— - The German antiaircraft artillery (Flak) is a part of the
German Air Force but during recent months, - — antiaircraft
units have been formed in the German Army proper.
M.A.R.18637-Germany-l6 September 1941
--— The German antiaircraft defense battalions and antiair craft defense companies '.are^fc|fantry units and as such belong
to the army proper. Thef^t%e&ps wear the field grey uniform
'Of the army and the id^ritafyingfcolor insignia of the infantry,
which serves to d^^r%itiate them from their .conirades of the
air force - the$*§j^(?3:craft artillery. The antiaircraft de 'ense compan^s^ajj^ ^completely motorized and are, therefore,
usually^^il%^n4^especially suitable for rapid employment.
3
f; f- ^ |4
I - ORGANIZATION
i M p i
l l i l i l
W
i % a t J
9) German Antiaircraft (cont'd)
Each company has 12 guns with protective shields mounted on
self-propelled carriages. These weapons are ready for action
at all times. ,
Translation in M.A.R.18254-Berlin,Germany-12 May 1942
Motorized Antiaircraft ba'tt'alions form part of the in fantry arm of the German Army. These battalions are equip ped with the following weapons:- 20 mm. Antiaircraft and
Antitank guns and 4-barrelled 2 cm* super-heavy machine
guns and 37 mm*dual-purpose antiaircraft-antitank guns.
M.A;R,44063-London-15 August 1941
B I B L I O G R A P H Y
(1)
British Army Organization (Standard Formations)
M.A.R.47103-London-27 March 1942
(2) Organization of the Headquarters of the Antiaircraft Com mand; of an Antiaircraft Corps; of an Antiaircraft Division;
and of an Antiaircraft Brigade in Air Defenses of Great Britain.
M.A.R.46867-London-7 March 1942
(3) War Establishments for Ordnance Antiaircraft Workshop
Sections.
M.A.R.2551-Gairo-25 May 1942
ERSONNSL
Government has been making a study of Manpower'
'for some time. There appears to be an acute shortage of Man power, Whenever reductions are considered various Commands
such as Balloon Command, Antiaircraft Command, and Coast De fense (Artillery) are required to affect a reduction in total
numbers both by reducing the number required for operation
and, by the replacement of men by Home Guards and women,
- •• M.A.R,47635-London-29 April-1942,
The.War Office is pushing recruitment of the Auxiliary Terri torial Service, They inten4 to have a force of 250,000 women
of which 10% or about 175,000 will be allotted to the Antiair craft Command. At present they are getting about 3000 per
week, but expect this to be increased to 5000 per week shortly.
The primary purpose is to release men in Antiaircraft Defenses
for other duty.
M.A.R.44364-London-5 September 1941.
The Antiaircraft Command has recently decided to employ women
as. an integral part of their batteries to replace men as oper ators on instruments such as predictors, heightfinders,
spotters. :The first heavyr antiaircraft battery to be con verted to a mixed role, received its female personnel in June
1941* The Auxiliary Territorial Service were given
four weeks1 basic training at an Infantry Training Camp and
four weeks1 technical training at a heavy Auxiliary Territorial
Service specialist training regiment. The whole battery under went four weeks'technical training at a heavy (mixed) Antiair craft training regiment and then proceeded to practice
camp for four weeks. On arrival at camp (the battery
was) joined by the operators fire control, (Radio Detec tion Finder personnel) w&a had been trained at an Operators
(is then
Fire Control training ^egiirfent,, ^ This battery to take) its pla$e, in Air Defenses of Great Britain,
^ v i : . \MVf.R.43941-London-7 August 1941
x
THe%^¥^ower allotted to Antiaircraft Artillery, Antiaircraft
Congand, Air Defenses of Great Britain, was 330,000.. A
reduction of 50,00*0 has been made or a new total of 280,000.
-26
II - PERSONNEL (cont
_ There have been basically no new alteration^ SW £££ man-power
situation. The release of men from Antiaircraft Commands de pends ultimately upon three factors: (1) The Auxiliary Ter ritorial Service (women) intake. (2) The number of Home
Guards who can be trained to man 'Z1 and Heavy Antiaircraft
Equipment, (3) The putting into effect of the revised Anti aircraft Command War Establishments. These' are gradual
processes and they will not be allowed to interfere with the
number of equipments of all kinds which it is operationally
necessary to man in Antiaircraft Command. Home Guard and Aux liary Territorial Service do not count against the man-power
ceiling. - — T h e employment of Auxiliary Territorial Service
reduces the rifle strength available for local protection.
\ M.A.R.47117-London-27 March 1942.
The British eventually expect to have 50$ of the regular
Heavy Antiaircraft batteries in Air Defenses of Great Britain
mixed, (men and women). At present about 30% have been so
converted. The basis of conversion is: all instrument numbers,
all Operators, Fire Control, and certain administrative per sonnel are women of the Auxiliary Territorial Service giving
a total of 229 women and 176 men per battery, There are
no operational Auxiliary Territorial Service (women) employed
in light Antiaircraft regiments. Administrative Auxiliary
Territorial Service are employed at battery and regimental
headquarters while units are deployed in a static role on
home service. Auxiliary Territorial Service are employed
on the same basis as for Light Antiaircraft in regular 'Z*
units where Home Guard are also employed. Ultimately they
will be in 85 batteries, It has not been finally decided
whether Auxiliary Territorial Service shall be employed oper ationally in searchlight units. They are employed adminis tratively on all battery and regimental headquarters. Ten
•experimental searchlight troops will shortly comS"out of
training for trial in an operational role.
M.A.R.48656-London-l July 1942
-—• All antiaircraft personnel have to jji QJiT in,"jp*1AXjlnn^ take
post in complete v & t ' M u r n ' ^ ^ ^
duty. as air sentrft J ^--The^e ^ ^ h o ^ e y e r , jc^rtlldp person nel (e,g« "spotters^| frgif g ^ c g ^ ^ M ^ ftx^cfcff performance
-27
II - PEESO
^fcirP Connection with the actual observation of
""night . For these, night vision tests are es sential and should be rigidly enforced to prevent the employ ment of individuals whose physical defects make impossible
the efficient performance of duties. The tests should in clude not only that for normal visual acuity, but also — (should test) telescopic and stereoscopic performance of
the subject-and be based on a very low contrast aggravated
by glare. No man with visual acuity of less than 6/6 in
either eye should be selected. The tests to be of value must
be simple and not require special apparatus. Pitmans
Night Vision testing apparatus is to be tried in Antiaircraft
Command and — - Training Establishments. To ensure main tenance of the required standards, the tests — - should be
carried out by medical officers and repeated at regular in tervals .
M.A.R.46668-London-19 February 1942
Regulations for the award of the Gorman Army Antiaircraft
insignia were published in German A m y Special Orders of
August 11, 1941* If members of the — — antiaircraft com panies or of the batteries of the antiaircraft artillery have
taken part in assaults, only the assault insignia may be con ferred on them for such employment — - . But the. antiaircraft
insignia can also' be awarded to- those who have, already been
decorated with the assault insignia. The assault insignia
referred to in the translation is a special insignia awarded
to German Antiaircraft units which have taken' part' in' the di rect attack against the enemy on three separate occasions, no
two of which can occur-on the same day. This Use of the
antiaircraft assault insignia as distinguished from the anti aircraft insignia implies the use of antiaircraft artillery
against ground targets in direct•support of other ground ele 1 r
ments,; .. -' M.A.R.18636-Berlin~l6 September 1941
Major General W. J. EldridgcVas recently promoted and assigned as Director olf jtolalrcraft and Coast Defense. - —
He is 44 ^ears b M ^ served as a field gunner and on
War.r — — After the War he was de -• tl^''Kbyal Air Force for two years and is a quali
-28
fied pilot. He is a graduate of the Gunnery Staff^cJbrise
(Field, Coast, and Antiaircraft), was an Instructor, Gunnery
at the School of Antiaircraft Defense, and is a graduate
of the staff College, He was an instructor at the B'oyal Air
Force Staff College (considered an unusual honor for an
Army officer). His work (early in the war) was as G1
(Operations) at the Antiaircraft Command, ..
M.A.R.45981-London-24 December 1941
Three (young) officers of Antiaircraft Command have
recently been promoted to the grade of Lieutenant Colonel,
commanding Antiaircraft Regiments, The (age of the)
youngest was 22 and oldest 24• — o n e was promoted
from the grade of Captain, General Whittaker stated these
officers were exceptionally good, They had been in
the service since the early part of the war,
M.A.R.47352-London~13 April 1942
B I B L I O G R A P H Y
l)
Special Aptitude tests for Antiaircraft Personnel.
M.A.R,46827-London-5 March 1942
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
e production figures of iintiair 2 May, 1942) in United Kingdom
craft1 are as follows:
40„mnu 420 1942 May June 440 July 460 480 August October ) November ) 1500 December )
3.7" Mobile 3.7" Static 70 " 75 80 85 300
•
•
•
1943 -1st hiarter 1500 2nd Quarter •1500 3rd Quarter 1500
"
100 100 100 100 3.00
5.25"
) ) )
Nil
) 1
--
300 300 15
300 300 30
300 300 '45
M.A.R.48245-London-5 June 1942
Question: What is the rate of ammunition consumption per gun
for all types of antiaircraft guns?
Answer? The principle is.to have a large capital reserve,
average capital reserve is 2000 rounds per gun both heavy and
light for Field Forces in Air Defenses of Great Britain
the figure is 1,100 high explosive per heavy and 1*500 per
light gun and in Malta it is 3000 rounds per gun both heavy
and light. In general, overall monthly expenditure is unlike ly to exceed 100 rounds per gun for heavy and 50 rounds per
gun for light antiaircraft guns. The Office of Director of
iirtillery, Ministry of Supply advises that their reserve stock
is based on an expenditure per heavy gun per day of 5 rounds
and per light gun per day of 8 rounds* These figures are based
on expenditures in France, in Air Defenses of Great Britain,
with Field Forces, and in ports abroad such as Malta, etc*
M.A*R.44938-London-l6 October 1941
*
ft
*eJ$ Jpjyvcvpr Hcjyaf Artillery, who is charged with mat-
To with Antiaircraft ammunition in.the ( T ar Office)
stated that the expenditure of 3.7 and 4.5 antiaircraft
shell for the period 11 September 1940 to 21 May 1941 for the
-30
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIP!
l)
Ammunition (cont'd)
t exceed antiaircraft activities in Great Brrl ^{jFeiise on
ed) 5 rounds per gun per day. He was ered)
40 mm Bofors ammunition expenditure but I that the expenditure was about the same,
*M.A.R.43492-8 July 1941
The total expenditures
(of Antiaircraft ammunition)
in Great Britain during the- past year have been less than 10/b
of the expenditures for the previous year, even though the to tal number of guns.has decidedly increased*
M.A.R.48419-London-15 June 1942
The following data (had been)^— given for the actu al weekly average expenditures in the Middle East, in terms
of average (number, of) rounds p.er. gun from January 1st
to April 30, 1942: . , ..
Heavy Antiaircraft Artillery - 19.7 rounds
Light Antiaircraft Artillery - 16.8 rounds
M.A.R.4855 6-London-24 June 1942
1200 rounds per antiaircraft gun were sent (to Iceland)
with the (British) force. In addition to the usual
small arms ammunition carried in trains, two months' sup ply at 6,000,000 rounds per month were sent.
N. A *R. 1545-London-lO J.uly 1941
Question: How much ammunition is carried with the antiaircraft
gun battery and with the antiaircraft machine gun battery?
fSBp!^
Answer: ' The allotm^ht of.antiaircraft ammunition for Air Def-
n _i£ - "r>.i/.!ie±. _ »X iitab j static ... j • _ .
enses of G: conditions is: Type 4.5") 3.7") 3 "
H.E. Sharp 20 H.E. 400
-31
If
|AD . $B>60.
• • IAD 620 40 7.00 • (cont'd)
Ill - MATERIEL AND ECUIPk
Mft'd) '
EAD
40 mm
Shrap 40' HIE* 352 A.T. 48
IAD
40
70
500
600
The above is subject to increase under conditions peculiar
to more isolated places such as Orkneys and Shetlands, North ern Ireland, Iceland, etc.. The allotment of antiaircraft
ammunition for the Field Forces is as follows:
3d line
Type Per Gun 2d line Echelon
Echelon 3.7" 3" 20 cwt • ' •
-
•
40 mm
60 60
H.E, 154) Shrap 22)
52 H.E. 312 52
Shrap 40 176 H.E. 400 176
A.T. 48 (x) 24 24 . M.A,R,44938-London-15' October
There was a school of thought that at shorter ranges
shrapnel might have a bigger lethal, effect than high explosive.
It was decided,- therefore, that shrapnel should be used
for fuzes 8 and below, This was very complicated,
It is now considered — - doubtful whether, in fact,
shrapnel is as good as high explosive except at Very short
ranges. The ruling has therefore been abolished and shrapnel
is now used only for the engagement.of close and diving tar gets,
. M.A,.R#48422-London-15 June 1942
Officers of the Gunnery Division of the British Admiralty are
emphatic in their desire to impress upon" our Navy Department
the disadvantage of attempting to have more than one type of
Antiaircraft projectile supplied \o a gun battery. They hope
that their conclusions based &n/experience in action may be
heeded should an$'*sucb, grqcedtire be contemplated by* our ser N•A.R,2715-London-28 November 1941
-32
Question: V«hat appears to be the relative effectiveness of
high explosive shell, as compared to shrapnel as antiaircraft
ammunition*
Answer: No comparison can be made between the lethal effects
of high explosive and shrapnel shell since they are used in
entirely different roles, Shrapnel is generally used when
firing fuzes not longer than Fuze 4* High explosive shell is
used exclusively for normal engagements* and the'lethal radius
of burst is about 60 feet,
M,A«R•44938-London-15 October 1941
Question: - — "Is there any difference in the visibility
characteristics of high explosive shell and shrapnel,"
Answer: Smoke -effect of shrapnel bursts and high explosive
bursts are very similar but no smoke box is included in the
shrapnel and, therefore, the latter has comparatively little
flash, There is a clear and distinct smoke puff from an
high eocplosive burst which is produced because of the" smoke
box, — - The smoke box contains three peJLlets- of red, phos phorous, • Although shrapnel does not contain a smoke box the
pellets are covered with resin to hold them in position and
when the shell explodes the resin is blown out and causes
a definite smoke puff, The smoke from a shrapnel is black - er than that from an high explosive., and while clearly visible,
it does not remain-visible for long,
M.A.R.47421-London-l6 .April 1942
All authorities questioned state definitely that high explo sives or even semi-armor piercing shell with small high explo sives are out for antitank work. Armor piercing solid shot is
being produced for all calibers that are expected to fire
against tanks.
i . . ; Qrd.Int.Bulletin No.18-14 November 1941
ates armor and then explodes. The other type is a high ex plosive shell for use against personnel and other targets.
Paraphrase of Code Radiogram-9 May 1941
It has recently been decided to issue a proportion of A,P,
,303 ammunition for use in rifles- and light machine guns J
against lightly armoured cars, gun shields, lorry engines,
and spipers1 loophole plates. This.type of ammunition should
NOT be used against aircraft nor against tanks.
Army Training Memorandum No, 43
In conversation it was brought out that the Germans use
about one (l) armor piercing shell in three (3) in their small
arms antiaircraft weapons,
M.A.R.42249-London-January 29, 1941
(British) Light Antiaircraft Regiments are told to hold 12/o A.F, ammunition, • . Balloch Notes-iJJC-49-March 1942
A further requirement for antiaircraft guns is flashless pro pellant,- By night it is especially desirable that the flash
of the guns should not be a sign to the enemy that he should
take evading action by altering course, Flashless propellant
is being introduced as soon as the components can be made avail able «
B,E,S,96-Uashington-27 March 1941
It has been repor$4ci t'hift a*.'JSLashless propellant is now
being used by sy^^gsrmari ^avy-Antiaircraft defenses. The
use of th^s tfel^f %)^llant was first reported by the Navy
after German destroyers and its adoption
'purposes is a natural development,
M,a,L,45908-London-18 December 1941
-34
III - MATERIEL AND
l)
Ammunition (con t M ) o'.;
German radar-controlled antiaircraft T T r ^ ^ ^ c C u r a t e , Brit ish Bomber crews are careful while flying over any terri tory where there are known to be antiaircraft installations,
the Germans a r e ' — using flashless propelling charges to
avoid giving away the location of antiaircraft units, - —
Air Forces General Information Bulletin No,3-12 August 1942
In considering the production of a -gun to deal with targets
up to 50,000 feet the question was raised of the maximum pres sures with the new flashless propellant. He said that this
propellant had not been fired at pressures above about 24
tons per square inch, and he understood that there was a pos sibility of abnormally high pressures being realized if it
was fired at a designed pressure exceeding 25 tons per square
inch. It was agreed firing trials with flashless propellant
at this pressure, initially in a Bofors pressure barrel would
be arranged, and, if this was satisfactory, in a 3»7 inch bar rel.
L.K.L*Rpt.-13 August 1941
Dummy gun flashes are believed to be in use - — ( b y the Ger mans) . They are frequently employed near dummy installa tions and may be recognizable by being smaller or of slightly
different colour from real flashes.
Air Ministry Weekly Intelligence Story
Up to 27 May 1942 - No. 143
At 12:30' a.m. today the reporting officer observed* from his
apartment (in Berlin) the test firing of approximately
100 starshells by German antiaircraft artillery,, These.shells
were fired by what was estimated -to be a three-gun 88 mm anti aircraft battery. Full illumination required about one half
of a second to develop and remained for an average period of
thirty seconds. The total amount of light given off by 36
shells when grouped close together appeared -to be somewhat
less than that given off • by the' full,; mocti, The -color given
off was white. During the ^e^^e^i|an^night fliers were
. y i t p j L l i v v I t i C U .
-35
H I - MATEHIEL ,.ND EQU;
1) A
vicinity, although none - appeared to be illu the starshells, The test observed early this
forning suggests that these shells ( m a y ) — be used to help
the antiaircraft to locate hostile planes whose position has
been approximately determined by either sound or electrical
means (or) it is possible that (the) starshells may
(be used to) assist night fighters in locating hostile
bombers,
M,A,R,18546-Berlin, Germany-5 August 1941
Question: The British get a smoke puff from their high ex plosive burst, '.hat is used for smoke producing element?
iinswer: The smoke producing element consists of red phos-'
phorus, amorphous Grade I mixed with five percent mineral red
jelly which is pressed in suitable moulds to form pellets un der such a load as will give the required density, There
is no smoke box included in the 40 mm, shell since no atten tion is paid to the burst at the position of self-destruction,
M.A.R.44186-London-23 August 1941
British 3 inch high explosive bursts are at least a hundred
and probably a thousand times, as bright as the American T.N.T,
bursts without phosphorus and five times as bright as Venus
when bursting at slant ranges of approximately 6000 yards.
This is'definitely due in all probability to the presence of
the phosphorus smoke box in the British shells, — - Several
British i^rmy officers have stated that the 3,7-inch shell
bursts-(H,E,) are visible for distances of 30 miles, 'This'is
based on observations of the antiaircraft barrage at Bristol
and Southampton from known distances*
M.A.R»46014-Lcndon-29 December 1941
A pilot officer, Royal Air - For qo, ^wlk has been on 15 bombing
flights to various points? and \ ^ f & H in the recent day light raid on the F r e n ^ ^ % t %ays : that German antiaircraft
fire almost invarlab^«iJI5s behind the plane and gradually
approaches nea^r^ljiiW9is initially good in height and direction.
-36
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPA l i i •. 8 1)
?
Ammunition (cont'd)
|
M
®
The pilot, at night, can see the bursts behind him in a mir ror and keeps on his course until the bursts begin to be close
. when he changes course. In daytime, it is almost impossible
to see the bursts.
N.A.R.l68-London-29 January 1941
Within the pa^t six weeks, the Germans have begun to use a
new type of antiaircraft shell which, upon bursting, distri butes incendiary fragments similar to an incendiary bomb.
These are more feared by the pilots than the ordinary
high explosive shell because (l) a hit does not result in a
simple and perhaps non-vital puncture as with the shell splint er but may set the plane on fire, and (2) the range of the or dinary high explosive fragment is 50 to 70 yards while the
range of the incendiary elements is (thought to be) about 150 yards from the point of burst. This special shell is
used in combination with the ordinary high explosive so that
the pilot, followed by a succession of bursts does not know
when an incendiary shell will be used and cannot wait as long
as formerly to change course. Bomber losses have been greater
since this shell has been used,
' N«A.R,l"68-London-29 January 1941
A number of fuzes that may give greater freedom from fuze
lead errors, or greater accuracy, or greater rate of fire
are in production'or under development.
1) Clockwork fuzes are replacing the powder fuze, which
requires correction for atmospheric conditions and tempera ture, and is subject to deterioration. They go to 43 seconds
tLme of flight, as against 24 seconds with the existing powder
fuze, apd so enable us to use the full, range of our guns (sub ject to predictor limitations): and the mean error of fuze
time is .08 second, as against ,.2 second with the powder fuze.
There is little or no doubt that the Germans use a clockwork
fuze. - wem
5 - 11 i 1 *
2). Time and percussion fu£e fpP und£r design, to replace
existing heavy Antiaircraft time fuzes". It increases the
-37
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIP MENT
1)
Ammunition (cont'd)
Wa^h^ngtori
t '^^photography of antiaircraft shell
e-Theodolite, a development of the Re ory, Kodak, Ltd., I'Theelstone, Middlesex.
M.A.R.44198-London-25 August 1941
One case of a failure .occurred with 40 mm. gun due to muz zle, cover not being removed. The round exploded at the muz zle. No member of the gun section was injured but a civil ian workman nearby was.
M.A.R.43331-London-25 June 1941
In the middle east where the 3.7" antiaircraft guns are
placed in the desert, several premature explosions have oc curred, causing damage to gun, viz; barrel to bulge. No one
has been killed. Guns are kept loaded and it is believed
that sand had accumulated in the bore when the gun was fired
and as the projectile moved forward, a mass was formed caus ing the shell to explode prematurely. The Director of Ar tillery, Ministry of Supply, advised, if guns were to be kept
loaded, to place a thin piece of paper or cloth over the
muzzle so that sand could not get into bore and to fire the
projectile through the thin piece of paper or cloth.
Ord.Int.Bulletin No.18-14 November 1941
There have been at least twelve accidents with the 40 mm
Bofors gun ammunition due to prematures in the bore. Several
cases have occurred in which the barrel was bulged and fir ing was stopped. No one has been injured. Many other cases
have been reported after firing has ceased and in some cases
when the gun was in for repairs and it was found that the
firing lands were flat, . This type has occurred both in Great
Britain and in the M i d d ^ p ^ % t , It is believed that ammuni tion is at fault di^e %>%P%3»rienced personnel (in factories).
It is believed tha|%he caiis^is in the fuse and not the igni ter but t^e ^ieg'^ee^Sl plroe has not been determined. This
. aramunitiort^liasSwedish Percussion Fuze DA No,250 Mark i/L
(larval T m j ^ t f s h have a Fuze Percussion DA 251 Mark i/L
JNFIS-4T
^
• •fJr*t
* # rf ct r 4
* # f? Y * d
a
Oi
J
III - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
l)
Ammunition (cont'd)
(now obsolescent; and a Mark Il/L. This latter fuze has
been used only on a trial basis and no operational firing
has been conducted, but so fat* no trouble has been exper ienced, The DA 251 MK Il/L fuze is being manufactured in
Canada,
M.A,R,43381-Lo ndon-25 June 1941
At approximately 0415 hours on 19,4,41 a land mine fell ap proximately 10 yards from the gun pit and 20 yards from
the "on site" magazine of a 3.7-inch Antiaircraft gun site. .
On this gun pit 27 rounds of "ready for use" ammunition were
hurled about, being badly damaged. 132 rounds in boxes in
the recesses were also damaged by the blast which tore off
both the steel doors of the gun pits, and in addition either
tore off or badly buckled the steel recess doors, Ammunition
in No, 4 gun pit was spattered with clay, but was otherwise
undamaged as was also the case on the remainder of the guns.
The "on site" magazine was badly damaged by the explosion,
blast blowing out the complete front wall and also — dam aging the other walls. The stocks inside were moved out of
position. No rounds, either on the gun pits or in the maga zine exploded as a result of the mine,
• " British Ordnance Bd-13l/PX-August 1941
2)
Light Antiaircraft Weapons
Characteristics of British Light Antiaircraft Guns
Equipment
40 m m .
Muzzle Velocity (ft.per sec.)
2790-
IliffLi
Vickers Mk VIII Twin.
2200
1 3 v
Vickers Mk
VIII single.
2200
2
D.A, and tracer. D.'A. vind .tracer. D . A . and tracer Self-destroying "SelfVdestroying Self-destroying 5 to 6 sees. 5 to 6 sees. 5 to 6 sees.
(cont'd)
-41- *
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIP MENT
40 mm.
Vickers Mk Vickers Mk
VIII Twin. VIII single.
120
240
Maximum.slant range (yds) 3200 (present ammunition)
2500
2500
8500
6200
6200
Maximum Quadrant Elevation 8500
6200
6'200
Rate of fire, (rounds per
equipment)
Maximum effective Height (ft)
(present ammunition)
Method of control
120
Predictor Forward Forward or ForArea Sight . Area Sight
ward Area
Sight
AUC-33-February 1942
The 40 mm. was selected —--(by the British)—- after exten sive trials with lower calibres against modern aircraft as the
lightest high explosive projectile which is likely to give
lethal effect (ranging from immediate crash to failure to re turn to base). f It was later married to the No. 3 predictor
with magslip transmission of power control in order to in crease the chance Of hitting against - — aircraft operating
down to (about) 500 feet at 400 m.p.h. - speeds which
defeat the possibility of accurate following of dials by hand
operation. The accuracy of following is such that the maxi mum rate of fire is now usually slowed down to half speed to
increase steadiness of gun platform, and to assist accurate
observation of tracer path,,
5S-112-Washington-31 March 1941
-42
III - M'TERIEL AND EQUIPMENT " ^ &
h
A'i i 9 ^ ij^ % 2) Light Antiaircraft Weapons (contrd)* i J ^ l , # r*'
vfcfM • '
In the organization of the British armored Divide
a regiment of Bofors (2-pdrs.) (in France)—
used as antiaircraft weapons. —-All officers who commanded
such units in France were outspoken in their confidence in
the weapon and stressed the number of dive bombers shot down
by it. Based upon their experience in France, when they
v.<ere subjected to dive bombing and had little or no air sup port of their own, they are convinced that this type of fire
is (necessary) not only to destroy hostile aircraft, but
also to maintain the morale of their own troops.
M.A.R.42l84-London-22 January 1941
The Mark I Bofors is considered more adaptable for use in com bined operations (than the Mark II.). The Mark II is 2 , 2"
longer and has only 7" clearance while the Mark I has 18" clear ance. The Mk I is "sprung" and has a better "tow" rod making
it easier to handle. For early antiaircraft support of
assault battalions in combined operations these advantages and
disadvantages are (considered to be) of primary importance.
— - The Mark II does not have sufficient clearance to get over
wire obstruction nor to go up banks or beaches and over
very rough ground. All Mark ^ Bofors are earmarked for as sault brigades in combined operations. Mark I Bofors can
be easily loaded in and unloaded from Mechanical Landing Craft
and Tank Landing Craft whereas difficulty is experienced
with the Mark II Bofors.
M.A.Rf47576-London-27 April 1942
In the Self-Fropelled'Morris Mounting,-40 mm. Bofors, there
are two vehicles,"one for the gun and one for the predictor".
The Morris predictor vehicle engine will furnish the power for
the predictor.
M.A.R.47757-London-6 May 1942
Set forth below are particulars of the British 20 mm. Antiair craft Sten Gun. The* (design of t h i s ) — Polish Sten
was put forward by the Polish Design Group working with the
Chief Superintendent, Armament Design^ Jiteshunt (England)
-43
.
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
2)
Light Antiaircraft Weapons (cont'd)
• 1 J/' O K
11) ,
>r
.,. r
P1** $ &&
gis i| ing planned. The initial order is
This weapon will take the place
craft Equipment now in the hands of
units.
Polish Sten,
Particulars Vieight of complete gun
121 lbs,
Weight of barrel only
29Jibs,
Overall length of gun ' Overall length of barrel Total number of parts
7* -1 3/4
57"
108
M,A.R.46924-London-12 March 1942
British are developing two mobile mounts for 20 mm. guns, the
Airborne Division model and the Vauxhall all purpose universal
model. The.latter will probably be adopted for universal use
as it fits all 20 mm. guns and can be used for terrestial and
antiaircraft targets. M.A,R,48524-London-22 June 1942
The 2 cm, is the main *—(German light antiaircraft)
armament although the 3.7 cm. (1.45 in.) is also met with
in considerable numbers. Other weapons in service are the 4 cm.
(1.57 in.) and the 4.7 cm. (1*85 in.). A 5 cm. (1.97 in^h)
"Flak' 41" is very recent introduction on which-no details are
as yet available, • :
Air Min. Weekly Int. Summary Up to 27 May 1942-#143.
A new four-barrel German antiaircraft gun of 3.7 cm. calibre
• ----- has become the standard equipment of the recently founded
....antiaircraft units of the German Army (as distinguished
from the FLAK of the Geri|a#^-i.ir Force)——.,. The Germans, claim
... v .that this n^w proved^a-very useful weapon against
•
~ '
, ;
Paraphrase-17 September 1941
ILL - MATERIEL AND ECJXJIPMENT
2)
/./jU M
Light Antiaircraft Weapons (coni^d)
- — The German four-barrelled — * Ani itank Flak ierling 38 consists of four 2 cm. l^fKr It may
be employed either against ground or aerial f f - it
••hormllly
is normally transported on a trailer—-* The fired with its mounting on the ground and with the trailer re moved. It can, however,-be fired from the trailer. A trav erse of only 10° at top elevation is possible in this posi tion. —' Two foot-levers operate the trigger mechanism. Each
foot-lever actuates the triggers of two diametrically opposite
guns (i.e. the top left and bottom right and top right and
bottom .left). This .arrangement'provides uninterrupted contin uous fire. Vihile .two guns are firing, the magazines of the
other two can be changed. When both levers are operated all
four guns fire simultaneously. Should there be a stoppage
on one or more guns the remaining guns can continue fire.
Provision is also made for single-shot or continuous fire on
each weapon. The sight used against aerial targets is the
Flakvisier 40, which is thought to be a course- and speed sight
similar to the Flakvisier 35. A telescopic sight is fitted
for engagement of grounci targets and armored fighting vehicles,
•• . ' • '13/ATK-.AL-M. 1.10-War- Office-1 April 1942
The Germans employ two self-propelled gun mounts for 20 mm
Antiaircraft/Antitank guns;- and one self-propelled mount for
3"7 mm Antiaircraft/Antitank guns.
M.A.R.4250-Bern-l May 1942
The 5 cm. (1,97-in.) antiaircraft gun (5 cm. Flak 41) is
the latest German antiaircraft gun to be brought into Service.
It is apparently an automatic weapon with increased fire pow er and range. It is produced in either a mobile(on trailer
204) or static version. No other details are known yet, The
Germans have evidently found the need for a mobile antiaircraft
gun of calibre between their 3.7 cm. (l.45-in) and 8.8 cm.
(3.46-in.) antiaircraft guns. The Czech 4.7 cm. (1.85-in.)
gun has never been•brought into service in any numbers, having
apparently proved a failure, 5 cm. is a German calibre and
therefore a logical choice for the new antiaircraft gun. No
doubt, as with all mobile German antiaircraft: guns, it has
also been designed for use agaijast armored fighting vehicles.
1 M
SJ
T
III - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
2)
Light antiaircraft Weapons (cont'd)
The 5 cm. Flak of urse not be confused with the 5
cm. antitank jjuj jfcym. Pak 38), which is an antitank gun pure
Tech. Rpt.No.66-V/ar Office-7 March 1942
A 3»2 cm. Automatic twin-barrel gun is reported to be in pro duction (in Germany) . There is some d'ubt as to its ul timate. employment, whether as a dual-purpose antiaircraft/anti tank gun or as a tank gun -—(but) a further report states
that a pair of guns is mounted on a stand, so that there- are
four barrels to a stand. In this form it will probably be used
as an antiaircraft equipment. . G.S.I.-G.H.Q,,M.E.F. Tech. Int. Summary
Cairo, Egypt-18 August 1941
The Maximum effective ceiling of the —<•(German) light an tiaircraft guns is based on the time of burning of the tracer
and self-destroying element, but owing to the limitation of
the fire control methods, accuracy falls off at the end of the
flat trajectory; this means th:jt in actual fact effective en gagements are unlikely above 3,500 ft, with the 2 cm., 6,000 7,000 ft., with the 3.7 cm..,, and 8,000 ft. with the 4 and 4.7 cm.
Air Min, Weekly Int. Summary up to 27 May 1942-#143
antiaircraft gun (Scotti) together with the
The 2-cm. . 2-cm, antiaircraft — ( B r e d a ) gun, is the standard light an tiaircraft equipment in the Italian Army. Particulars are:
' 2720 f/s
Muzzle velocity , . Maximum Horizontal range 5900 yds.
Maximum effective ceiling 7000 ft.
Theoretical rate of fire 250 r.p.m.
Practical rate of fire 12Q r.p.m.
Length of bore 70 cals.
:
Weight in action 501. lbs. Maximum elevation • 85°
,. -10°
Maximum depression • . ..... 'Maximum traverse ',360°
.Weight of projectile, , .275 lbs. '• .:
Type of shell ".i-'^^V . H.E V tracer.
' Type of f u z e ^ * •:.'. Super sensitive percus •• • ' • sion self-destroying.
Sig^ta^ .^v••.. :x. ., v -Course .and speed.
-x. Incg.,^1 to Ltr.45783/SAG/jit-ll December 1941
wK '
.
-46
.
.
.
.
.. _
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIP MENT
2)
Light antiaircraft Weap >ns (cont'd)
P r m
(The captured Italian)—* 20 ram* BREDA antiaircraft/anti tank gun % s J>lf |he:*whole ironed' a satisfactory weapon from the mechanical poiSfe ^ k i Q &ut from certain recurrent defects and has not proved a cfoMpMe success in desert warfare, owing to its predisposition to stoppages caus ed by dust and sand/ The telescopic sight originally fit ted, is not suited for tho type of targets normally engaged, and experience has proved that an open sight is preferable. Various designs have been made, and it is hoped'to come to a final decision in the immediate future* The traversing gear is very low geared, and it has been found better to declutch and traverse bv movement of the layer's seat. M.A,R.2457-Cairo, Egypt-28 April 1942
(The Captured Italian) 20 mm. ISOTTA FRASCHINI antiair craft gun — - has proved much more satisfactory than the — (captured) BREDA, and has not the tendency to stoppages
caused by dust and sand. The elevating and traversing gears
are more robust. This equipment has required very little
workshop maintenance. The 20 ram. high explosive shell has
very little splinter effeat. Aircraft have repeatedly been
hit without bringing them down. It is generally accepted
that at least two 20 mm. guns to one BOFORS 40 mm. are re quired to defend locality. The 20 mm. is more comparable
to a heavy machine gun. Although the rate of fire is greater
than the 40 ram gun the maximum vertical range is about 7,000
feet the remaining velocity at this height being considerably
less than the 40 mm. Tracer is easy to observe at all ranges.
(The gun is fitted with a) course and speed sight
(but no useable sample, has been obtained) . The small open
sight was not an efficient substitute. The alternative solu ti®n which was in use (around Tobruk was) to construct
a forward area sight on the lines of the BOFORS 40 mm. ele vation layers "clock" sight. Two of these were put in use
and proved satisfactory (as substitutes)•»—.
M.A.R.2457-Cairo,Egypt-28 April 1942
3) -Heavy antiaircraft Guns
. |% . v
V .
Characteristics x>f British Heavy'Antiaircraft Guns:
Equipment
I- o. *** Muzzle Velocity (f/s)
inch 4.5 inch 3.7 inch (twin) (4.45 ins.)
2600 2400 2600
3 inch
2000
H I - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
3)
Heavv Affair emit W a n s (c ont1 d)
* && V " V. • * Vi VJiflK •25 inch 4«5 inch 3.7 inqh (4.45 ins.)
3 inch
Projectile (lbs)
55'
28
It.
Nominal "Lethal " Ra'dius" (ft.) '\
90
60
45
8
10
16
4
" * •
Rate of Fire 16 (rds. per two-guns)
Maximum slant range
(yards)
Powder fuze not used Clockwork f u z e - — 18000 Maximum height (feet) . Powder fuze Clockwork fuze
not used 45000
Vickers Predictor- 38000 Sperry •Predictor— not used *
Maximum quadrant
elevation
not used
16000
not used' 40000 29060
25000
70° ;
10500 15000
28000
8000
not used.. _
21000
36060
not used
29000 25000
. 17000 not used
80c
80
80 319.13/AUC-33-February 1942
; '
t
The British 3.7 inch gun has - — been under test by the
United -States Army. Cables indicate that the tests were suc cessful, but tnat the 90 'mm. was already tooled up for pro-^
duction. The comparative operational data of the two
equipment's are:
British 3.7" U.S. 90. mm..
Shell weight Maximum ceiling Rate of fire A * %
'
2'8 lbs 21 lbs.
T' V.%,000 ft. 34,000 ft.
12 r.p.m. • 18 r.p.m,
-113-Washington-31 March 1941
ng to')-— information
(from the Middle East)
zczmmzm.
III - MATERIEL AND EQUIIMENT
3)
Heavy Antiaircraft Guns (cont'd)
regarding the 3.7" (approximately 94 .mm) antiaircraft gun
with Matador tractor and the gun layer (set*^™ has
crossed any ground that can be crossed .by wheeled/motor
transport. This applied both t!o rotoiiides<&jfg%cwid and to'
loose sand. Speed of 10 miles per hour '(has- been) at tained across desert. The equipment including predictor was
not affected by sand getting into the works. Levelling of
the equipment in rough ground presented no serious difficul ties, The 3.7" was on one occasion eight miles southwest of
Gambut sited on the escarpment to cover the Trlgh Capuzzo and
engage motor transport columns. No difficulty was experienced
in training the guns onto the road. Guns had been "winched"
up to the escarpment. The battery Commander who gave the in formation was enthusiastic about the equipment generally. — The gun laying set accompanied the battery and worked satis factorily under the same conditions,
M.A.R.43068-London-23 May 1941
• -:'' ;'
The (3.7" antiaircraft)— gun stood up well to the travel ling conditions experienced in the — ( M i d d l e East)-*— desert,
the.heavy springing together with the big tires showed to '
great advantage, - — F o u r 3.7 inch guns took part in an — advance of the Armored Division over extremely severe country,
•
M. A. R, 43 565-London-ll July 1941
The 4.5" — ( 4 . 4 5 i n c h ) — antiaircraft gun of Naval type with
pedestal mounting, fires a 56 pound projectile»to the same
range-as the 3.7" antiaircraft mobile gun firing a 28 pound
projectile, Detailed characteristics are:
4,45 Caliber, inches : Muzzle velocity, feet per second (new 2490 f/s) 2350
Barrel length, calibers (approx.)43
Weight of projectile, pounds — . 56
Range, horizontal, yards—20,500 Range, vertical, yards —13,500 Time to 15,000 ft. 45°E, seconds-^ 11.93 The 4.5" antiaircraft gun is fundamentally a Naval type
1
o X S I ^ I t I I
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
3)
Heavy Antiaircraft Guns (cont'd)
and is so used, Its. function as Army materiel is- fixed de- :
.it applied to the Navy mounting and
fense. 'The consisting of two '2MV sled bodies is intended to facilitate
movJLn^%he gun to z jz'vftcrete emplacement but is not intended
" - * a mobile materiel.
V " M.A.R.39971-London-27 February 1939
The British Navy has recently turned over to. the Army three
double'mountings, 5.25" guns for'use in Air Defenses of Great
Britain. The Army is going into production of the. 5*25" mount
ing which is to be used in a dual antiaircraft - coast de» fense role. The muzzle velocity is about 2875 feet per second.
• There will be no production model and the Army will go
directly into production of about 200. The project will ulti
mately call for about 400-500 for antiaircraft*
M.A.R.43940-London-8 August 1941
The 5.25-inch (British)-— Coast Artillery - Antiair craft Dual Role (anti-ship and antiaircraft) equipments to be
known as the "Mounting 5.25-inch Antiaircraft Mark IB" is
expected to - — start coming from production early next year.
It is to be mounted in a concrete emplacement and is hydraul ically- operated. It is capable of all round traverse and ele vations between minus 5 and plus 70 degrees. The general
policy will be to install these dual role guns at ports where
long range close defense against ships is required, and the
scale of air attack justifies supplementary, heavy antiair craft cover. • M.A.R.48228-London-4 June 1942
The standard major caliber German' antiaircraft gun is the 88
mm weapon. Xhere is also a 105 mm gun, some 127 mm.guns, and
a few last two are naval pieces installed
,s. These are all German guns. In aadi some captured materiel in use.
M.A\R*.18739-Ber 1 in-3 November 1941
Ill - MATERIEL AI® 3)
JENT
fj B J|jf f ® af Ji 5 r'T7 m
Heavy . n t i ^ a f t Guns, (cont'd) V- o •
. ,
It has been definitely established Isrftwo standard
German guns-are in service on railway.mountings, — 7 They are the 8,8 cm. (3.46-in.) and 10.5 cm. (4.14-in) a n tiaircraft guns.
Extracts from Summary of Technical Reports
No. 66-War Office-? March 1942.
The 8.8 cm. (3.46 in.) is the main German heavy antiair craft weapon; the 10.5 cm. (4,14 in) is also in use and is
likely to be deployed in increasing numbers in the future,
since it is being produced on a high priority basis. The
maximum effective ceilings - — are given as: 8.8 cm. - 34,770
ft., 10.5 cm, - 37,000 ft., and 15 cm. - 40/45,000 ft., it (
should be appreciated that these ceilings ar.e based only on
the ability of the equipment to- fire .one r^und at the heights
in question — - .
M.A.R.46980-London-17 March 1942
A-document captured in the Middle East reveals that the
German 88 mm. antiaircraft gun has now been provided with
a self-propelled mounting in the form of a 12-ton semi-track ed tractor armoured in,front. At the.back of the chassis is
a platform on to which the gun mounting is built, an ammunition
box holding 18 rounds is provided, The gun can also be fired
off its whells when carried on a special tractor drawn trailer.
M.A,L.47191-London-l April 1942
The (German) 8.8 cm,•antiaircraft gun 18 on self-pro pelled carriage is a very effective weapon and possesses
great mobility, For this reason it is used against forti fied gun*positions and other strong objectives.- It is also
capable"of operations against tanks at considerable range,
- — I t is used against medium and heavy tanks. Both armour piercing and high explosive, shells are used as ammunition. —
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIP MENT
3)
Heavy Antiaircraft^
(cont'd)
The self-pr^e|l^jl''| ri^ge is a 12 ton tractor armoured in
front ^ A t^e %&strl. e chassis' forms a platform, into
w h i c h f o r the gun is- built, The mod-
antiaircraft gun 18 on special trailer 201
li tractor is used in the same way as the self-pro-
LeS carriage. Detailed instructions for the use by the
British of captured 88 mm guns are available,
Incl•#7-M.A•R•245 7-Cairo,Egypt-27 July 1941.
The German antiaircraft artillery has approximately 800 guns
in the defense of Hamburg, I estimate that 200 of them are
20 mm cannon, 250:are 37 mm cannon, 12-(3 batteries) are the
new 15©'mm heavy guns, and that the-remaining --'•(guns are)—
88 -mm and 105 mm, • '- •
M.A»R,185 67-Berlin,Germany-13 August 1941
Fire control equipment is located on the top of one building
in the Tiergarten, Berlin, near the zoo, and the guns (88 mm)
are located on another building several hundred ,rards away.
The guns are using flashless powder which is hardly discern-
able even at our close range (about 690-700 yards),
M.A.R,18567-Berlin, Germany-13 August 1941
The equipment under report-consists of five static 102 mm
heavy dual purpose antiaircraft guns captured from the Ital ians and used at Tobruk, Four — - were put into action —
The hard wearing qualities of the metal in the gun barrels are
very noticeable. The guns had fired a largfe/number of rounds
in enemy hands and then were left derelict for a long period
without attention. They have since fired eight hundred rounds
per gun (approximate) w ^ k very little sign of wear, For
a heavy gun the traye^ing%nd elevating gear is very easy
and extremely rapid in spilte of rust. The automatic breech
mechanism is ext^sfel^ efficient, The ramming device is
clumsy but e^sy^tS-xjiand load even at quadrant elevation of
over 60 d f ^ ^ s , ^ *
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
3)
Heavy Antiaircraft Guns (cont'd)
sin si
r. ss a m Sk Particulars•of the gun I i I
Muzzle velocity Maximum horizontal range Maximum vertical range Maximum depression Maximum elevation Recoil Buffer capacity Breech mechanism Fuze setter
ond
14,425 yards
31,000 feet
10°
'
70°
Maximum 14" • Average 12"
7,875 pints
Semi-automatic, sliding
vertically,
mechanical
Incl,#1-M. A. L,45783-SAG/j it-11 December 1941
The Russians are equipped with the following' Antiaircraft Materiel: l) 20-mm Oerlikon and Rheinmetall antiaircraft guns; 2) 20-mm, antiaircraft and antitank gun;. 3) 37-mm * Vickers antiaircraft gun; 4) 40-mm, Vickers antiaircraft gun; 5) 45-mm. antiaircraft gun (ho details available); 6) 75-mm French antiaircraft gun; 7) 76-mm, antiaircraft gun model 1931; 8) 76-mm, antiaircraft gun model 1928; 9) 76-mm. anti aircraft gun model 1914-1915; i o ) 88-mm, antiaircraft gun; 11) 105-mm. antiaircraft gun model 1934; 12) 13.2-mm, antiair craft machine gun model Hotchkiss; 14) 12,7-mm, antiaircraft machine gun. Approximate total quantities are;
-A .
a) heavy calibers (over 100 mm.) = 8,000 guns
b) medium calibers • • * 6,000 guns
c) small calibers r 4,000 guns
M,A,R,427-Helsinki-10 October 1941
It is known that ammunition for the following heavy French an tiaircraft weapons is being manufactured in France for German
account. Large quantities are involved. -—• It is evident
that these weapons are being, or may be used in the future by
the German Amy- on a considerable' scale:-' 1 C r I t ? I*
J S J a 1
Ul • *
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
3)
Heavy Antiaircraft Guns (cont'd)
75-mm. model 36:
mg
rate of fire
2620 16000 25000 20
f/s
yds
ft.
r.p.m.
75-mm. model 33 J
Muzzle velocity
Maximum horizontal range
Effective ceiling
Practical rate of fire
2460 f/s 15200 yds. 22000 ft. 20 r.p.m.
90-mm. model 39:
Muzzle velocity
2675 f/s
Maximum horizontal range
18600'yds.
Effective ceiling
27000 ft. :
Practical rate of fire
15-r.p.m. Incl.#1-M.A.L45783-SAG/j it-11 December 1941
4)
Light Antiaircraft Fire Control
The four systems of fire control for 40 mm. Bofors Anti aircraft Guns is (l) No. 3 Predictor; - (2) .Stiffkey Stick;
(3) Forward Area Sight; (4) Joystick .
M.A.R.47306-London-7 April 1942
Characteristics of the British Light Antiaircraft Predictor
(No.3) (Kerrison) are:
Maximum time of flight
3 sees.
Maximum effective slant range
2000yds.
Maximum effective height^
5500 ft. .:
A.A.C.#319•13/AUC-33
-54
(without pre
(1) Open Sights (Forward- Area Sight)- •
(2) Reflector Sights
(3) Sight Correctors
Optical Sights are under investigation for small
arms. A pilot model is at. the School of Antiaircraft De fense for study in conjunction with Admiralty Research
Laboratory System of one-man control.
Reflector (sights including Royal Air Force designs)
are being examined. - — A reflector sight is no more
nor less than a substitute for an open sight. The general
advantage of a reflector sight as against an open sight is
that the layer having picked up the target with both eyes open,
can bring the window with the luminous laying mark up on to the
target without having to take his eyes off the latter and can
still keep both eyes open when completing his lay. A further
advantage is that the layer- sees both target ojid laying mark
in the same focal plane.
—r-(One form of) mechanical sight corrector -—(is the
Stiffkey Stick) . Its chief feature is that it does not
keep the two sights parallel. It, therefore, requires dif ferent forms of open,sight, for the two layers and would neces sitate two different graticules If it (were to be)used
to control reflector sights. This feature also makes it
inapplicable (in its present form) to the control of a
single sight —-(on a power controlled gun operated by-one
man) • A Stiffkey Stick designed for use with one-man con trol has been made up however by 1st antiaircraft-division
and is.being tried at School of-Antiaircraft Defense and a
favorable report (upon it) has recently been submitted
by the School of Antiaircraft Defense. (Another form of
sight corrector (Vector sight control) is that of the)
Chief Superintendent Armament Design — . -This works from
different data to those - supplied to the Stiffkey Stick. It
keeps both sights.parallel during operation and is, therefore,
workable with two identical open or reflector sights which have
a single laying mark or with a single si^ht and one-man mount ing control. — - After comparative trials, including the firing
of 100 rounds with each type, the School of Antiaircraft De fense has decided that the Stiffkey Stick was preferable
(to the other type) for the following reasons:
-55
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIP MENT
4)
Light Antiaircraft-Fire Control (cont'd)
(1) I t ^ s f ^ f i ^ * ^ e ' ^ d teach.
( • A s ; % orr^^at^ie thinks is the correct number
tt>r can c oncentrate on clock hour until
^ a plus, br a minus. (The Vector Sight oper las to think of clock hour and course angle at the same
time).
(3) If the course angle is small, the Vector Sight Opera tor tends to alter the speed when altering clock hour.
(4) Having set too fast a speed, the Vector Sight operator
has to switch from an acute approach course to an acute reced ing course angle and while concentrating on this he fails to
maintain correct clock hour.
Requirements for a sight-setting gear to actuate, sights pro vided with a single laying mark can best be met by a modifi cation of the Stiffkey Stick (that of the 1st Antiaircraft
Division) than by the adoption of the — - other design. The
general construction of the Stiffkey Stick needed going over
to make it strong enuugh to stand service use and'traveling.
It should be capable of being folded back.
M,A.R.48324-1 ondon-9 June 1942
Captain Jump is the officer who devised the Stiffkey Stick,
He is an Instructor in Gunnery at Stiffkey Practice Camp,
The idea, he states, had been prevalent for about twelve
years and he had been Instructor in Heavy Antiaircraft and
on going to a Light Antiaircraft Practice Camp he believed
he could aevise something that would give greater accuracy
than the Forward area. Sight. With the advice of Colonel
Gordon, Camp Commander, he was able to turn out the Stiffkey
Stick, i—-'("Stiffkey" is the name of an ancient village ~in
England) ,
M.A,R.47445-London-17 April 1942
"There (has been printed a ) - - training pamphlet entitled
"The Stiffkey Stick and How to Use It." This pamphlet gives
detailed working instmfjWLpns with diagrams,
^ • WJot.es on Middle East-22 July 1941
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPiffiN1 4)
Light Antiaircraft
Two coincidence type range-finders of 70 cm.(27.56 in*) base
length are used by German Machine Gun and mortar detachments
and with the machine gun 34 for antiaircraft fire.
Particulars are:' • .* ,
Base length of instrument Magnification Range •
-
70 x 11 200 (219
cm. (27.56 in.)
- 10,000 metres
- 10,936 yards)
Width of field of view at 1,000 metres (1093 yards.)
Range-finder 14 Range-finder 34
.72 metres (78 3/4 yards)
'62 metres (67 3/4 yards)
Coincidence is made by means of turning the working head.
— - A sight is fitted to enable the-range-taker to get on the
target quickly. A sling is used to carry the range-finder
when it is not in its case. a stand is employed when us ing the range-finder in the prone position • It may be fit ted- to the shoulder harness when the rangetaker is sitting,
. kneeling or standing, particularly agairist siir targets.
.The harness is used when range-taking in the sitting, kneeling
or:standing positions. For antiaircraft fire with machine
guns and rifles, the range-taker merely observes when the tar get comes into effective range' and when it goes out again.
The range .-scale is first set at 1200 metres (4036 ft.). t The
range-taker gets on target over the sight. . If the,target is
at a greater range than 1200 metres, the upper (inverted)
image will be to the right -of the lower (upright) image.
When the two images are one above the other, the target is
nearing the effective range of the machine gun. Up to cross ing point the upper image moves from right to left. After
crossing point it-meves back from left to right, and when the
upper (inverted) image is back*to the right of the lower (up right), image, the target is-again out of range of machine gun
fire.
— -M.A.R,48340-London-ll June 1942
— - Much of the success obtained by -^-^ll^G^^ri^mth)-*- the 2 cm. (0.79 inch) and 3-7^$.(^^Jrlbll)* » i t a k guns is to be attributed ic^ which
-57
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
tiaircraft Fire Control (cont'd) .
| r type-with a data.calculating mech ^has a pointer at its base which an
operator points parallel to the direction of the target's
flight. The gun commander estimates the speed of the target
and calls it to a second -perator who sets the value on one
of the discs. The range-taker provides the slant range, which
is also set in. The value of the sight depends on the
skill of the operators and on the ranges furnished. T-ach gun
crew has a range-taker, equipped with the stereoscopic 1 metre
(39.37 inch) base range-finder, with which he is able to read
ranges from a minimum of 800 feet to 26,200 feet. The range-
taker "calls off slant ranges'in even hundreds of metres every
few seconds. Great stress is laid on the training..of these
operators. (Samples of the sight, have been captured by
the British and full details are available in British reports)
M.I.lMJar 0ffice-2 .March 1942-131/APW
The Linealvisier 21 is alternative sight to Flakvisiers 35, 38
and 40 on the 2 cm. (0.79-inch) Flak 30, 2 cm. Flak 38 and 2 cm.
Flakvierling 38 .(Antiaircraft) guns respectively. It can
be used against air targets and against moving or fixed land
and sea targets. It may be described as a mechanical sight,,
the sighting line running from the. backsight through the appro priate speed graduation on an adjustable foresight, to the
target.' 'Range, course of target, speed of target, angle of
dive or climb, and tangent elevation (super-elevation) for the
range concerned are taken 'into account.
Operational limitations.of the sight are as 1 ~> H o w s
Speed'of target: 24 m.p.h-335 m.p.h
Range for Antiaircraft fire.; 328 ft,-5,428 ft.. .
Range for land and sea targets: 109 yds.-1,750 yds.
Angle of dive or climb: No limits,
M.A,R,47835-London-ll May 1942
n f «1. v "5 —'
''iit^'febUi^^^a^ Speed sight-(Flakvisier) is fitted
I V M
-58
-(to the Ger
M t § III - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT"'
4)
Light Antiaircraft Fire Contr
man.light antiaircraft weapons;
in e
sight is of the reflecting mirror type with'
mechanism for working out deflections, the data'
being slant-range, speed and course* The slant-range is
obtained from a portable 1 metre (39.37 inch) or 1,5 metre
(60 inch) base range-finder, one equipment being provided
for each gun.
Air Min. Weekly Int. Summary Up to 27 May 1942-#143
There is a course and speed sight used with the Italian 20
mm. (.79 inch) antiaircraft/antitank gun - Model 35. It al lows for range, course of target, speed of target, and cor rections in azimuth and elevati n, from observation of tracer.
It can be used both against air targets, and moving or fixed
land and sea targets. Operational limits of the sight are: Target Speed (land targets) 0-100 km./hour (0-62 m.p.h.)
Target Speed (A.A,targets) 300-550 km./hour (186-342 m.p.h
Range (land targets) 5500 metres (6015 yards)
Range (A.A. targets) 3000 metres (9840 feet)
Incl.1-M.A.R.48341-London-23 May 1942
5) Heavy Antiaircraft Fire Control
Characteristics' of Equipment
(British Heavy Antiaircraft predictors)—
Vickers for 5.25"
Maximum Time of Flight (sees)
Maximum Height (feet) Time from "on target" to "predictor Steady"
33 38000
Vickers for 4.5" and 3.7"
25
Time from "predictor 15 sees. Steady" to first round. M
" 7 feK? M f*
w/? &
10 sees,
15 sees.
15 sees.
15 sees.
M ®
33
25000
29000
10 sees.
Sperry for
4.5" and 3.7"
Ff
*
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIP MENT
ire Control (cont'd)
for
Method of Prediction
.
v
Vickers fur Sperry for
4.5" and'3.7" 4.5" and 3.7".
Ifeasures the rates of change of Determines the
bearing and arfgle of sight to - Cartesian caor-»
the target, calculates the def- dinates of the
lections required and provides target, measures
the ballistic data required, the .rate of
» ' change of these
co-urdinates,
calculates the
coordinates of
the future posi tion and provides
the ballistic da ta required,
319.13AuC-33-February 1942
Characteristics of heavy antiaircraft radio equipment:
Equipment
GL I'
Maximum slant range (yds)
Average error of slant range-
GL II
50,000
30,000
75 yds. up to 14,000 yds, 350 yds fr ,<m 14,000 to 30,000 yds
65 yds up to 14,000
'yds.
250 yds from 14,000
to 32,000 yds.
500 yds from 30,000
to 50,000 yds
Minimum Angle of Sight
15°
15°
Maximum Angle of Sight
45° i
45
Average Error
1,2Q
Bearings obtainable
from 10° Angle of Sight to 60° Angle of Sight bMffII ft j I A l j w Ir i^ U &fc>Et»
0
'
•9
10 single of Sight
40° Angle of Sight
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQtl]
5)
Heavy Antiaircraft Fiii^Cpntrol (cont'd)
JSL J& M
Equipment
' ifaP-
GL II
Average Error # Both GL I and II require a mat, unleljs^op a quite exceptional
site.
319.13/AUC^3-February 1942
England for
(J.) . The first Canadian GL III has arrived in trial. It is a 9.7 cm. set incorporating a Zone position indi cator early warning device and 'putter on'. Range at present,
17,000 yds., but it is expected that this will be increased in
later production by 50$. Being a beam instrument it is not sub ject to the limitations of angle of GL I and II, and will go
down to 5° angle of sight and up to the zeniths it has much
greater freedom from interference; and it does not require a
mat, and is therefore much more mobile. Accuracy in bearing
and angle about 20', in range 60 yds. Preliminary trials give
data that, when fed through a Vickers predictor, give a mean
error of 150 yds,, as against nearly 300 yds. with GL II and
more than 330 yds. with GL I. " •
(2) The English GL III (10.7 cm.) has been designed and un dergone trials. Range of.the order of 30,000 yds. Accuracy
in bearing and angle 101 to 20', Its qualities are otherwise
similar to those of the Canadian model, but it does not incor porate a 'putter on 1 , and will require an expurgated GL or
possibly a pack set for that purpose,
319.13/AUC-33-February 1942
Experiments have been carried out on the unmodified Sperry
Predictor in order>to test its accuracy when fed with infor mation through a. gun layer receiver, as in unseen target, oper ation. Preliminary experiments have been performed on the
predictor only, £he information being fed in directly in the
form of present bearing and ground or slant range. This
allowed the personnel to /gain experience in operation, and
it tested the methods of recording employed, and acted as
background against which the experiments with'Gun Laying
Radio Detection Finder may be set.
-61
I
III - MATERIEL
Aflfciainrsi'i UTOControl (cont1 d)
re^Test courses were all straight line courses in which
the target was assumed to be travelling with a constant
speed at a constant height. They were fed into the predictor
in the ..following manner. The three following methods of
feeding in each coarse were adopted, (a) Present bearing
and ground range were fed in directly to the predictor, .
The prediction errors observed, both lateral and in range,
were about 70 yards. They were substantially the same over
the whole course., (b) Fresent bearing was fed in directly,
and slant range was fed in through the height computer, i,e,
the usual procedure for an unseen target was adopted,
With this method the prediction errors-were distinctly
greater, owing to the inaccuracies introduced by the extra
operations of following the height curve on the computer and
matching the angle of sight pointer,-(c) Present bearing and
slant range were fed into the gun layer receiver through a
Bedfprd trainer. This simulates a target, and is used to
give a. break on the cathode ray tube which is followed by the
Gun Layer bearing and slant range operators.
About 20 seconds was required for the predictor to become
steady after starting each run. Thereafter, the errors were,
on the whole, as likely to be positive as -negative, i,e, no
systematic errors were observed. The prediction errors fell
during the first few series of runs, as the team became more
adept at t'he necessary manipulations, and the conclusions
stated in this report are based on the results obtained after
a steady state had been reached. For those runs during
which the present bearing on the predictor has been, recorded,
it was possible to calculate the errors, not only in. the
present bearing at any moment, but in the rate of change of
bearing. It was found that the error in the future position
was closely correlated with the error in the bearing rate.
It ...is .to be expcctcd that the magnitude of the prediction
.. error due to this source should.be'very nearly equal to the
..... error in the rate of change of bearing multiplied by the time
of flight,
319.13/AUC-33-February 1942
-(The British'use a stallations,) ~ Eft
FV 1% ^tek
di£ife1§ Sperry Predictor in some in modification is to be able
-62
Ill - MnTERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
Heavy Antiaircraft Fire ,.0'ontr^ (;Cont! d)
£ id' jk W jM
the tar to utilise average values of e
get, determined over a relatively long
stead of the instantaneous values 6rdinar rfy
N/S and E/Vr rate shafts (X and Y shafts) coming
sent position dumaresq are disconnected betv/een the
and the differentials at which the wind displacements, ftx and
W are added to X ..and Y. The ends of the shafts connected to
tKe differentials are clamped..; The target speed is then set
in on'the dials associated with the wind displacement dials,
as if a static test was being applied. If the bearing and
range handles are stationary, the predictor will evaluate a
future position, corresponding to the present position set in,
and determined by the target speed set on the dials. If the
handles are now turned, the future'position will move in con formity with the movement of the present position, but the
deflections will be quite unaffected by the rates at which the
handles are turned. Standard test courses have been put
through the modified pr_uictor in the way described for
the unmodified predictor. In every respect, the modified
predictor behaved in the manner expected? Provided that the
correct target speed was set in, the future position is only
in error, at any moment, by amount equal to the error in
the present position.
A.A.C.No.319.13/AUC-53
5)
The British have/for sometime, realized the importance of
making a fuze lead correction either at the predictor or
at the gun. The fuze to the future position as' taken from
the predictor is not the fuze to the future position when th'e
projectile bursts. This is due t'o dead time involved pri*.
narily in loading the projectile.-'— Until such time as a
fuze lead dead time is incorporated in predictors or directors
as I understand is being incorporated in our latest Sperry
Director or in the fuze setter as is being done by the Brit ish in their Molina No. 11 Fuze Setter, a fuze lead should be.
predicted so that our antiaircraft fire, particular for the
first few rounds before evasive action.is taken, may be as
accurately determined as is possible
1 li.A.R.46728-London-25 February 1942
\y}n .
.
•
.
"i ' . •• - 1 ' ' • - , ..<; •
2 sj i t
•
• 4 fe-i % *BHf «
i
' " .
...
I
" ^ M i s J ^ I
&i
i
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
Heavy Antiaircraft Fire Control (cont'd)
(M M uu fk>wk ifal *N »> iw,. ibeen taken as to — — whether
td should be given by a device in as in the design proposed by — —
tegral Molins or whether fuze lead should be'allowed fir in a
"fuze lead indicator", a device whigh would — - g i v e
this correction before the fuze data reaches the fuze setter.
It has been decided that the'Molins Fuze Setter No, 11
(less integral fuze lead assessment gear)'with Automatic
Loading System and a Fuze Lead Indicator will be adopted,
The Fuze Lead Indicator, composed.chiefly of parts from Ker rison No, 3 Predictor, has been adopted as a device for mak ing fuze lead assessment and incorporation of fuze factor
correction. The Fuze Lead Indicator-will be in addition
to the predictor (director). It requires one man to'operate
and one is to be used for a battery of four guns,
M. A'.R.47426-London-l6 April 1942 <
The British have developed an Open Sight for use'with 3*7-in,
antiaircraft gun for antiaircraft role (particularly dive
bombing) and for an antitank role. The Open Sights are
link-sights, designed-to move in parallel with the gun, piv oting about an axis near the layers head. For the antiair craft role, the foresights are designed to give right and
left and up and down deflections of 2g° and 5°. For the an titank role a clicker is provided on the lateral J-jind sight
giving left and right displacements of 1°, 1\ , while a
false zero wire on the elevation sight gives -—(tangent ele vation (super-elevation) for 800 yards at angle of sight
0°, This will-permit constant antitank laying on the
center wires of the foresight«' • M.,a,R,46999-London-18 March 1942 ; :
Experiences w i t h fire control instruments for heavy an tiaircraft units in the Middle East have shown that the
methods of housing instruments while travellin g were unsat isfactory, Special provision must-be made to insure that
each fixed in its travelling position*
p M g ^ w - S T h t ^ t e r i a n c e Engineer (Instruments) on the
fe Headquarters was invaluable,
-64
£j £ . ' Jjf
te A? W *f £? / f j Heavy Antiaircraft Fire Control^
III - MATERIEL AND EQUIFME 5)
^
He .visited every position and inspected 0Lsm^ment at
least once a week, and minor faults were d i s c ^ e ^ W and rec tified before they.had a chance to develop into major, faults
and breakdowns. • •
M.A.R.43473-London-3 July 1941
It can be assumed that in general the Germans employ
the same principles of fire control as we do and experience
the same difficulties. With regard to their instruments, it
is thought that, whereas their predictor is of much the same
efficiency as ours, their visual height finding equipment
may be more advanced. Though reports have been received for
some time past that the Germans have been experimenting with
an instrument corresponding to our Radio Detection set, no
conclusive evidence has been received that it is as yet in
general use thus presupposing extensive employment of sound
location methods.
Air Tactics-13 May 1941
German Heavy Antiaircraft guns -are generally controlled by a
"Kommanderogerat" which is a combination of a course and
speed predictor ana a 4-metre base stereoscopic height
finder. It is not unlikely that some elements of err~r are
eliminated by the use of this equipment, since the data pro- •
duced by the height-finder is fed directly into the predictor.
A subsidiary predictor (Kommandohifsgerat) is also in use.
It employs the angular velocity principle akin to the vic kers and obtains heights from a separate 4-metre base height-
finder. Although in many cases sound locators probablys
provide the data for "unseen" fire, a radiolocation instru ... ••
ment, similar in principle to the British gun layer is known to have, been developed and is presumably replacing pre vious equipment as- far as production allows.
Air Min. Weekly Int. Summary Up to 27 May 1942-^143
• . A •• ' • • - , 71 > 6 "
lit" , v „ . .. * Art ' , . , . -r- There is now available a provisional description of
the German Carl Zeiss Jena Fredict&r^ -type KDO - Ger, 35 for
S8 mm. Flak. — — The instrument' and sttmof are 'housed in a ro—
' #
A
J Control (cont1 d)
bust two wheeled trailer, consisting of three compartments.
The centre compartment is fitted with a heavy sliding plat form to which the predictor is clamped during transit. The
two side com; artments are of equal dimension, one houses the
instrument stand, the other being available for-boxes, spare
parts, etc, ---- It is estimated that the operators required
are as follows:
Layer for Bearing
Layer for Elevation
Range operator
Rate setter for Bearing
Rate setter for elevation
Rate setter for range
Reader for Future bearing
Reader for Future elevation
Reader for Future Fuze,
The*predictor appears to operate on similar formulae to
that employed with the No, 3 (Kerrison) Predictor,
but with additional mechanism to obtain future Fuze. The method of obtaining a steady rate of change (by fitting fly wheels to the main handwheels) is very satisfactory, and
could be incorporated with advantage in the design of the
(British) Predictor Antiaircraft No. 1,
M.A,R.2476-Cairo,Egypt-2 May 1942
(There is now available a) Provisional Description of
the (German) Carl Zeiss Jena Predictor, Type KDO German (36 stw B) for 88 mm. Flak. The instrument con sists of a main pedistal provided with three levelling feet,
ancjl two suspension arms which enable the instrument to be
raised and secured to the front and rear carriages when trav elling, — It is estimated that eleven operators are requir ed,
(Layer for elevation) (tracks target) . • •
Layer for Bearjjig: -—(tracks target) .
Range taker: (operates the stereoscopic range-finder) •
Ground range operator?-*-*p"4turns * nand^heel)---,
Course beariag turns handwheel) ,
hQr4zoJtdPsR|e4 opeir^voiw (sets a pointer) ,
n Qp&rntor,' — (sets angle of sight scales) •; operator, (matches pointers)-—.
Vk '^'^pirsl^or for Da ana Rf arm, — ( o p e r a t e s two handwheels) ,
> 6 "
0 & ff III - MTERIEL AND EQUIPMENT i y , j f /f f | .
5)
Heavy Antiaircraft Fire Contrdiif^^nt^d'^
Fuze drum operator, (turns a1 handwhSfetO"
Quadrant Elevation'Drum operator, (turns
wheel)
,
The -•— instrument is designed to obtain three main, values
i.e.,. Future Angle of Sight, Future Ground Range and deflection
in azimuth. A system of telephone communication between the
various operators of the predictor arid also between predictor
and gun is provided. Lines from a main connector box (fitted
to the predictor) lead to four sockets on the instrument and
through the multi-core cable to the sockets provided on the
gun. Each socket is designed to receive plugs for two head
and breast sets.
M.A.R.2476-Cairo,Egypt-2 May 1942
The British have in England one German Auxiliary Pre* dictor No.35 (Antiaircraft) captured in the Middle East. The effieiency of the instrument depends very largely.on reg ular and steady "work by the predictor crew, careful reading of dials and transmission of data to guns by telephone. It - — has low weight (about 400 lbs), and- probably low.cost. Neither wind nor displacement corrections are taken Into ac count, The distance between predictor and height finder should not be over 10 meters. It is not possible to ensure that.the same target will be engaged. It is an angular rates instrument which determines the future position, by adding or subtracting deflections. Bearing, quadrant elevation, and fuze setting are found. The instrument is used with the 8.8 cm. Antiaircraft gun. The normal electrical predictor for this gun is the —(German) Predictor No. 3 6 . • M.A.R.475 70-London-27 April 1942
The telescopic sight for the 8.8 cm. antiaircraft-gun 18 is an
antiaircraft telescopic sight 20. Its elevation (range) - drum
has been modifiedtin its upper part and graduated in metres.
When the Reflection? and rjmge drums are at zero the aim ing line of the sig^ht both vertically and horizontally are par allel to the axis of fe,|b^rrelJu '^pcef/however, the tele*
scppic sight is 71.5 o» to'"'tM cm. below the
barrel t'he aiming point on the ta#g<5t. Ji$st M w a y s be taken,
rather low and to the right if direct h9fs^*iVe to be register ed. The telescopic sight is carried in a special case fit ted to the carriage mounting,
Incl.#7-M.A.R,2457-Cairo,Egypt-27 July 1941
-67
6)
y D EQUIFMT^T ' .
tjy • •\ ^
Rockets an&^bcket ivrojemtors ~
- The shortage of ifa^gLr craft guns and. the difficulty of
the antiaircraft problem (pltis the push of Mr. Churchill)
have stimulated the development of rocket gunnery .
Rocket gunnery was discredited by over enthusiasm at first —
A number of different types of rockets are now in use or un derway. One of these, a 3 inch, has approximately the
characteristics of a 3 inch gun, having a similar ceiling and
maximum range. A lethal radius of 25 yards in claimed
for the 3" rocket burst, with some effectiveness up to 50
yards. Differing figures are given for its pattern size, — —-(The pattern size is large' due in part to the flimsy
projector; but it is cheap ana easily m?de and there is a
great deficiency in guns,
N,A,R.Ser,M-1:X-29-Great Britain-3 July 1941
The Dir'ector of Antiaircraft has stated that the Rocket pro jector was being developed to produce a large concentration
of fire economically' at considerable heights. Experiments
were being made to produce approximately one hundred bar rels firing into a 300 yard square.
iVi •rt, R,45840-London-13 December 1941
Three types of rockets were fired in Great Britain at a re cent demonstration;
(1) Called the proximity rocket which detonates from light
action and contains no fuse in the ordinary sense,
(2) A similar rocket with a time fuze on its nose and which
detonates when a setting pldced on the fuze is reached, i.e,,
5, 10, ,159 or 20 seconds,
(3) A rocket projectile which contains a parachute and wire
cables, '.hen this rocket detonates, the parachute is released
and carries a steel cable With it in its slow descent to the
ground.
M,A,43510-London-8 July 1941
" Rocket Projector fires a rocket which leaves the pro-
at a velocity of 200 feet per second. The wind
ect on the rocket in the initial stages
arsnunition is 6 ft, 4 in. long and the
w
III - MATERIEL AND 6)
MM J*
i L AJ?
E ^ U I P ^ N T ^ / l * / ^
Rockets and Rocket Projectors
dJff'J^ if%
shells weight 18 lbs,, containing 4i l b s T h e
lateral radiusrof the shell is 65 ft. The projectors are
fired in batteries of 64 which produce a cube in the sky of
800 feet sides and the lateral effect inside the .cube Is
likely to.be increased from 65 feet to 100 feet or even great er, At a quadrant elevation of 70 degrees the rocket rises
to 22,000 feet; at-maximum quadrant elevation (super-elevation)
74 degrees, and longest fuze, 30 seconds, the maximum height
is 19,000 feet.. Maximum horizontal range is. 13,000 ycirds.
Maximum range to burst, 30 second fuze, 7,125. yards. Time of
Flight: Quadrant elevation (super-elevation) for 16,000 feet
height and range 6800 yards - 23 seconds, 'Cordite is com pletely burned out in lg seconds, the rocket has thrn reach ed its maximum velocity of. 1500, feet per second. The average
velocity up to 6000 feet is 1200 feet per second, The remain ing velocity after 20 seconds at quadrant elevation' (super elevation) of:
.• . . 34tdegrees is 800 ft, per second
72 degrees is 475 ft, per second
M.A,R.43380-London-24 June
. 1941 Five salvos of eight 3" high explosive rockets, fitted with
the photoelectric proximity fuze, were fired at a Queen Bee
which was. dived, at the battery projector. One salvo was wide
•of- the target. The target crashed as a result of the damage
receive.d from the burst on the target from the last salvo,
, •••• N.A.R,Ser,#l827-London-8 August 1941
> 6 "
It is calculated -r—(by the Ballistics Committee, British
Ministry of> S u p p l y ) — that for a target, at height of 15,Q0O
ft. and angle of sight of 40°, a 4 gun antiaircraft -battery
requires to fire about 12,000 rounds per. aircraft casualty
in the case a^the 4,5 in. gun; and that' the' rocket "battery
requires abuft^j^gQpQ- rounds per casualty. This — - is in
s u b s t a n t i a l a n early estimate, given to the •
War Office jHf lygQ^-i ^.'s use of the weapon was in itiated. — 5 - On tftr%sls; of. thesf ,%fr*$>retical calculations,
it appears that, round i h e # ] f M | is about 30$ as
effective as the 3.7 inch gun^*»<£ l | £ ^ ^ # f e c t i v e as the
4,5 inch gun, rocket battery of 6 p r o j e c t o r s is,
H I - MATERIEL AND EQUIFI-ENT
s and Rocket Projectors (cont'd)
<|bf^c*^,ife®iivalent to about 5' 'four gun batteries O F T I W 5.7 or 2j batteries of the 4.5 inch gun. With the lateW'Slprovement s, the 4 gun battery of 3.7 inch guns is expected to be some 6 times as effective as the 64 barrel rocket battery,, the greater effect of avoiding action for reduced prediction errors (for the guns)—— being
The British VJar Office policy how is to c oncentrate on the
production of twin projectors as they are to be the main
Rocket weapon in service for antiaircraft projectors. There
will be in addition, however,' -'—"(a certain number of) 9
barrel projectors obtained from the Navy - — The design of
the 4-barrel projector is being Completed but it is not at
present intended to put this type in production. The British,
in addition, are calling for a design and prototype of an
8-barrel projector to meet possible further requirements.
Production and development of photoelectric fuzes have now
stopped, - — Developments'on the'rocket are proceeding on
the condenser pistol and the radio prdximity fuze. The form er will be of particular value for multi-barrel projectors as
it will eliminate the necessity for the loading of pre-set
f u z e s .
' M»a.R.47227-London-3 April 1942
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
6) Rockets and Rocket Projectors (cont'd)
veloped: • (1) A 4-barrelled Projector mounted on a 40 mm. Mk.II •
platform.
(2) A 9-barrelled Projector on a converted 3" 20-cwt. mo bile mounting. . ..
These equipments are to be used against,both low and high fly ing targets and the 9-barrel equipment may eventually be pre dictor controlled. md'/'
319.WAUC-12-23 August 1941
The rocket projectile and a ^.Ajiii M r e | a-j^j^.
lP^
- - - - carrying . a parachute . impressed me and I think most.of the observers as
very practical thing. They fired approximately fif£y£
these r ckets' at one time. Two duds and about three tftc ^
partially failed to open were noted. The rest of them fu
tioned. The proximity fuse did not impress me and in talki
to many of the British • fficers I gained the impression that
they also doubted its practicability value. It is affected
by"light" changes and if one projectile in the salvo deto nates it will normally set off most of the -other rockets. The
rocket contained a self-destroying element which functioned
around 30 seconds. I feel that the rocket projectile--fired
in salvo with a time fuse has distinct possibilities both
for use on the ground and for use on ships. -—(U.S. Ord nance Officer) • • •
. M,A•R # 43 510-London-8 July 1941
The most promising (antiaircraft wire-shell so far de veloped is) one for combating night bombers is the 3" rock et with ceiling of 15,000 to 20,000 feet carrying a wire-para chute-bomb filled head. This is still under construction and
proof, but is essentially similar to the 7" Unrotated Projector
(Rocket) Mk, I heac
N,A.R,Ser ,#534-London-31 March 1941
v? m
v 1 rn
The .effect of wind on tY\e rocket is much-greater than on a shell. As the rocket leaves the :rails at such a low velocity
A • i. a
C ' /
> 6 "
P^JjjeCtors (cont'd)
greatest-effect during the first 30 feet
light» For example - — figures show that for a 30.
ft./sec. wind at an angle of 45 degrees line of flight the
error*in quadrant elevation (super-elevatiun) amounts to
550 feet and the bearing e|*ror to 1000 feet. •
M.A.R.43380-London-25 June 1941
A test ( is to be held) to see "K" type ammu nition fired from Rocket projectors . It is propos ed to fire "K" type ammunition, and fly a "Queen Bee"
through it to see the effect, "K" type appears a pos sible solution to the saturation (or mass) raid,
M.A.R.38425-London-l6 June 1942
The development of antiaircraft Rockets for firing on ,air
targets has been an outstanding development by the British,
In the only service test of these rockets (on which).——
the writer was able to get data, the results were — - ex-.:
cellent - — , Two hostile enemy planes were shot down out
of four attempts. It is believed that if the bombing of
England, especially London, is resumed — that rockets will
play .an important part'in the British defense. (it is
rec .mmended)— that the development of antiaircraft rock ets be given immediate consideration particularly for the
purpose of the antiaircraft defense of permanent instal lations sufeh as'bases, '
Final Report-10 December 1941
> 6 "
7)
Antitank
•
_
• oi
The. requirement for a t a n k — " ( o r antitank)-— high-velocity
gun is ability to penet^tS^^enemy armour and kill qr
disable the crew JnsiSe. velocity is required - —
but a large jpr.^ctile is rlo#iessential for killing or
disabling^-© indeed, the smaller the projectile and
that can be made effective the bet-
the/an^llfcrV tn^y gun rounds can be carried, .and the turret -ring
rf^tSjfe^case of the tank gun.)-— can be kept within ,
Ill 7)
MATERIEL AND EQUIFMENTV' .ntitank (c-
- reasonable dim' s in the do v^lopmeftt of super-— high vePjeii _ 'h muzzle velocity in the range from 4,000 -'6,000;f./s. At such muzzle velocities it is claimed that breaking'up of •••shot does not >
occur and.shooting is therefore - — materially facilitated.
The Germans have produced a 25/20 mm, super high velocity
antitank gun, built on the Gerlich principle, -i.e., with a
tapered barrel, u captured specimen of this gun with a part ly-worn barrel proved to have a muzzle velocity of over 4,000
,f./s. and penetrated 80 mm, cast armour at normal at 100 yards.
With a new barrel, the muzzle velocity is reputed to be over
6,000 f./s. • , It is considered therefore that intensive
research and development alt^ng the lines of super high velo city weapons is the correct procedure f or future tank .weapons
rather than the orthodox line of increased size and weight.
Note: The development of super-high-velocity guns is — •
of equal interest to the antiaircraft artillery .for'an other reason (i.e. to shorten the time of .flight.) -•:
M.A.R>44884-London-ll October 1941
Penetration characteristics of the -3»7-inch heavy antiair craft gun as an antitank weapon has not been obtained,: ; It.
is stated (however by the British) that the armor
piercing shot furnished for the weapon will go through any
heavy armor it .is likely to meet,
M.A,R. 45265-London-6 November 1941
The 2-pdr. is the standard British tank .and antitank gun. Its
performance is well known and so far has been adequate.to en gage all German .tanks encountered. The 'Germans are, :h'owever,
steadily armouring up their tanks and either the performance
of the 2-pdr, must be improved or it must be -—(supple mented by another more) effective weapon.,. • The 6-pdr. has
been designed and. is now being produced. . It is a most
effective gun capable of dealing with armour,.LU®.to 85 mm. -or
more. Its chief disadvantages are t h ^ p i e c e and
its consequent in-board length ^d^Ehe size 5f£tae round which
required 3J times as mufihi s t • room as the*2-pdr. round,
* f&f.%%iiyA;R^^4S84-London-ll October 1941
f -73
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIFMENTV'
IflL FOriM^ $a|3.\l[lsl^ltwo-r-pounders (such as 40 mm Bofors)
alSjfrn^fc J&i^c^, were*reported after Dunkirk..—For example, a
: G^msfejftOTk* deliberately invited fire at long range and while
Several guns were*firing-at it the rest of the tanks'came
around the back of the other guns and shot them up. Again
the Germans invited fire at long range to disclose positions
and sent Infantry around to mop up, Failures in general
were due to faulty siting, — - having too few,guns, not hav ing guns properly defiladed, and disclosing positions too soor,
—-(If a maximum of 600 yards was taken with the two pounder,
success was obtained by the weapon.) In Greece by those
who used it at shorter ranges and in defiladed positions — it never failed to stop its tank. They fired from ground or
portee, digging the vehicle in as far as possible. One round
nearly always stopped the tank, but one or two more rounds
usually had to be put in to a stopped tank - otherwise the
survivors of the crew came out with grenades and tommy guns
and were dangerous,
M.A.R.45417 -London-17 November 1941
— 48 rounds of armor piercing shot are supplied — — ( b y
the. British- to each light antiaircraft 40 mm; gun for its secondary or antitank .role. Due to the shape of the
projectile the penetration is not quite)-— as good as
that obtained with the 2-pounder antitank gun. At a 30° an gle of impact, 40 mm. of armor ist penetrated,
M.A.R,45365-London-6 November 1941
The 40 mm. Bofors antiaircraft gun was fired'against
mechanized targets with l) the Kerrison predictor, 2) the
Forward Area sight, 3) the Forward Area sight•and "Stiffkey
Stick." "The firing at "Automatic" at Armored Fighting Ve*
hides was spectacular, (Thi,s me'thod of fire would rapidly ex haust 'the supplies of Semi- Aymor SMLercing and- Armor Piercing
normally carried but where n&nerqft targets present themselves
and SLmmunition has been dumped, this method of fire may be very effective.)-— It,is recommended that all No. 3 pre dictor^(KerMs6p) %^- Toe — - modified to give 5° depression
ansttCmie^ ^i"tji*tfte McCurdy Sight, ,
^ '' M.A.R.45028-London-22 October 1941
-74
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
7)
Antitank (cont'd)
Small arms weapons such as the British Bren
caliber .303, will not penetrate the German tank but they
should be used to make the tanks close down. Fire should
be directed against vision slits, periscopes and the junc tion between the turret and the hull. (The Boyes)
caliber.55 antitank rifle at 150 yards will penetrate
25 mm. of armor. It ,—- will — p e n e t r a t e German armored
vehicles up to the medium tank at ranges up to 150
yards. M.A.R.45265-London-6 November 1941
To enable them to be employed against Armored force ver
hicles,all light antiaircraft predictors are to be mod ified to allow of depression of the telescopes to - 4 decrees.
This modification in no way affects the use of the predictor
in its antiaircraft role, but merely necessitates a differ ent test for tangent elevation. This is required because
direct laying for elevation is to be employed against armor ed force vehicles since it has been found that this method
of laying is the most satisfactory in view of the slow rates
of change of elevation involved in the engagement of this
type of target.
M.A.L.47191-Lonaon-l April 1942
Question: If the predictor is in action should tanks be
engaged with the predictor or with the forward area sight?
Answer; If the predictor is warmed up and tank targets can
be taken under fire .by that method without delay, the predic tor should be used. But if the predictor is'not warmed up .
and in action the forward area sight -with the "Stiffkey Stick"
: . - .• ' •
should be used, . . M-..A.R.45028-Lohdon-22 October 1941
The same principle-as on the new 3.7"-Open Sights of applying
small antitank deflections by an external movement of the
hind sight, is being adopted Sajfc the 40 mm.' The existing For ward Area Sights are to be modfiiet^. sh ^jh^tAtlfe lateral hind
of up to a
sights can be displaced ^bjy th£ maximum deflection V f or left*in 15* clicks. . The cam
> 6 "
Ill - MATERIEL AND TOTFJFKT
"on1 "rae^eT'Cicsu'Tllna sight is to be.modified and marked so as
to give-the appropriate tangent elevation (super-elevation)-—
adjustment, at zero angle of sight - — , for ranges between
300- yards and 9o0 yards inclusive in steps of 200 yards, re taining the existing ''line upM and antiaircraft "far" posi tions o
Weapon Apt.by .D,A.A. &..C,D.-May 1942-13/AUC-71
—(Mechanized) targets can only be recognised exactly during
the morning and evening —-(in the Libyan desert) • In
the middle of the day the light is so dazzling owing to the
heat, that all outlines are completely blurred and distorted.
Tanks appear like bushes, bushes like tanks, and so oh, and '
much practice is needed. . M• A-, R • 46863-London-3 March 1942
Firing trials were held - — in October to decide on the effec tiveness of the British 6 pounder tank gun firing high
explosive ammunition against antitank gun positions and
personnel in slit trenchc§, It is undoubtedly effective
against personnel in slit trenches,
M.A.L.46l65-London-9 January 1942
During 1940, the standard antitank caliber in the German
Army was 37 mm. In 1941,: the standard antitank caliber — was increased to 50 mm, although,-of course^ the 37 mm is
still being used. According to our information, even the.,
high velocity 50 mm gun will not stop ail Russian tf*nks so
the need of a larger caliber is obvious and probably ex plains the first employment^ of major caliber antiaircraft
artillery (88 mm) so far forward, — - A picture, taken from
an illustrated German magazine shows a large antiaircraft
gun (estimated to be 105 mm) with a protecting shield,
The shield is open at the top to permit the gun to be.ele vated to its maximum election (85 degrees),
M.A,R•18637-J^erlin,Germany-l6 September 1941
0k \
a
-76
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
7)
Antitank (cont'd)
M _ m <1%
A captured document reveals that the Germai fVJ ChFi
their designation of the. antitank gun from Panze£a£>we
—-('Antitank Cannon) to-Panzer j-agerkanone (Tank hi
C a n n o n ) T h e abbreviation remains the same — t "Pak". The
document further states that (.German) antitank, equip ment will be classified in future as follows:- l) Light
antitank guns: - calibres up to and including 3.7 cm, — — 2)
Medium antitank guns - calibres frum 3.7 cm, to V.4. cm.
— - 3) Heavy antitank guns - calibres from 7.5 cm.
. M.I.10 War Office-8 September 1941-13/ATK-S
The German 88 mm. gun is fitted with a telescopic sight adapt able for the engagement of ground targets, the lat est type of which is the telescopic sight.20E <.. It weighs
10 lbs. and is a monocular type with a magnification of four
and a field of view of 17.5°. The graticule is made-with
two cross lines interrupted at the centre, an arrange ment which is usual in German instruments. There is a range
drum graduated in 100 metres.from 0 to.9400 metres and a
tangent elevation (superelevation) drum graduated in l/l6°
from 0° to 12°, There are also lateral.and vertical deflec tion drums. For antitank use the lateral and vertical de~
flection drums are set to cero. .
The War Office, London-17 July 1942-13/AUC-75
Enclosed is a cartridge of .the Russian Antitank, rifle, *
'(7.62 mm. caliber) which is now being adopted by. the Ger mans. The barrel is reported to have a length of 1,^00 mm.
and the muzzle velocity is 1,350 meters per second, (about
4390 • ft/sec). The gun-is neither semi-automatic nor auto matic but has an ordinary clip of 5 .cartridges. In tests
the> projectile has penetrated an armor. plate- of 22.5 to 23
mow -at an angle of impact.of 45°, The tests .and .experiments
carried- out by the Finns have been hampered by. the shortage
••' of armor plates. . . . . ; •
; M.tA .JR-, 497rHelsinki-31 January 1942
'•'• -v. .
Editor's Note: .Cartridgl .'is 0n 'ff^ija*£r4nance Department
^•mM-^jfif x J ; & t f
rjri ^ * % t ' yy
Ill - MATERIEL ANDEQUIFMENTV'
-a ti^ink. (^ont'td^H
W s made on a' captured) GERMAN Mark IV Tank (show
that it is) completely vulnerable both in front and broad side o n ^ o the BRITISH 2-pdr. (like the 40 mm. Bofors) .
Antitank Gun. Shots fired at a range of 500 yards with
the target broadside went right through the GERMAN tank
and penetrated the far side. Six shots - — fired against the
40 mm. band of armour plate in the centre of the hull pen etrated and three also went through the 20 mm. plate on the
far side of the hull. -The other three struck the gun or the
gun mounting inside the turret and broke up. The gun crew .
would certainly have been casualties. . At 700 yards range,
all shots penetrated the 20 mm. plate on both sides of the hull.
They also penetrated the 40 mm, plate and penetrated to a
depth of 10 to 15 mm, on the far side of the hull before
breaking up. At 1100 yards range, all shots penetrated both
the 20 and 40 mm, plate but did not all go through the far side
of the tank, Two tests were made firing at the tank head-on at
a range of 500 yards. Three shots were fired at the thick
double plate in front of the auxiliary gunner; all went right
through it. Three shots were fired at the thick single plate
in front of the driver's seat. Two of these went right through
and one just failed to go right through,
G.H.Q,,M,E,Technical Int, Summary-30 June 1941-Cairo,Egypt
The armour and armaments of the German Mk. Ill tank are as
follows:
The armour (all welded) is 30 mm, all round, except the top
of the rear engine compartment, which is 20 mm. Extra 40 mm,
plate is bolted on the front of the gun mounting, and extra
30 mm, plate .on the front of the superstructure, whjLch pro jects upwards to protect the turret joint; The armour is
half V jointed, which produces a tendency for it to split, on
the impact of a shell, along the jointsf
The Armament is one 50 mm, rapid fire cannon in.the power or
hand operated turret with all-round traverse; one: co-axial
SPANDAU 7,91 mm. light machine-gun; and one independent SPANDAU
7*91 mm, light machine gun mounted in the hull superstructure
on the right of the driver, firing forward* .Numbers of each
•type of the German tanks hatfe.been knocked out in LIBYA and in
GREECF*;hy a variety of methods, and penetration performances
of BRITISH weapons against these tanks have been very good.
'» vA V t 4
-78
III - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
7)
Antitank (cont'd)
As usual, the myth of GERMAN invincibAar^r$na"
submitted to the cold light of engineering ra^i^..
sorry exhibition.
' Incl.l-M.A,R.2457~Egypt-8 May 1941
8) Miscellaneous Items
Drawings of Antiaircraft artillery Emplacements, Laj^out, and
Command Posts, show a 40-foot tower for 40 mm Mk.III equip ment, designed for use at such vulnerable points as factories,
railroad centers, edge of woods, etc., where due to height of
buildings and trees, it is necessary when siting guns close
in to have height, so that field of fire may be obtained*
They have been designed to give a better field of fire when
sighted close to or in vicinity of high buildings. The Brit ish started using them at the beginning of the War and then :.
stopped. Lately there has been quite a number put up. The
Germans are (said to be) using numbers of similar
towers*. . M.A•R.45048-London-22 October 1941
Steel towers are being constructed in sections of 5 feet
to permit (the erection of towers) .of variable heights,
10,15, or 20 feet. Stability ^fixing trials of towers up to
25 feet have been carried out with satisfactory results
and further trials to 35 feet are to be made. The towers
are bolted together and not rivited permitting their being
dismantled and re-erectad elsewhere. For the same reason the
lower' part of the tower should not be bricked up. v ••
M.A.R.47449-London-18 April 1942
A new type of British lower has been designed which will provide a more suitable platform for sea gun positions.
The nevi,.tfjvpr consists of a grid carrying a tower on
four legs whiM1,fy^l| f h U g ^ i ^ e ^ ^ w i l l be lifted by "cam s'it$, £nd g^ttom. These
els", towed; ^ ** w
FAS
$
$ *
i£
> 6 "
$ ]P 1 1
H I - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
8)
Miscellaneous Items (cont'd)
towers are expected to come forward from production in approx imately six * — will replace the PHIL qgrdqse iiniJt will be used only in
o m r j S ^ i^ity where the site is sheltered
orm will remain steady. There are two types,
one a combined Heavy Antiaircraft and Light Antiaircraft and
Searchlight 7-tower layout and the other a 2-tower Light An tiaircraft and Searchlight layuut, A similar tower is
available for inland use for the mounting of antiaircraft
guns to raise them up to obtain clear fields of fire,
M.A,R.46667-London~19 February 1942
Sea f o r t s — - have been designed (by the British) to
carry 3.7" antiaircraft guns as their main armament and Bo fors guns, as their secondary armament together with radio-
location apparatus, predictors, height finders and in some
cases, searchlights. The (construction) principle a^
dopted is to build the structure with its armament, electric
generating plant, equipment and accommodation in a waterfront
building yard and then to. tow it out and ground it at the
site selected on the sea bottom in a depth of water varying
from 3 to 7 fathoms, In all cases the forts are designed
so that when they float out from the building yard they are
complete in every detail and ready to go into action immedi ately after grounding,
. Incl.1-M.A»R•47109-London-27 March 1942
The following are.the estimated penetration figures for fire
from aircraft diving at the target with weapons stated:
20 mm. OERLIKON
15 mm. Machine cannon with ball
Gun 151 with arammunition,
mour Piercing ammunition
Homo-Hard Plate Concrete
Gravel Earth
3/8"
23"
45"
30"'
G.H.Q.,Middle East Forces-Technical Intl.
Summary-28 February 1942-Cairo, Egypt,
> 6 "
I N - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
;
*M
•
- ':
ft •: '
4 -V « -i ' A? j^ft*
One troop of the Battery (Light Antiaircraft^'-*^- mjjjk fit ted with, shields. Time after time those shields'-prpved their
value,t saving casualties and giving increased confiednce to'
the. detachment, especially when under machine gun fire, from
tanks. Although there is an increased weight on the suspen sion springs, no breakdowns occurred during five weeks fight ing, and these guns (with shields) could move as fast as any
: •. «' • •
of the others. . , . Appendix "C"-M.A.R.47438-London-17 April 1942
8)
'
Miscellaneous Items (cont'd)
Shields have now been approved for Guns/40 mm, antiaircraft,
mobile. - These consist of two thicknesses of 6 mm D.I.* plate
separated by a lg" gap.
AtJC-Notes April 1942
Question: What armor protection do the British provide
crews on Heavy Antiaircraft guns?
Answer: No armpr protection is provided for heavy antiair craft guns. The 4,5-inch hsis a shield but this is a weather
shield only. Concrete and sand bag protection is afforded
on static sites. The field gun pits and Command Posts
are, where possible, countersunk and strengthened.
M.A.R,47594-London-27 April 1942
— — The standard German anti-personnel bomb which' can
be expected in all tneatres of war against troops' in the —
open --- has the following characteristics :' Length of bomb 1' 3" • ' •; "
• Diameter of bomb . . 3 l/4"
. . 9"
Length of tail *** j?' ^ ^
Diameter of tail | / : r Length overall fa •' - ' i ' w f l l ^ ^ .
. Wall thickness ^'kmfrM'i.X
I Weight of T.N.T, filling '
Ij \ . Total weight 12 kgs, (26i
> 6 "
Ill - MTERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
,8) Miscellaneous J ^ ^ a ^cHft'd)
f llllJ^ H l ^ W l r W s U ^ a r e Panted aark grey. The
t \\ d w a j u g gfel&A&SsistSs of a nose (percussion) fuze — — and
W ® %. v game which butts up against a short compressed T.N.T.
exploder which in turn butts up against a long compressed
TvN.T. exploder: at the far end of the system'is a phosphor us and max smoke-producing pellet, the object of which'pre sumably is to-ensure quick location of the burst from the
air. This firing system' forms a central column running
through the bomb and is surrounded by a main T',N,T, charge
and the J" thick bomb casing. The casing is said to give
a fragmentation of one splinter per square metre at a radius
of 25 metres around the point of explosion: i.e, approxi mately 700 fragments. The charge weight ratio of the bomb
is ten, These bombs are carried in the aircraft in
clusters.of five in a specially designed carrier, - — '
Summary of Technical Reports Regarding Weapons
M.I.10 - Uar Office, 8 September 1941-319,13/ATK-S
— - A further report has been received on the small anti personnel bombs (S.D.2) used by the Germans for low-level
attacks on easily damaged targets. The S.D, 2, bomb weighs
about 4i-lbs. when ready for release. Its height of re lease is between 15 and 175 feet, but it can be dropped
from any height and will not detonate until the aircraft is
out of range of the splinters. The fuze can be set either
to give detonation lj to 2\ sees, after release, or in such
a manner that the bomb detonates-on impact if the height of
release is greater than about 75 feet, or after a small de lay if it is less, Detonation in the air may occur if
the height of release considerably exceeds 175 feet. An un exploded S,D, 2. Bomb should always be regarded with suspi cion, it may be in an extremely sensitive condition and the
slightest shift in its position may cause It to explode,
M,A.R,47285-London-7 April 1942
—-(The Germans employ Rawing-stick booby trap dropped
from vehicles or f rdm (Ag k A which)--- consists of an alu minum cylinder^ painte^ y^yjow and walls 0.1 cm, thick, It
contains 0.15 Kg>; hlgfi"explosives as a block filling. In
the top of "±kd}:Biliing are three black powder pellets, "C"
\ v- , 4 '
> 6 "
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIFMENTV'
8)
Miscellaneous Items (cont'd)
partly embedded in the ma?if filing. Tl^e top of the bomb
i's fivetted to the body, and carries the ignition mechan ism, ' On unscrewing the cap a short length sef-1 cord (5 cm.)
is seen attached at one end to a disc in .thoj cap,, and at
the other end to a loop in the friction-wire-—rjlf/the
cap if pulled more than 5 cm,, the friction-wire.fcai^ses'
the 'friction composition to ignite the pellet "B" and so
fire the compressed pellets "C". ».hen found complete the
bombs are harmless. If found-with the cap unscrewed the
cord should be cut and the cap replaced to protect the fric tion wire. The cap should not be unscrewed/ as the safety
margin of 5 cm, of cord is very small, — G,H,Q*,M.E-,Technical Intl. Summary
30 June 1941-Cairo,Egypt
A booby trap, found in the Barcia area, had the form of a
single-earphone head set, which exploded when the nickel-
plated screw at the back of the earpiece was unscrewed. It
may have been intended to explode when the current was ap plied as in normal iise. The charge was' sufficient to blow
off the victim1 s hand almost completely. It was not passi ble- to reconstruct the device, but it is believed to be of
Italian origin, . :
Incl.#2-48559-20 June 1942-A.A.C.319.13/AUF-29
The British have used neither half-tracked nor tracked ve hicles for gun traction for a number of years. They were
unsatisfactory as their road speed was very limited and the
The. 6-wheeled driving tracks and suspension unreliable, vehicle to which overall chains could be fitted to the. 4 1
rear driving wheels at will displaced the half track vehi^
and the'6-wheeled vehicle is itself now being displaced
by the 4-wheeled* 2-wheel-drive vehicle,
' ' M.A.R.44550-London-17 September 1941
For convoy driving the British have adopted and are instal .^ota^^i^iht,
ling — a small standard. Light similar which is fastened under the bsp<j$ $hd£ ajb •
of the rear point of the floor or^Hfe ^Npi ' * - 11
-83
Ill - MATERIEL AND^-^J]
a ffk Q-'-} « i v ..
Milqel%Lrieou.3 Itemj^'
BS directly on the center rear of the rear axle housing.
At 'this point on the rear axle housing a large white circle
is painted with ordinary paint. V/hen the light is lit at
night it is invisible to any aviator excepting to one hedge
hopping frqm the immediate Tear, and on the other hand it is
clearly Visible to the following convoy vehicle for long
distances, even in bad weather, dusty roads, etc.
M,A.R.4203S-Lond'on-27 December 1940
(Keeler "Jim Crow")—- spectacles and goggles are used to
a great' extent in Great Britain to assist spotting and iden tification of aircraft. Full protection is claimed against
harmful ultra violet and infra red radiation.
M.A.L.#45062-London-23 October 1941
—-(.AS a result of tests) the —-(British) Airborne-
Division is being furnished with night binoculars.. They -give
very little magnification (2j power) but.have very good light
gathering properties. On a completely dark night they give
no help but in conditions of dusk or moonlight they give con siderable advantage and enable objects to be made out dis tinctly at two or three times the range which is possible
with the naked eye. They have a wide field of vision.
M.A.R.48544-London-23 June 1942
The British Battle Dress is an extremely satisfactory type
of uniform for wear — - ( i n Great Britain.) It. is suffi ciently thick to give warmth, it is loose to enable an ex cellent freedom of muscular movement, it is treated to re sist gas attacks and'is somewhat waterproof, For use in
the damp Cold of England it appears more satisfactory than
our field uniform. - —
"
L.46325-London-29 January 1942
British ha^e/a new signal pistol, now replacing the Very
jfe' T&'fe. vV, V*
vk f*. r.sit * ^
' -84r
Ill - MATERIEL \ND EQUIPMENT
8)
Miscellaneous Items (con'
t Xi 'if up g.
pistol. Being of dull finished stee^ 4 % ^hould^t^jglint in
-
the sunlight as did the brass portions or'tjie .Very j
It weighs slightly over two pounds and is carried
in.a. canvas holster . It is issued to various 1
irig:
Total.
Remarks
Light .antiaircraft Regiment
Royal Artillery
39
13 per Battel-y
Heavy .jntiaircraft Regiment
Royal Artillery
12
4 per Battery
M.A.R.45640-London-8De cember 1941
An example of the'V?LKST AGEN or "Peoples Car" has been cap tured by the British . The engine is a four-cylinder air-
cooled type, with twin horizontally opposed cylinders, and
is mounted at the rear of the chassis, The estimated . —
rated horsepower was reported'as'9 "horsepower with a prob able maximum brake horsepower of'30 at 3500 r.p.m. The sus pension is independent, of the Auto-Union type, giving very
good riding for so small a vehicle over rough terrain. The
transmission is of standard type, from engine to rear axle,
and there are four forward speeds and one reverse gear, CON TINENTAL tyres are fitted, the dimensions being 8.00 x 12.
They have no tyre treads, but smooth surfaces. The petrol
tank is mounted in fround and the feed to the engine is by a
suction pump in the rear engine compartment,
""• * Incl,5-M,A.R,2457-Egypt-10 July 1941
(The German)Volkswagen r-,cross-country car is replac ing motor cycles which have proved inefficient. It will go :
through anything except shifting sand dunes. Desert sand";'
causes wear on stub axles and frame'heads after 125/180
miles, , Selector forks ana .-clutches are weak, Distribu tor, and rear dynamo bearing are not dust proof,;
ji;A.^4686^|.Qndon-3 March 1942
> 6 "
Ill - MATERIEL \ND EQUIPMENT
8)
Miscellaneous Itemsffa'r
A Germn^c^fcfcok%cnpt3LuSel\SJ' Libya which is thought to have
be Larked fbp%.. Giinnery
xTcer — - was found to contain the
^.th^t" p^sonne 1 concerned with artillery directors
Quipped with non-magnetic gas mask respirator
ers, German service containers heretofore captur ed have been made uf tin plate. An exception is one recent ly found made of an aluminum alloy • It may be that the alloy-containers are intended for personnel using mag**
netic compasses or similar apparatus.
Technical reports-ATK/S-London-3 September 1941
A captured GERMAN Document contains an Army Order of 10
April 1941 announcing the introduction of protective EAR*
PLUGS for men with perforated ear-drums. The plugs will
protect such men from the effect which may arise from the
entry of gases through.the acoustic passage. They will be
packed in boxes which will be carried at the bottom of the
respirator haversack, and will be issued to all soldiers
with'perforated ear-drums,
G.H,Q,,M.E,F.Technical Int, Summary
Cairo,Egypt-15 September, 1942,
9)
Developments
Army requirement, an igniter
to meet 1 —-(a British) tracer for the 40 mm high explosive shell, to give 12 sec onds time of burning has been successfully developed.
BAS- ashington, D, C.-22 April 1942
The Air Staff are of the opinion that by the end of 1941 a
limited number of aircraft will have a. ceiling of 40,000
feet and over and that this cy towards high altitude
performance will increase •guable that aircraft at
these altitudes can £ave litt] :le ( 10 influence on the oper ations of a or against targets of small "propor tions,. Nevertheless^ Altitude flying is one way whereby
' defense, and in conditions such as
the atiaKjfifr wa&j&ffyijfe
an ^attack on a city»be enabled to deliver his bombs to ad vantage. For this reason heavy antiaircraft1 artillery must
be prepared .to meet the contingency of very high altitude
flying in the defense of large areas. The technical disad vantage of the, defense lies in the inevitable increase in the
period of prediction due to longer times of flight..' As against
this, aircraft at such altitudes are limited in regards to ma**
neuverability,and further, the radius of lethal effect of the
shell is Increased owing to the rarity of the atmosphere.
The problem is being approached in two ways: l) scaling up v
of the existing predicting apparatus so as to take advantage
of the full range of present equipment; 2) the design of more
powerful guns. Superior ballistic performances can be obtain ed by increases in muzzle velocity and better flighting prop erties of the shell. A possible line of research is the
Genrlich choke bore principle, thus ensuring better sealing
of the projectile in the bore and correspondingly higher muz—
zle velocities for a given pressure,- This principle is be ing investigated, but it must be realised that hitherto the
principle has been applied only to small -bore equipments and
even so only to a limited extent, "
BES- Rpt,#95-Washirtgton-27 March 1941
Interest in high-Velocity guns has been given impetus by the
discovery of the •—- German tapered barrel high-velocity
28-20, mm. antitank gun. — - The surprising feature of. this
gun is the. high-penetrative power of its projectile. The
core;of the projectile is made of tungsten carbide, a mate rial . whose specific gravity is nearly double that of steel.
This bullet has penetrated three inches of homogeneous ar**
mor;and although it was stated that the results are in accord ance with the predictions from the DeMarre formula, the great
penetrating power of very dense, high-velocity projectiles
has not hitherto been experimentally verified, at.least by
the British. It was stated that'the tungsten carbide :
breaks up on penetration (it even breaks up when fired into
sawdust) but that a large number of small high-yeioc
particles are sprayed behind the plate which wyuldtie'<Je|d-/ ^
1y inside a tank. The antidote for this projectile',isvioib- i J
v .<;' ® pP* & & ft
> 6 "
je^^Jfcpifi&nts (cont'd)
viously divided armor, the first plate to break the projec tile and the second to stop the fragments. It is of intei^
est to note that the shield for the German gun is composed
of two parallel plates separated by an inch or so, indicat ing that the Germans designed the gun shield to resist the
same type of projectile as the gun itself fires.
The thought of using a coned bore is of course not new,
and the British have studied the matter intermittently in
past years. At present, development w r k is proceeding on
two such rifles; one with a barrel tapered from ,685 to
,532 inches, both somewhat smaller than the German 28/20
mm, — —
London-October 1941-AUC-13/ARP-21
General Staff specifications for a high altitude gun
require a maximum height of 50,000 feet, the last round
to be fired at future angle of sight of 65 degrees, the
first round at future angle of sight of 55 degrees giving
at least 20 seconds time of engagement at approaching tar get of 400 mi/hr, Two solutions are under development.
One solution is a 3*7 inch caliber to fit existing 4,5
inch jacket and mounting to give 3400 ft/sec, muzzle velo city with a 28 lb, shell. This gives a 22 second engagement
of target at 45,000 feet with a 40 second fuze .and a new
predictor of 19 seconds at 40,000 feet with existing Vick ers predictor which has 30 second fuze limitation, — The
second solution is the 5,25 inch caliber existing.Naval gun
with increased muzzle velocity of 2900 ft/sec. with 80'lb,
shell giving ^21 second engagement of target .at 45,000 feet
with .40 second fuze and new, predictor or 16 seconds time: of
engagement at 40,000 feet with existing Vickers predictor,
...... ...
. M.a,R,43093-London-2 June "1941
An interim solution for the high-level heavy-antiaircraft j
gun — - is 3,7 inch calibre-—(gun with)-— a muzzle velo city of 3,4QO f«s,, to be used invbne present — 4,5 inch
S PI\ " £*
III - MATERIEL AND EOUIFMMlff 9)
:
Developments (cont' d) " " *
1
•n fe
* ll I
antiaircraft mounting. Pilot barrels are in course of manu facture.
Bulletin on antiaircraft Development for
North Americain Bureau-AUC-20-Dec ,18-1941
Design of antiaircraft weapon for attack of high flying
aircraft, quick firing 5•25"/ It was desired to have a
muzzle velocity of 2900 feet second to give a ceiling de« finffd by an engagement time of 20 seconds with 40 seconds . '
prediction for 45,700 feet. To get this Muzzle velocity it
was necessary to increase the length of cartridge. It has
been docided not to do this due to necessary changes in de sign of mountings which has already commenced. Present muz zle velocity is 2870 ft/sec., however with a J worn gun on
which range tables are based, the muzzle velocity is re-,
duced to 2625 ft/««G. which will reduce. the ceiling to
44, 300 feet and the chance of hitting by about 5 percent.
— . > M. A . R.45271-London-6 November 1941
The 5.25y gun has been designed and is in production.
It will fire an 80 lb. shell with"a muzzle velocity of 2875
ft./sec, 'lethal radius' 150 ft, as compared with 90 ft, for
4.5" and 60 ft, for 3,7", It"will give engagements up to
45,000 ft, and slant range 18,000 yards with 40 seconds, or
up to 40,000 ft. and slant range 16,000 yards with 30 sec onds time of flight,
•• ' : A, A• C..£319,13/AUC-33
information has been obtained on the progress of Work -on •'•
gun design being conducted by Lt. Colonel Probert at Wool-'
wich Arsenal, - — Gun design drawings increasing-the-cham ber capacity for the 3.7" Mark VI — to clLmn,, an
^-Vduction)
increase of 40 cu. in. (have "beerf approved , The ordnance Board haS" concurred -—.jin -driving
: 4 ; band (and cartridge-case)—- designs f ; • ' . '•"
, \ N,A. R,979-London-21 April 1942
-89
Earn % S ) feiUiPMENT
1 «
« ft W
i^p&ents (cont'd)
trials have taken place with two types of (3*7 inch anti aircraft) gun; one (Mk V) with an orthodox banded pro jectile, the other (Mk VI) with a projectile having an addi tional forward band (Probert design) • The Mark V
showed that wear was severe, both at the commencement of ri fling and at the muzzle. This indicated that the muzzle velo city would be expected to fall from 3,400 ft./sec., the de signed muzzle velocity, to 3,000 ft./sec. very rapidly, after
which the gun would be useless for the high ceiling require ment. With the Hark VI gun, the wear at the commencement of
rifling was very much less, with no trace at the muzzle after
80 rounds.
BAS-T»ashington, D. G.-22 April 1942
The British have standardized the 3.7" Mk. VI Antiaircraft
•gun (Probert design) employing a forward banded shell for
production. The prototype of this velocity weapon, af-_
ter 468 rounds, is maintaining a muzzle velocity of 3360 ft.
sees. .The fired shell still has stability and uniformity in
muzzle velocity equal or better than at the commencement of
the test of this weapon, according to test results. The
3.7" Mk. V Antiaircraft gun (orthodox design) with muzzle
velocity of 3460 ft. sec. had an accuracy life of 81 rounds.
• . M.A.R•48724-London-6 July 1942
The 5«25 inch antiaircraft gun — - will probably.be redesign ed to take -7—^a projectile —^(having an additional forward
band) following the success of this type with the 3.7 in.
Mk VI £un.—*(with the Mk VI gun (3400 ft/sec. muzzle velo city) using this type of projectile the wear at the commence ment of rifling was ( s l i g h t ) — n o trace at the muz zle after 80 rounds) .
- Bui. on A.A.De'v^ f^j^ jtforth American Bureau
\r • • r f The War Offioe.^nd Antiaircraft Command insist on haying a
•-
..
,
•
.
•
•
*
"
• -90
-
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIFMENT 9)
V
'
Developments (cont'd)
,. ' . .
f $ OFSk „
ft J 8 Mm*
mobile, intermediate altitude/ antiaijrcrajft' *mn®| .3 ing^ ^.ortvdn
mounting with a rate ,of Afytjjf Jpsgj ing of 20,000 feet, ana a time orix¥g£rti jgjp jfo.11$ iecirjls.
. M.A.R, 44477-London-ll SeptJn.felj^41
A twin 6-pr. gun —-(about 57 mm.) to deal with targets up
to 15,000 feet, above Bofors ceiling of 4,000 ft., is being de**
veloped as an intermediary between Heavy and Light Antiaircraft,
M.A.R.45840-Lohdon-13 December 1941
A twin-barrelled 6-pr. semi-automatic field equipment is in
course of development, with a muzzle velocity of 3,100 ft./sec.,
for the engagement of aircraft up to the 15,000 ft. level.
This is an interim stage towards the development of a fully-
automatic 6-pr. equipment for field use. — Bulletin on A,A. Development for North Ameri can Bureau-13/AUC-20-18 December 1941
The Bofors Company (in Sweden)—- has designed a new 57 mm.
antiaircraft gun with many new features. To date only a
pilot model consisting of the barrel, breech mechanism, re coil and elevating systems, and the auto-loading mechanism,
has been completed. Tests, have been in progress since July ,:v
and will, be completed shortly. Pilot model's of mounts are
being made and all tests are expected, to be completed by No**
ve&ber, 1942. Production is not expected to begin- before No*
vmber,1943 • Th$ company does not desire to license the manu facture of any portions of the design before all tests are
completed. •• •
.. ' *... . ; M.,A.R, 1421-Stockholm-30 October 1941
The Bofors munitions plant,—(in Sweden)—••- has re^e
gun quantity production-of pme^fE^fii mSuj&fcjffil 'J^e
antiaircraft gun which was bre^i^^ljfi afc akrmvift.
aircraft gun. This gun andM>fe|i^| 'fa-iT'^^M Wdfefifcd
dard. — - The carriage is designedfor high-speed towing be
-91
I*1 Developments (cont'd)
hind a truck or other prime mover. It is equipped with bal loon tires, individual wheel suspension, and hydraulic brakes
on the rear wheels which may be' operated from the towing ve hicle. The wheels are eccentrically mounted with re-»
spect to the axles — ( s o that) a rotation of the axles
raises or lowers the frame. This movement is accomplished
by lowering a barrel brace 1 —— fixed to the rear* axle
(which causes) a system of cables inside the main frame
members (to effect) a simultaneous rotation of the front
and rear axles, "Coil springs' ihsirie the main frame members
counterbalance the weight and assist in lowering or raising
the carriage. The mount is levelled by means of four adjust able ground plates which are attached at the extremities of
the main frame and the outriggers, and which are operated
through cranks and quick-action screw jacks. Two anchor pins
at-each end of the main frame and one pin at the end of each
outrigger may be Slowered until their points touch the ground
before the frame' is lowered so that when the carriage is low ered all pins are forced'into the ground or penetration of
the pins Can be secured by driving in with sledges. The en tire operation of going into (firing position) requires
less than one minute,
M,A.R,1340-Slockholm-3! January 1941
The mobile predictor is probably the Kommandohilfagerat (aux iliary mechanical predictor) admirably suited for mobile oper ations due to its weight (4 cfwt.), design for ease of pro duction and simplicity, and does not need any electrical
£tjuipment,) It is sometimes used with the 8.8 cm multT-pur pose gunf In addition to indirect fire the Germans, are' us-'.*<
ing both predictor control and fire from an observation post
for the engagement of tanks and ground targets, In our
Report No. 47570, we described'the German auxiliary mechan ical predictor. In our report No, 48983-we recommended that
we develop a mechanical preda&t&Awithout any electrical
equipment for our mobile antia*iy?raft guns as an auxiliary
director. If we a^e"'to havo^k'Jiignly mobile multi-purpose
gun, I consider.this very essential,
:' ^ % f % %
t\
* * M,A.R.49094-London-25 July 1942
„
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIFMENTV'
9)
Developments (cont'd)
i
Mjji •• '
^ *
•
The British are going to use Belr^eigpj
(U.S.A.) Electrical predictors; and delrwrifcs .^.re early in 1943, for bath 5.25 inch and 3.7
Antiaircraft Equipments (High altitude Antiaircraft
' M.A.R.47733-London-5 May 1942
A number of improved predictors are in production or* under
design.
1) Vickers predictor re-designed to accept changing
height up to rates of change of 400 ft./sec. Pilot model
is ready for trial.
2) Sperry predictor re-designed to accept changing height.
Pilot model has undergone "trials.
3) A mechanical predictor that will accept curved course
and changing height, and will go to 45 seconds time of
flight, is under design^
4) - — Electrical predictor that will accept changing
height, and will go to 45 seconds time of flight. Pilot
model has given' accuracy superior to any existing mechani cal predictor when fed with perfect voltages. A certain •
aJnount of re-design is necessary.
r '5) Electrical predictor that will accept changihg height .
and Will go to 45 seconds time of flight is under develop ment « ..
A 'Naval Close Range' Pre'di'ct'or has been designed and the
pilot model is under trial. It will be the fire control
instrument for the 6 pr. gun (about 57 mm.) . It
makes use. of visual bearing ana angle,, and 10 cm. radio
range, the aerial being mounted on top of. the predictor,
and can cop>e with diving targets, the equations being based
on' the rates of'change of bearing, angle and range 4
A.A.C.//319.13/AUC-33
Trials are in progress to eStablis^if a No. 1 predictor
can accurately control four 40-np ™ + u „ re transmission unit. A small cor bSfif
made in the predictor to compen this
trial is successful, it is intended to use
equipments with Vickers predictors in an intermediate,'role
-93
9)
Developments (cont'd)
for the engagement of targets at height levels up to about
12,000 ft. 40-mm. ammunition with 12 seconds self-detftruc tiun time i's under de'sign for this purpose,
' M,A.L.47191-London-l April 1942
• •
Report on antiaircraft Defense of Malta
stated that
Antiaircraft instruments \/ere highly sensitive to bomb blast
and that predictors have been found to need extra
protection against splinters. The Ministry of Supply are
now investigating' the question of providing splinter proof
shields for the top of predictors.
M.A.R.48475-London-18 June 1942
With 400 m.p.h. targets and rate of fire approximately 120
rounds per minute, the problem of accurate gunnery (for
the automatic weapons) at the higher levels (and longer
time of flight than 3-sec.) depends entirely on the devel opment of a new predictor incorporating range measurements.
Therefore, the first priority -—(has been)-— given to de*
veloping a fire control system based on a 10-sec. time of
flight. ' M.A,R,43460-London-3 July 1941
Trials of the suitability of search light control (Radio
Detection Finder) for fire control purposes are in progress.
1) for heavy antiaircraft*guns with Vickers predictors;
2) for 3" 20-cwt. guns with Vickers predictor against
divebombing•attack•at night;
3) for 40 mm guns with Vickers predictor against targets
at intermediate heights.
, M,A,L.47191-London-l April 1942
Ah experimental model — ( o f a 40 mm Bofors antiaircraft
gun) was seen, which was intended for ofce-man.operation
with direct sighting when — - the preciictoriis not available
On this model, the gunner i|£ts on a.s'm^l%P|t which moves
y. •
<«
Ill - MATERIEL AND EQUIPMENT
9)
Developments (cont'd)
with the gun. In front of him is a
trol lever which is connected through maf
draulic valves controlling movements of the guft.*
the near end of the lever to the right (i.e.pointing
front of the lever to the left) causes the gun to traverse
right. Similarly, elevating the lever depresses, while de pressing the lever elevates, the gun. The movements are
thus similar to pointing a cane at an object.
There is a straight line relationship between the amount
of control displacement and the speed of traverse of ele vation. The maximum speed of the traverse is ap roximately
24°/sec0
N*A.Re864-8 April 1942-AAC#319.13l/AWG
Mr. Thress —-(ll.St Army Ordnance)' states it is his opin ion that several of the important objects to be consider ed in the design of a secondary fire control system are;
(l) Reduction of .the time from traveling position to tar get engagement^ (2) Reliability, (3) Simplicity. Because
of these factorss -the inclusion of power control, such as
the joystick, seems to him. a step in the wrong direction.
He thinks a secondary system that'would eliminate the neces sity for a-generator, junction box, cables and like gear
• a
would be the one desired'and, therefore, suggests mounted on car predictor, -—(similar to. the • Kerrison) riagd which will give the required deflections and be used
with manual control.: The predictor should not have .
more than J of the volume of the; No. '3> isince the trans mitters, 'telescopes and drives, aided-tracking mechanisms,
torque' amplifiers or power follow-ups and related parts
such as differentials, shafts, bearing-,• etc•, would not be
requited. The actual computing elements of the No. 3 could
(he ;thinks)—— be simplified and made smaller and with but
a small sacrifice of accuracy* - M.A.R.48324-London-9 June 1942
Antiaircraft tajiks are required for the protection of tank
units0 Experience in thfiTjiiddle East and accounts of the
Russo-German campaign sh$|jf air attack on telnks was in creased, is',3Jicreasing^^4'^f^(^th0>tahk point, of view),
ought'to be diminished. N^ improvised.br half-time methods,
will suffice to deal with the 'ac&l§ of attack envisaged and
•
'
-.95-
^
if K
9)
Developments (cont'd)
the development 'of antiaircraft tanks capable of moving with
the forward .echelons is essential. The British are evolving
a power-operated mounting containing two 15 mm. Besas and
two 7.93 Besas to the light tank Mark VI at home and 0.5"
Vickers are being similarly fitted to light tanks in the
Middle East,
Incl,4-M*^*R«44884~London October 1941
(Tentative conclusions have been reached as a result of
a British survey) of the best type of controls for use
on antiaircraft tanks, (It is recognized that) an tiaircraft tanks will ordinarily have to engage high speed
aircraft at low altitudes and short ranges. This requires
a gun mounting capable of very high (laying) speeds
— - I t has been suggested that (speeds)-— up to 90 de grees per second may (havt to be used) • It then be comes imperative that the means of controlling the gun be
improved, It is clear that the effective laying speed
of existing gun mountings is limited by the difficulty of
ce-ordinating head, eye and hand movements. This cu-ordi nati^n could be greatly simplified by controls which make
use of some familiar co-ordinated aiming movement, such as
the use of field glasses or the aiming of a fowling piece.
Controls embodying these principles should be developed as
soon as possible, — - l.ork along this line is — - in pro gress, In — existing controls the range of muscular
movement is but a fraction of what might be employed — - .
-The gunner should be placed, in the axis of rotation of the
turret to minimise the disturbing effects of acceleration.
The limited space available in a tank will almost certainly
make it necessary for one man to have entire control of the
aiming and firing of the. guns, - — He^ should have — - auto matic devices for the estimation of the range, speed and'
direction of . target, aircraft, and for applying the neces«»
aaiy correction to the sights. No existing predictor
seems suitable for tank use. ^.11 are large, require sev eral men to- operate .would be..difficult to protect with arm-
our and are not highly a c c u r t h e use'of a pre*
d&ctor is essential if accurate af)^iaij®raft fire --(of the.
heavier weapons,):-—is to -be ^obtairied,' A predictor' 'is of
little valu^yrho^ever, unle.ss the individuals who operate it
are caj^^^of r falltmiiig the target accurately,. This means
^
-96
• •• £ i m f i
$
III - MATERIEL \ND EQUIPMENT
9)
Si
Developments (cont'd)
that the principles outlined above are equally applicable to
the controls of the predictor itself.
N.A.R.864-8 April 1942
Question: - — Describe any developments in the nature of a self-
propelled mount for the 40-mm, Bofors Antiaircraft gun, - — .
Answer: Preliminary cross country trials, of a. self-propelled
•• 40-mm equipment on a long Field Artillery Tractor
and (of a self-propelled) predictor on a similar ve hicle have been satisfactory. Both vehicles are still under
trial ana details as to design such as the jacking, the
slewing handle and the carriage of spare,barrels and parts
are being cleared. The suggestion is to incorporate the Ad miralty Research Labortory joystick, if found satisfactory,
as a secondary method of fire control.
M.A.R.47595-27 April 1942-London
B I B L I-O.G.R A P H Y
1) Progress report on Development of Electric Fuze Setting De vices.
M.A.Rf4&486-London-19 June 1942
2) Trials of T-17 Sperry Predictor :
• • *M,A.R.4785 6-London-12 May 1942
3) Antiaircraft Machine Gun'Self-Destroying Fuzes.
" N.A.R.1517-London-27 December 1940
4) Particulars of the 20 mm'Sten Gun*
M.A.R.44898-Lpn£on-13 October 1941
and M.A.R.46924-Lon"don-12 March 1942
5) Antiaircraft Gunnery ^servations at Sea-.
•Lqndqn-14 January 1941
1 Li I B®I M "$» §f
y af 1 :siM S % w jj ml j* a •
. ^ • ' • M y g i
i r f f
8 1 SJ. jfl I I p t l r ^ T g E E V ^ fjpqpKl i l l l k s L o i J i l i 1T t u
bibliography (Oont d)
6)
Navy Antiaircraft Fire Control Table ("Flessey")
N.^.R;.2740-London-2 December 1941
7) Tachymetric. System.1 Predictor '"or High Altitude Guns
M•A, R.43939-London-7 August 1941
8) Development of High Altitude Antiaircraft Gun and Equip ment. ' • "
: . .. . M.A.R%43713-London-21 July 1941
9) Army Tachymetric System No. 1 Predictor, Army Simpli fied Model,
• N. A . R.15 50-London-ll July 1942
10) Tachymetric System (TS l) Predictor for high altitude
Antiaircraft Guns.
M.A.R.43094-London-27 May ,1941
11) Remote Control of 3.7" Antiaircraft Gun on Ilk'II Mount-
ing,4
M.A.R.42983-London-12 May 1941
12) Remote Control of 3.7" Sun (British) on Mk II Mount ing.
M.^.R.44304-London-30 august 1941
13) Demonstration uf Chemical warfare Rocket Projector
Weapons,
M.A.R.45996-London-19 December 10
December 1941
14) 'Airdrome Parachute Barrage
M.A.R. 43152-London-3 June 1941
15) During Target for Testing of Radio Froximity Fuzes,
N.A.R.2500-London-28 October 1941
16) Predictor Experiments accuracy Tests.
M.A*L.44863-London-101October 1941-131/ZW
-
-
17) Translation of Handbook ©rathe-German 2 cm four-bar relled ^tl£ir£ra£t .Gun L16unl3nftg (detailed descriptions with
•r^x^YY^ m ** *
i l M L V p W
T
..
. -98
> 6 "
»A.A.'C.#319 • 131/AVJP
T
H I - MATERIEL AND EQUIP
Bibliography (cont'd)
18) Report on User Opinions of the Sp&rrjf AHt^fraraft Pre dictor. * • £ jr* M M
M. A • R. 4193 5-London- 2 Deo%bg#L940
19) Projector Antiaircraft.3-inch Single'with Technical
Data ana Handbooks and References to Technical Papers.
. M. v.R.-131/ADJ-London-7 November 1941
20) Direct vs Rate Control Matching on Angle of Sight
pointers in No. 2 Predictor.
M.A.R.45992-London-26 December 1941
21) Improvised .\ntiaircraft and Antitank guns for Brit ish Armored Cars,
M • A. R. 1826-Cairo-r 14 May 1941
22) * Spark photography of bullets Striking Light Armor
M.A.R,46513-London-7 February 1942
23)
Color Bursts of Antiaircraft Fir
M. A.R, 43l72-London-8 June 1941—131/NW
1•
L
ILP
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
)
Concepts (re - tactical employment)
In an operation involving an Army, it might be expect ed that Army Headquarters would itself take responsibility
for the initial deployment of the greater part of the antiair
craft resources during the apy roach march. This can be done'
by using Army antiaircraft up to a certain stated line and
allocating specific tasks to be undertaken from Corps anti aircraft resources in the "Corps" areas. It can be antici pated that this will still leave the C.;rps with a certain
amount of Antiaircraft available for its own use. This plan
will allow the Army Headquarters to do the maximum coordi nation possible and at the same time give some latitude to '
the Corps, who will possess loc.al knowledge not available to
the Army, The Light Antiaircraft of the Divisions should
not be called upon to undertake Corps t-'.sks, but should be
used when necessary to cover the localities where its own
Divisional Units are concentrated. This met'hod will enable
the fighting Division to arrive in its deployment area com plete with its own antiaircraft which wuuld be immediately
available for its many tasks within the Divisional Area, The
danger must be avoided of the Division having to do rapid
deployment without th§ services of much of its own light
antiaircraft, - — the - latter .liavin g been dispersed in action
over a large area. If it is accepted that Army should be
responsible for co-ordination of most of the initial lay out diring the approach march then the question of march
tables must be considered. It may be necessary to fit Army
and Corps Antiaircraft into Corps and Divisional March tab bies respectively, lie should then get the situation of a
Corps Regiment commencing the Approach March well forward
in a Divisional March Table, This Corps Antiaircraft would
then be dropped off in successive stages of the march, leav ing the divisional antiaircraft available for the final de ployment. As the corps antiaircraft will all have been
dropped off during the approach the Division will not be
hampered by any additional troops and the Divisions might
expect to be self-contained with only their own Light Anti aircraft Regiments, at a time prior to the Divisional de ployment,
British Brigade Commander-ii.A.R.46090-London-5 January 1942
It is understood that at least one Armored Divisi n has is sued instructions that light antiaircraft guns will have
8 m
I? - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE l)
^/ff §
i? & h '•
f#V # '
Concepts (re'- tactical employment) (coni^d*)
'V
priority of movement on roads. This is taken t o m ^ a r ^ ^ t
antiaircraft troops are permitted to take advantage-^^ta'cH
" tical gaps between units in order to move from one task to
another. This seems very desirable and i't is suggested
should be common practice.
Incl,l-M.A.R.48ll8-London-2£ May 1942
The division commander is responsible (for the selection
• of m i s s i o n s ) — T h e commander of Royal Artillery (for
the'division)-— and the Light Antiaircraft regimental com mander will discuss the tasks. The division commander does
not always have time and has to delegate the selection of
tasks but (cannot delegate)— the responsibility. A
good many division commanders delegate the selection of tasks.
Attack by low flying airplanes is an important pro blem for the division commander,
'•M. A,R. 43986-London-ll August 1941
It was agreed (in- discussions at the School of Artillery)
• generally that.thei.Officerin Charge of the light Antiaircraft
Regiment should make recommendations to Division Commander.
He should have expert knowledge and from a study of maps and
aerial photographs he should know the number of guns requir •ed for' a given.task. The division commander or the sup port commander may designate:in some cases the number of guns
or
for a particular task. There should be a 1 (Battery) more designated as reserve at a-place where it can move to
critical points* If it cannot move then don't hold a reserve,
If it remains in reserve on wheels fire'power is lost and it
is preferred that all be in a position to fire. Another method
'fee to have a liberal allotment of Bofors to a/par*
tiftUlar task and " then withdraw 25 percent for a new task.
Commanders should always keep the subject of a reserve in
mind and see that withdrawal does not cause a.cap causing a
dangerous situation at a particular vital point. Don't keep
antiaircraft .artillery on wheels. Its- reserve should be in
position with ability to.switch craft defense. The
question of how you are going t^j^omrtmkn a reserve is
very important one,. w#2irJ
August 1941
-'. M• a , R. -101
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
l)
Concepts (re - tactical employment) (cont'd)
—-- Cooperation between light -antiaircraft regimental com manders and the staffs - — ( o f the formation)-— to which
they are assigned. It is necessary that all understand char acteristics and limitations of light antiaircraft artillery
and t ,at antiaircraft commanders be familiar with units in
the divisions with which'they are affiliated and with their
employment so that there will be cooperation in the field.
Again it is necessary to point out that wireless sets
should be furnished light antiaircraft units so they can
listen in* This set has a small range but by listening in
it will give antiaircraft commanders the local picture.
As soon as antiaircraft units arrive the antiaircraft com manders must learn the technique of other units• ^The first
step in this is keeping in touch with these units.
K.u.R.43986-London-ll august 1941
The light Antiaircraft Regiment should attend all division
exercises. Invite Division Staff and other officers to all
antiaircraft exercises. There must be a team ana it is dif ficult to settle down until this is done and the regiment
trained as a part of the division.
M.A.R.43986-Londo n-11 ioigust 1941
— — The Division Commander should state order,, of priority,
say vulnerable points or vulnerable areas. He should,list
(or his staff should list them for him) all such vulnerable
points or areas. They might be -divided into first and sec ondary priorities, then the light antiaircraft guns could be
placed with those of;first priority in so far as resources
permitted, and the remainder of resources, if any, spread
among those that were left. The problem of how vital cer tain targets are, is a matter for the Divisional Colander
to decide. The division commander-and —-(Divisional
Commander of Royal Artillery)— should not make the final
decision as to allotment of numbers of guns. The division
commander or the Commartder of Royal Artillery for -him should
order certain vital .po^t, r vital areas defended and the
Light Antiaircrafct$#d|fSme commander should allot the
guns. division commander directs the
r y as to intensity of fire and kind
- 102
IV
TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
l)
Concepts (re - tactical employment)
of fire, not the number of guns. In „ ...
ision commander should talk o.f the degre4'j0f $
he desires, then it is up to the Light Antiaircraft
mental commander to advise him. Defense in dept
is essential for protection but it is also essential
to give the troops morale effect. Ultimately someone will
demand it to hearten .the Infantry. The division commander
has to make that decision and regardless of the number need ed for vital points in the rear areas, he has to think of
the morale effect of his troops.
.M.A.R.43672-London-lB July
' • • ' 1941
Antiaircraft protection - — ( o f the division) should be
furnished for morale effect only even if it —<•—(should do
no)-— particular good —-(for anything) other than —
morale• • '.
M.A.R.43986-London7ll August 1941
The light antiaircraft artillery should remain under cen tralized control as long as possible and should be central ized again as soon as the situation permits. (However)— even when units of the Antiaircraft Regiment Are decentral ized to sub-units of the division it is still often possible
for the Regimental Commander Of the tight Antiaircraft Regi ment to get about and be of considerable assistance in the
general coordination of antiaircraft protection of the divi sions area. * ', M.A.R.43271-London-18 June 1941
> 6 "
The importance of antiaircraft defense of-any major landing
attempt has been realized; ,-—'. The light antiaircraft role
is'to act partly, with m^/'in'itial assault troops in order
to cover the beaches '.to act as follow-up troops
on aerodrome defense, 4 Ily M^npt/proposed that Heavy Anti aircraft shall be landed in fl'rfet%ave.
. / -Balft(^ofc^|UC-49-March 1942
IV- T A C T I O S ^ t t t s l c ^ N I I * iftfaM l)
•
"
T
Concepts (re - tacticar®employment) (cont'd)
The Germans —-(are believed to) have given to their
divisions heavy antiaircraft and searchlights. They recog*
riiae this as a necessity. If we -—(the British) have only
light antiaircraft Bofors, it is adequate. Targets can be
bombed from higher altitudes. (Heavy Antiaircraft)
is considered an essential.complement and as soon as avail able will become a part of the division or allotted from the
Army. The -Regimental Staff or the Division Staff will
have an-Antiaircraft Qfficer competent to handle Heavy An tiaircraft and Searchlights.when allotted.
M.A.R.43936-London-ll august 1941
> 6 "
The — - 57th Light Antiaircraft regiment which had the
best record of any like regiment in the Middle East en gaged in duels with 780 aircraft: in 187 engagements prior
to March 1942. It — provided the only antiaircraft- protec tion for a large and widely scattered Division. In addition,
during the second period and part of the third period, the
Regiment -—(had to release) two troops which were perman ently employed in protecting Corps Advance Landing Ground.
These could never be spared by the Division. Whilst the
air superiority of the Royal Air Force (at that time)— restricted enemy air activity to the minimum ana the Division
was without one of its Infantry Brigades, the'numerous tasks re quested of the Regiment during the third period drained its
resources considerably and if more;enemy aircraft had been
available the Regiment would have been hard pressed to ren der efficient antiaircraft protection. Many vulnerable units
and collections of motor transport had no antiaircraft pro tection beyond their ..own. small .arms fire. Brigade columns
were often spread over ground four miles square and whilst
requiring protection for headquarters and motor transport,
Brigades also called upon battery to provide portection for
striking columns, Field Artillery positions and Brigade "B"
Echelons,.. . The-Advance Division Headquarters column could
not be adequately protected under desert conditions with less
than six guns, .On the other hand,, aalls were made on the
Regiment to provide the necessary protection for the Supply
defiles and Rear Division
Columru _Division 'JB'V Echelon, — HeadqtA|rtp^|^ .tjit^u^gua^an^fed '-air superiority, or the
c e r t a o p p o s e d a .spaLf%ir force which should
J u r t f c H
fjj
IV - TACTICS ,'iND TECHBIRRA
1)
Concepts (re - tactical employment
.
be the exception today, it is felt that ade&are^'antiaircraft
protection of a complete Division cannot be m^fetained with
less than a minimum of four Batterys, each of 12 guns, whilst;
the ideal strength, and organization is four Batterys, each of
18 guns. One Battery is necessary for each Brigade Group
and the fourth Battery is required as a "swinger" Battery under
the Command of the Regimental Commander and available for all
those other tasks, for which protection of a Brigade Group .
at present must be sacrificed and administration complicated,
(Note: It is to be noted that the British light antiair craft regiment does not employ ,50 caliber machine guns with the
Bofors guns as"does the United States separate battalion.) M. A .R ,-2272-Cairo, Egypt-1 March 1942
The British consider that a fire unit to give protection , to a vulnerable point against low flying airplanes should consist of a troop of six 40 mm Bofors, A troop (of light antiaircraft) divided into two sections of three . guns each gives a deterrent effect rather than prutec tion. The Germans are —-(believed to be)—- using a mini- . mum of six light antiaircraft guns at vulnerable points. The British some time aga decided to use a minimum of six 40 mm guns in defense of airdromes and other vital points. — the ideal is to select 9 vulnerable points (equivalent to the 9 troops in a regiment) for protection when. 1 regiment is available.) M.A.R.48325~London-9 June 1942
Troops, are most vulnerable on the move. The light antiair craft unit is very mobile, is independent of small .units,
and is equipped for long periods of dutyj^jft should .be pre pared-to fire all day and to m ve all — The light;,..'
antiaircraft regiment must be trained id feed and'
look out for itself,. It is the most ais Lt in the
division. Officers, non-commissioned offic
must be able to -act independently and therefo;
-105-
x
/
y
BiMf|
*
i# J ^ #
I pf $ If
* IV l)
Concepts
tac^t^sr?.1<*' employment) (cont'd)
gree of training is essential among the junior ranks.
We can and must be hard on the men in a light antiaircraft
unit as they have to man the guns during the day and move
at night. During the day one man should always be at the
gun as spotter, the others ma,Tr be around sleeping or stand ing by depending on the degree of the alert. In my Awn regi ment we did it for three weeks in France and it was not too
bad, - — In training there are four things to stress:
1) subordinates should be informed of the. situation
2) orders must be clear as to task
3) means (must be firnished)—- to carry out" the task
.. /(.) there must be no interference afterwards ,
K.A.R,43877-London-1 august 1941
A British Light Antiaircraft Regiment of 54 Bofors 40 mm
guns can provide some protection for a maximum of 18 Vulner able points, A section of 3 guns is tne minimum -—(which
should be) provid'ed for any one point. — - nhen the vul nerable point is large or very important at least 6 should
be allotted. Light Antiaircraft should be allotted to cover
vital points as ordered by the division commander in order
of priority. The Infantry require antiaircraft protection
.. only while digging in. Artillery always require protection
and the medium artillery especially should be high in the
order of priority. Sections of 3 guns must be sited in a
triangle to be mutually supporting against dive bombing at tacks -—(out of the sun.) A distance of 1000 yards to
700 yards between guns Is recommended. Light antiaircraft
are very effective against tanks at ranges of 400 yards or
less but they should not be sited as part of the anti-tank
defence of the positions. They have no shield, are a very
large target, and should fire at tanks for their own
protection. They should be dug in.but are difficult to car*
mouflage as they must be ready at 5 seconds notice to fire.
Their protection lies in the. provision of a large number
of alternative positions. Once spotted they .should move at
once,., N ' . .... ....... _." ' . .. "." M,A,R.2.49-India-12 June 1942
The real |rM?l |Bi fthe dive bomber is. th^lfighter airplane
8? % t ;.. % *i • •
• El | !
f i J? •'<> - • i S&a k ii A^Q^, i. u
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
l)
Concepts (re-tactical employmer^ Jn^nt! d)
as the lessons from Crete clearly indicate. We had no fighters
there. .The fighter airdrome is therefore the first priority
for antiaircraft defense.. It takes a minimum of 24 Bofors
guns to give real protection from low flying airplanes at
such vulnerable point.
BES-333-6 May 1942
Since task commanders may have little experience in the hand ling of light antiaircraft, the light antiaircraft commander
must be prepared to advise the task commander on the
best use of the light antiaircraft guns, and in techni cal matters, in connection with employment and siting. In or der to do this he must keep himself fully in touch with the
tactical situation. Much care and foresight is* neces sary in advising on the number of guns to be:allotted to var ious tasks and in deciding on the relative importance of the
numerous calls which are likely to be made on the light an tiaircraft defenses. There is a tendency to place light an tiaircraft batteries indiscriminately under command of.lower
units from the outset. Generally speaking, the command of
light antiaircraft artillery should be centralized as long
as possible otherwise guns may be employed in the defense
of points of minor importance, while points which*are really
vital to the.operation afe a whole are'left without adequate
defense. Briefly,k the tasks.for which light antiaircraft
defense is required arc as follows: 1) To provide protection during'the concentration of the
force. This includes places of landing, disembarkation, de 4 training or de-bussing. 2) The protection of the formation during the approach
march. This is described in manuals as the protection of
defiles. There is much loose thinking as to what consti tutes a defile. From the antiaircraft point of view a defile
can be defined as a point where effective enemy air attack
will result in thfr obstruction of the forward movement of the
wheeled traffic formation. There is a tendency auto matically to. as a defile. This cannot be
decided without iffi/cjpmisjKinc^. It may often be that a par ticular bridge, -ruction, or the topography
of the surrounding counf^/yei&o: ftfe ^jnost difficult target
to bomb whereas a village oir tp^Jgt^y^^^^he road in ques
j
f
fA
l)
K
a
p ^ ^ k ^ f ^ o y m e n t ) ( cont'd )
tion where no alternative route exists and where the destruc tion of houses along the road would make a most effective
block. Such a place would thereofre be a defile of far
greater importance from the antiaircraft defense point of
view than the bridge, again a stretch of road merely be cause it is narrow and enclosed on either side cannot be con sidered as a defile for the protection of which light anti aircraft guns should be allotted. A troop (3 or 4 guns) can
cover about 500 yards only of road and it is not sound to
squander light antiaircraft defense in this way. Vehicles
moving at open spacing, say 10 or 15 vehicles to the mile a long a road do not present a target worth bombing. If on the
other hand that stretch of road was enclosed on one side by
a canal bank, the breaking of; which wuuld cause it to be
flooded, then it may well be.; considered a defile of major
importance,
3)- T'Jhen the force is deployed, the protection of troops
in the front line, forward aerodromes, formation Headquarters
and vulnerable dumps.
The Divisional light antiaircraft regiment may be called upon
to act in all or several of these roles simultaneously and
to make up for the shortage of guns they must attain a very
high degree of mobility. Training must be dune with this ob ject in view. That is to say every possible source of delay
in the passage of orders, reconnoitering of positions and com ing in and out of action must be cut out. This will only be
done if every man in the unit is imbued with the urge to "get
a move on". Since light .ntiaircraft units are not generally
required in action at night, most moves will take place, in
the dark. Night moves must therefore take a prior place in
all training programmes, . •
M,A, R,44570-London-19 September 1941
l)
Concepts (cont'd)
(re - technical employment)
Brief Note on the Concepts, Evolution of the Close Range An tiaircraft System Comprising the No. 3 Predictor and. the Re motely Controlled Bofors 40 mm Gun,: (By Col, Kerrison)
Practically all previous attempts at .fire control systems
...for ,303." and,5" aut^^'LLgr»\i^pons, single-barrelled or mul ge antiaircraft work, both in
M yg J P ki 8
IV - TACTICS AND TECHMCUE
% A I t <1
...
l)
Concepts (re - technical emprovpent) J(j^riteki)
England and abroad, had been confined to' the use of sights
on the mounting, or to hosepipe fire with tracer ammunition.
An exception was the system aeveloped in U.S.A. which
it is understood has since been abandoned. In England,
after a great deal of experience with various forms of course
and speed targets, and ellipse, or forward area sights, it
was finally decided that hosepipe firing was the most effec tive form of control for automatic weapons of .303" or .5" .
calibre. Hosepipe' control, however, is effective only at
short ranges and demands to the full extent the high rate of
fire of which these equipments are capable,
With the ad6ption of the 40 mm(Bofors) single-barrel equip ment for close range anti-aircraft work, the question had to
be reviewed, as the rate of fire, 120 rounds per minute,.and
the longer ranges, up to 2000 yards, with consequent longer
times of flight, made it likely that hosepipe control^would
be ineffective. Firing trials confirmed this. —<• Firing re sults were not satisfactory, and the rate-of hitting was small
or almost negligible even when an 8 ft. x 40 ft. flag target
was towed at a known speed, on a known course past the guns,
the speed being about 100 miles per hour, and the minimum
range about 800 yards,
.One of the reasons for this failure was the difficulty the
layers found.in laying accurately while the gun was firing.
It was, therefore, suggested that better results might be
•••obtained by using a director, or predictor, just behind the
gun, and laying the gun by follow-the-pointer methods. The
underlying idea was, the predictor being off the mounting,
could be laid steadily and accurately. It was decided, there fore, to press on with the development of such.a predictor,
to discard the Bofors course and speed sights,.and pending
the completion of the'predictor project, to mount forward
- area (ellipse) sights on the mounting. Should the predictor
prove successful, these forward area sights would form an emer • geney method of control.
— - The "first 'model produced incorporated not only automatic
.prediction, but also means putting on arbitrary,deflect
^tjfan or spotting correcti^y^jso ,t
indicating present
as a. predictor, or s i m p l y o r •; . position of target plus mean? ffig*deflections or
•spotting corrections, A Vickers^fe sifeAe^arrel 2-pdr,
equipment was fitted with follow-the^|Mfe]ri
trials using both the above methods
as a sight plus arbitrary corrections," it gave ^ e m M ^ / t ^ c h
f
:<JT|% ^^JpleHNiQUE
ffyyi ®
'Sy "Concepts (re - technical employment) (cont'd)
A
the same as with, sights on the mounting. Used as a pre dictor, about of hits were obtained, this being a marked
improvement • With both methods the very much improved
smoothness of pattern in the sky was most noticeable, fully
justifying the idea of using, predictor control. Having,
achieved this smoothness of pattern, it became possible to
see an effect hitherto obscured b-> the difficulty of di rect laying at the guns. This effect was the very defi nite reaction time of the follow-the-pointers layers to
any correction or change in smooth conditions. This lag
often meant that the control officer, having applied a cor rection and not seeing instant result in the sky, applied
more. By that time the layer had reacted with the result
that there was a tendency to oscillate about the target.
Thus it was abundantly clear that to get the full value
from predictor control, the gun must be remotely controll ed from the predictor, giving instaneous and.accurate reac tion to whatever was happening at the predictor. Accord ingly the project was widened to include a predictor re motely controlling a gun. The Bofors gun was selected for
the experiment, '
Coming now to the underlying principles of the system, it
is necessary to point out there are two distinct lines of
approach to the problem of obtaining direct hits on low-fly ing aircraft. One line of approach is to use amulti-bar relled weapon with a high rate of fire, a pattern, close" or
dispersed, and some form of control consistent with the pat tern area, and then to produce a certain shot density.in the
sky in the region of the target and to rely on a proportion
of the round hitting... * The other line of approach is to treat
the problem as the precision one of aiming each round to hit,
i,e#, treating the rounds as individual events1and not as an
aggregate yielding some average density over an area in.the
sky,- The latter line of approach was adopted, --- The Admir alty Research Laboratory system of remote control used in
the Navy for the remote control of searchlights was fitted
to the gun and give an accuracy of laying of 1 minute of"arc
at speeds -up to 20°/second in azimuth and 16°/s.econd in ele vation, As the ballistic 50$ zone of the gun at 2000 yards
was about 1,6 minutes, .this performance' gave a satisfactory
combination,
Coming to the was noccssary in order to make
full use of the at^^^lRtrolled gun to have some means
of followirig^^u^tel%aKd above all smoothly, targets pas
%
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
l)
Concepts (re - technical employment) (cont'd)
sing at angular velocities up to 20°/second (equivalent to/
a 400 m.p.h. target crossing at a^ground range of 600 yards;,
or 300 m.p.h, at 450 yards).
This portion of the problem was solved by using the system
of aided laying which had been under investigation at Ad miralty Research Laboratory for some time. It is a combi nation of direct laying and velocity controlled laying, the
essential feature being the combination of the two in such
a proportion that the errors in rate determination are ac ceptable while the system is sufficiently'damped by the di rect portion to eliminate any tendency to oscillate about the ,
target's position. Smooth and accurate laying at all speeds
up to 20°/second was possible, and at the same time yielded
automatically a measure 'of the angular velocities of the
target in azimuth and in elevation. The basis was thus laid
for a tachymetric system.
The next point was the necessity for quickness in op eration. The traversing gear was designed so that it could
be disengaged and the predictor slewed by hand, whilst still
leaving the control transmitters in gear so that lining-up
with-the gun was not lost. The predictor can be turned
through 360° in about 2 to 3. seconds..
Once target is picked up the system of laying enables lay ers .to be following steadily in about .2 seconds* The total
time from "Alarm" to' "Ready to Fire" is between 4 and 6 sec onds. In this time the gun has been slewed and clutched in
to control, . During firing trials, the fact emerged that though the gun
Could.fire at 120 rounds per minute, the ,time to first hit,
which is the time measure of the weapons efficiency, was
just as short if single-shot firing about 60 rounds per min ute was employed. At 120 rounds per minute the brain
does not seem to react quickly enough to deal with each sep arate shot, and the feeling that shots are crowding in quick er than one can deal with them tends to produce.flurry and un steadiness . At 60 rounds per minute the brain can deal com fortably with individual shots, and the whole procedure'- Is
one of calm and deliberation rather than rush and bustle.
This point, was brought to the notice* of.the Naval Antiair craft Experimental Staff, and they.^have- /p^U^e carried out
and arrived quite indep^^&iy^iat thi^same con trials . clusion, vviz/ < that tracer fired at mcf^iyMn ^Ipir®
faster than the brain Can cope with.; • For^^H&^.^I&D^
ons such as 0.5" calibre this of course does noWfojAgtJ
the rate of fire should be reduced, but that the proj56#i
of tracer to non-tracer should be such that the tracer a
-111
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
Itl A 5 &
Clg j$Jpjjperah|
-— ^ _
technipal Employment) (cont'd)
at, about 1 rouncl per %<§(&i
M.A.R.44296-London-30 August 1941
The forms of fire that have been tried in the operations
In Libya November 1941 - January 1>42 include single shot,
bursts of automatic fire, continuous auto, and continuous
auto followed by single shot. Single shot appeared to be
more accurate but did not have the same effect of shaking
pilot as auto, and ground troops complained that guns were
"not trying" when single shot was used. Bursts of auto were
discontinued because it was noticeable that whereas the in itial rounds were near the target, the remainder of the bursts
was behind, probably due to the layers' natural reaction to
a burst of fire in the path of the enemy aircraft tending to
stop him laying ahead continuously. In using continuous auto
the heavy expenditure of ammunition and overheating of bar rels are important factors, particularly as there is a .ten-
den cy to fire too.long at receding targets which were often
being fired at wh^n beyond the self-destructinn range of the
shell. The best answer to minimise these disadvantages and,
at the same time, shake the morale of the pilots whilst main taining that of our troops, is a combination -of auto and sin gle shot. It is considered that fire should be opened on ap proaching bombers at 3 >000 yards slant range at auto , and at
single shot from the crossing point onwards, fire ceasing at
1,500 yards slant range,
BES-333-6 May 1942
The Bofors equipment was designed .to deal with low flying
and close targets, hence its sights are constructed and lined
up for a range of 1500 yards and the shell is self-destroy ing at approximately 3500 yards slant range. The normal
teaching is that fire must be held.until the enemy aircraft
reached 1500 yards with Forward Area Sights and 2000 yards
with Predictors, In a forward division area, where.there is
no heavy antiaircraft, Bofors provide the main antiaircraft-
defense and must open fire at longer ranges. Harassing fire
at long ranges on approaching bombers by light antiaircraft
- 112
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
l)
Concepts (re - technical employment
meet with considerable success. In such citfe^rS^pes fire,
should be opened at 3*000 yards on approachin^^^ers, be
they Stukas or any other type. With sights set at .15.00 yds.
deflections will be insufficient. To remedy this'ineffective
long range shooting, one battery is now trained to apply'
extra elevation and add a proportionally increased deflec tion.—
BES-333-6 Hay 1942
Methods of fire control by predictor and forward area sights
should make use of predictors' to engage, targets at opening
range of 2000 yards and forward area sights at.opening
range of 1000 yards. Harassing fire may be opened up to
3000 yards in exceptional c a s e s . — M.A.R.43585-London-ll July 1941
The technique to be adopted must depend on the task
and the particular conditions at the time. In many cases
it will be essential to attack the enemy before he has re leased his bombs in order to prevent as much damage as pos sible. being done to the objective being protected. Consid eration must also* be given to the morale effect on other
troops of not firing on enemy aircraft until after their
attack has been completed,
M.A.R.43&42-London-30 July 1941
The presence of•Heavy .Antiaircraft guns in the forward .Area
and the sight of hostile aircraft being engaged at great
heights (even if not brought down) does more than anything
else to preserve the morale of attacking troops. This as pect has manifested itself igf alj, operations and is therefore
stressed.
^-London-15 July 1941
There is a. high percentage of duds among
ect
LCM'ICSj AM) TECHNIQUE
' M M. I B ^ r t f"i ® • '*mffiBk•
kiJCSnc^pts'Hre - technical^eraplovment) (cont'd)
i ** * § , ••
of the anti-materlei* bUmb as very localized and little ef fect is felt by personnel standing only 30 yards away. The
whistle attached to some bombs is not terrifying; it helps
one to .judge where the bomb is going to fall. Improved
fire aisipline — ( w i t h heavy Antiaircraft guns) is
essential. The general tendency is to open fire at extreme
range with rates unbalanced, and to continue shooting even
though the aircraft is taking avoiding action, v'here suc cess has been attained it has been the result of careful
preparation and accurate balancing of instruments, and of
with-holding fire until the target was well within range,
reliance being placed on an effective first burst. After
the first burst, the avoiding action taken by the aircraft
makes further fire ineffective until a fresh attack is made.
M.A.R.43154-London-3 June 1941
Marshal Barrett commanded the British Air Forces in France,
. He was particularly decided about the effect of small
arms and 2-pdr. antiaircraft fire from the ground, if de livered by determined" soldiers. — In speaking of his own
experience-when he despatched a squadron of 16 light bombers
to attack a German "Panzer" Division, nc said that he lost
11 of the 16 from antiaircraft small arms fire.r— The anti aircraft weapons of the Germans were mounted on every third
or fourth vehicle and dispersed throughout the column in
such a manner that the squadron wa.s under continuous fire
during its attack.:— He is of the opinion that the materiel
damage done by dive bombers is not as great as the psycholog ical effect on soldiers lacking battle experience. He said
he observed many men deserting their weapons and fleeing
from their assigned positions, even when the German bombing
planes came over.and merely filled the air with noises with
their sirens and klaxons. He told me one occasion when
troops guarding one of his air fields with Bren guns on an tiaircraft mounts shot down 8 out of 14 German dive bombers
after his men were convinced that, all they had to do was to
remain at their posts and shoot their weapons.
M.A.R.42254-London-29 January 1941
The story of the antiaircraft defence of TOBRUK is of great
interest and teac^g^jaany lessons, the chief of which is the
import^ne-^ ^of ^ilAin^lback at the dive bomber.
% V ' Vit ^ % M.A.R,48025-London-22 May 1942
U
-114
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
l)
Concepts (re - technical employment) (cont'd)
A mistaken idea that small arms fire is ineffective against aeroplanes should be dispelled. All troops shMld b^r.trained to fire at planes with all weapons which are cajpableWoi^fRing ing fire upon them. Troops should understand that # of small arms fire is seldom noted by the troops on the ' £f & ground. However, the experience of pilots who fly through :Y if small arms fire has indicated that such fire distracts their attention, keeps them at a higher altitude, and does a certain amount of damage to the plane, While a plane may not be brought down, there are certain repairs which must be made when the plane, returns to its base, and even the time consumed in repair ing the damage done justifies the expenditure in ammunition. Furthermore, the morale factor is considerably enhanced if the soldier understands that his small arms weapon is having a definite effect on the plane. M.A,R.45154-London-7 January 1942
The tactical use of light antiaircraft guns such as the 40
mm Bofors falls generally into two general classifications,
use in a fixed position such as we might.call "rear area
defense^' and use with the mobile field forces or "forward
area defense". There can be no clean cut separation of
these.two uses and the same equipment must in most cases be
used under both conditions. However, British experience
both in England and abroad clearly indicate that although
the use of a predictor and power controlled gun will give
best results, some other means of getting into action quick er and without the use of electricity, must be developed,
M,A.R,44280-London-29 August 1941
The predictor in its 3**ton lorry accomplished batteries and
troops but it was considered as worth-while putting into
action only if the troop expected to remain six hours or
more, Bofors were sometimes fired off their wheels; this
has some deterrent effect, ana might well be the best meth od for a troop moving with an armored brigade,
M.A.R,4=>94S-London-22 December 1941
Future developments for the gun batte^/W^ll Include,, con
-
5
&.MD TECHNIQUE '
J f j ® Concept^"'.(rtl'S technical employment) (cor.t1 d)
tinuous preai^ion from gun layer-Mark III data, and the
use of the Molrftj^fuze setter and loader. Irediction er rors from production,guij. Mark III are not known,
but from the perforrr^^e^e&^a prototype the number of
rounds per casualty is <$g|miated at 1,400 for the 3•7" gun
and 700 for the 4.5" gun under certain target conditions
mentioned in above report. With the Moli.is fuze setter and
loader a rate of fire of one round-per gun every 3 seconds
is anticipated. In addition to above developments the ad- =
vent automatic following plus controlled fragmentation will
increase the effectiveness of gun fire against high level
bombing attack,
M.A,R.47251-If>ndon-6 April 1942
Unless air superiority is complete it is e ssential to be in
place for operations by dawn so as to set tip a partial air
defense before discovery by the enemy air forces, If the
force is properly secured, i.e.,' slit trench _s for troops,
dispersion of units, antiaircraft in positS.on, the heaviest
air attack will fail to break the grip of the armoured
brigades on an area, During one day the 7th Armoured Divi sion Headquarters was divs bombed 17 times and machine gun ned from the air 18 times. Trior to these attacks however,
slit trenches had been dug; entirely due to their use there
were NO casualties. Slit trenches are indispensable and
must be dug at every halt. Individual slit Frenches are
about two feet wide, six long and three deep* Except for
a direct, hit, slit trenches, offer complete security from .
light bombs and machine gunning. . Air. sentries are absolute ly essential. Slit trenches without air sentries are worth less. One detachment of six, not posting an »iir sentry lost
four killed and two wounded. There is not time to get into
slit trenches unless a warning is sounded.
BES-117-V.ashington D.C.-gapril 1941
Concepts (cont'd) (re - siting)
£re is never sufficient mobile light antiaircraft. It is
iMj&ujkb to make a plan. List all places, even up to 40
might be considered vulnerable.
Go oyer it again
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
l)
Concepts (re - siting) (cont'd)
placing them in order of priority, then take w t q j
or 16 depending on number of troops available• V^
points are dumps, railheads, refilling points, hea
ters, units, etc. The initial dispositions (are^<
paratively)-— easy. They can be made to fit in march
tables and then to fall out at the designated time/
M.A.R.43877-London-l August 1941
An enterprising hostile air force will soon discover the
limitations of Light Antiaircraft Defen'se."
M.A.R.43 617-London-15 July 1942
No form of defense can remain active onee: it has. been
spotted by enemy air. To prevent antiaircraft defense
being spotted, arcs of fire may have to be sacrificed.
Dummy, alternate and silent positions must be extensively
used. All weapons must be sited inside an Infantry de fensive system or, failing this, some other arrangement made
for their local defense, — - The German counter-battcry
work was mainly in the form of heavy dive bombing attacks.
It is necessary for the British to give antiaircraft pro tection for their Artillery to which in the past they have
given very little thought.
M.iuR,45948-Lontion-22 December 1941
Great stress is being — — paid to camouflage,and conceal ment. — - B o f o r s guns are not easy to pick up if properly
camouflaged but once you open fire the enemy knows where
you are. Therefore it is necessary to haye about three
alternate positions to move to. The movement must be made
at the first opportunity'after firing,
BES-333-6 May 1942
Question: Is concealment of g: of fire? " :
*tance than.field
rjiswerj ' —-(by five Army Commanders, Air4 Great Britain)
- 117
1) Cone eptl
1
'
^
(.eontr d>* >?/]t
. r if F a
1) Good camouflage gives concealment .and field of fire
prior to opening of fire. Once the gun has fired conceal ment is lost; to regain it an alternative position must be
occupied,
2) Yes.
3) Yes. - — In mobile operations concealment by change
of position.
4) No, In mobile operations arc of fire predominates.
If time permits, re-adjut positions to improve conceal ment .
5) Depends on circumstances. YES, if Antiaircraft de fenses are inadequate. NO, if air superiority has been
g ;ined.
M. A . R45737-London-8 December 1941
v;e have previously insisted on a field of fire of 360 de grees of at least 500 yards to nearset cover. Ue should
have conccalcd sites on edge of woods or hedge'with at
least 180 degrees field of fire except the dead area nec essary over the predictor. Bofors can then be sited in
both roles. As now sited (with)-— 360 degrees field
of. fire, the question of the antitank role is out of the
question.
M.A.R.43672-London-18 July 1941
Light antiaircraft guns sited to protect forward troops
should be defiladed from front, concealed from ground and
air observation, and sited within infantry localities.
*»11 guns must obtain some measure of concealment therefore
necessary to sacrifice part of arc. They should be sited
to cover all likely lines of approach. To avoid neutrali sation, guns may have to remain silent until attack aevelops.
Proportion to remain silent must be laid down "in orders. Alter native positions.must be selected ana moves must be coor dinated by troop commanders to ensure that all guns are not
out of action at same time. In cases i.rhcre moves are quick
and frequent it may be necessary to keep predictors.concen trated at battery headquartvrs and shoot with forward area
sights. Light antiaircr ould be sited with antitank
field of fire fox^s^f^^-BxSe waiere this does not inter * % t HI Q
i f 3-1 • -118
IV - TaCTICS m l)
TECHNIQUE
Concepts (re - siting)
fere' with primary role
• * f?
nt'd)
fj GJ
defense.
VI• xv .R.46618-Lorid Jp-16 February 1942
.'1 v v JJ
..
-
^
^
^
/
The primary role of Light Antiaircraft Guns is defar$®j
gainst low-flying aircraft. They must therefore be sited,
so that they can carry out this role. Ideally, this demands
an all round arc of fire, with a clear field of fire down
to one degree of elevation, but considerations of conceal ment must be given full weight when siting guns. Provided
an adequate field of fire, coordinated with that of the other
guns of the layout, is achieved, it is of greater im portance that guns should be concealed than that they should
have a 360 degree arc of fire. The secondary role of light
Antiaircraft guns is defense against tanks, -Where more than
-one position exists from which the primary antiaircraft role,
can be carried out, that position- which is best suited for
antitank defense should be selected. In cases where it is
not possible to carry out antitank role from the antiair craft position, alternative antitank positions should be se lected to which the gun can be moved quickly if required.
M.A,R.47640-London-29 April 1942
- — There is a dead arc of 70° firing- over the Kerrison
predictor. Crete experiences Indicate that cover and con cealment are essential. We can't expect a smaller arc,
therefore.the position coulc be placed near trees, A posi tion should be chosen which is-difficult to see in an ae rial photo, T«»e cannot avoid tracks in going into position
but it is necessary that we break up the trodden grass im mediately thereafter and then enforce strict tract discip line , . when grass is down only will it show white in aerial
• photographs. ' ' -: '' \ 'M• A«R•43986~London-ll August 1941
The dead arc due to the predictor hlsl^een defined by School
of antiaircraft Artillery as follows: - The /gun must not be
J& t-W w
-119- '
' * VfejWJb
fired within 35° in azimuth of a line from the center of
the gun to the center of the predictor except at an ele vation of more than 30° ab ;ve the line gun to predictor
telescopes. When the preaictor is not manned the gun must
not be fired within 10° of any part of the predictor.
M.A.R.48265-London-6 June 1942
It is emphasized that while any detached antiaircraft troop
or section is temporarily under the direct command of the
unit it Is covering, the final select! ns of positions must,
be left to the ; antiaircraft Commander on the spot, after he
has been told the vulnerable point he is to defend, In
certain instances (in Cvrenaice) it was found that
Light Antiaircraft guns had been badly sited under or ders of someone not best qualified to site antiaircraft guns.
It is again emphasized that, except in real emergency Light
Antiaircraft Batteries should not be split below troops of
three guns.
M.A.R.43617-London-15 July 1941
Troop commanders must coordinate the siting of their guns
as a whole (considering) the dead angle of the weapon
(position of predictor), otherwise there may be gaps in the
dfefonse. JX gun once spotted by hostile aircraft yill have to mwve, therefore each gun ^commander must. select an
alternative position within —.-(about) .400 yards, — • . M .a ,R,4327.1-London-i8 June 1941
More than one 'alternate position is .necessary,- Shift every
time the occupied position is bombed. Self-propelled-Bo fors is again-the answer. It.can drive 400 yards quickly
and the (time required would be) short, - — The time
element in moving Bofors at present (is too great,)
M.A.R.43986-Londo n-11 August 1941
—-(It is agreed that several)--- dummy positions — should be constructed (In*th4 vicinity of each antiair rflfCti
' W m f&ving one position, it
IV - TACTICS ,'JJD TECHNIQITE
l)
Concepts (re - siting) (cont'd)
should be left as though occupied, with a dummy gun«and jp
predictor in position. The policy being taught now whe#^
enroute to a new position is not to h,ld up occupation o
the position waiting for a careful reconnaissance, but to
go into a position selected hastily from a map if neces sary. This position to be Worked on like a regular position
as soon as the gun and predictor are ready to fire* Mean while a careful reconnaissance, can be made and the gun
moved* The policy of selecti -n of positions, therefore,
(appears to cJLl for selection of positions allowing)— low angle all round fire and of obtaining protection by
having many alternate and dummy positions. It is believed
by most of the officers on gun sites visited that the
men are better satisfied if they are continually moving
and building new positions,, especially if they have a good
"housekeeping" position near where they can move to when
the weather becomes so severe as to preclude an attack.
It is believed also that the m .re practice is going into
and out of position the better able the gun crew will be
to meet a mobile situation. Speed and exact procedure for
all members of the crews is required and this can only be
acquired by much' practice.
M•A.K.44280-London-29 August 1941
The light antiaircraft guns should never be placed too close
to the vulnerable point being protected as the smoke of
bombs prohibit the sighting of guns. They should be placed
about -800 yards\ — - outside vf the vulnerable point. If.
guns are- defending a point all may be placed on the perimeter,
or all but one oh the perimeter, and one close in to deal with
dive bombers. It is difficult to sight light antiaircraft
guns for both low level bombing and dive bombing. It will
be necessary to shift the guns to meet the tactics of the
enemy low flying planes,
M.^R.43585-Londcn-ll July 1941
I s Within forty eight hours our antfa^b£a£ SfyOf Crete
were out. In defense of our airdrome
around the perimeter of our main airfieldsJ
earthwork protect!.n and good fields of fire but^HD
to the antiaircraft defenses,- The whole German Air
-121
(cont'd)
was available In this attack, ours was not, There is no
parallel to this case, not even in an attempted invasion of
(England) , Our Bofors were blasted to pieces, Had
some of the Bofors been available away from the perimeter
of the airdrome the airdromes would have survived much longer
and would have taken more of the enemy. It is also most
essential that we have alternate positions (about 3) for
each Bofors gun. The only Bofors to survive in Crete had
a large number of alternate positions and when it fired at
one attack it changed its position, in other words it had
alternate positions and made use of them,
M.A.R.43663-London-17 July 1941
There Is a tendency to site light antiaircraft guns too
close to the vulnerable point. The danger from this is
that a low flying attack when the visibility is poor, may
be able to release its bombs before the gun is on target
and ready to fire, ——The Troop Commander must take care
to co-ordinate the predictor dead, arcs and dead arcs which
arise from the need of giving concealment, when siting
light antiaircraft guns for the defense of vital points,
Alternative positions must be reconnoitred at the
very earliest opportunity by the Troop Commander and their
position and the routes to them must be known by sub-sec tions. The move to alternative positions must be-ordered
and co-ordinated by the Troop Commander so that guns are
not all oiit of action at the same time and that gaps are
not left in the defense. Light antiaircraft guns must rely
on concealment and rapid moves to alternative positions for
their self-preservation.
M.A.R,44570-London-19 September 1941
1)
Concepts (cont'd)
(re - antitank role)
For defense against dive bombers or low flying airplanes
the - — operations during the.- evacuation at Dunkirk —
showed the effectiveness and necessity^.large numbers of
automatic weapons, the essential feature m defense against
M M W *
- 122 -
_ .. ...
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE l)
Concepts (re - antitank role) (cont'd)
u.. -v
| I9 v^C.j **
dive bombing and low air attacks is the greatest possible
volume of fire. Four inch and larger guns against air craft of the lowflying class are ineffective. Despite
nundreds of bombing attempts, the disproportionately small
losses in ships and personnel is ascribed to the effective ness of the small multiple-mount-automatic-antiaircraft weapon,
N.A.R.ser.#37-London-12 June 1940
We —-(the conference) consider the BofOrs to be an ex cellent gun which has been designed for ranges of about
800 and 3000 yards. At shorter ranges, the low rate of
fire makes the chance of obtaining a direct hit very low.
It is probable that low flying attacks will be made when
possible from behind cover of hills and woods.
M.A*R.48463-Londan-17 June 1942
(In a) conference with on his return from Java
he told of seeing United States markings on Japanese
airplanes in one instance. Japanese airplanes called in
on bomber frequency and identified themselves as American
airplanes. There were no ground guns available for the
protection of airdromes. He believes the .50 caliber
ground machine gun will eliminate low flying ground straf ing.
AAC No.319.132l/F
The director of Antiaircraft pointed out that the Oer likon 20 mm. gun would not be available for a long time.
The problem of the immediate future was to cover
field and medium artillery regiments on the road. The
infantry should be able to cover themselves with their ex isting ,303 weapons they requirefi^jAgk suggested that some
form of light machine* gun locat^/^n'|l//f^^pr cycle sidecar,
Concepts (re - antitank role) (cont'd)
to move up and down the column, might be a (practical)— solution. The problem was not only one of defiles which
should be protected by Bofors .guns, but of the protection
of-columns against machine-gunning from the air on open
stretches of road. Training, made more difficult by a
shortage of tracer, must be considered. , M.A.R.45840-London-13 December 1941
Both in Greece and Crete the enemy made deliberate attacks
on both heavy and light antiaircraft gun positions.. Middle
East points out the difficulty of protecting heavy antiair craft guns. or put the heavy antiaircraft guns in tanks.
M.A.R.43845-London-30 July 1941
In order to work in really close support of armored-
force vehicles the light antiaircraft would have to be on
the move. Bofors must be stationary to fire. It there fore follows that for a greater part of the time, the Bo fors would be ineffective, and in addition liable to capture
unless escorted. If and when Bofors were fitted into a self-
propelled and armored vehicle then their work with armored •
force vehicle on the move must be reviewed. The light an tiaircraft regiment at present is concerned with (protec tion of advancing columns from attack in defiles and when.
passing through areas suitable for low flying attack) .
M.A.R.435S5-London-ll July 1941
Light antiaircraft should be well forward to help ..consoli date positions. Indian troops held with ease against It alian counter. (in North Africa) attack but when air
attack was put on they had nothing to hit back with. Self-
propelled light antiaircraft with light armor is the answer.
ii.A.R.43986-London-ll August 1941
^'^^acks in the Mediterranean have shown that a
> 6 "
IV - TACTICS "UD TECHNIQUE
l)
Concepts (re - antitank role) (cont'd)
& sr one-man control system is necessary in order to obtain;'the f fi
essential element of great speed in gettin g on the target,'. '
This applies to both long-range and close-range antiaircraft'-1"
guns. The use of an open sight and the control of both
train and elevation of the director or mount by single
operator - — with tracers should be used. Using a clutch '
to engage or disengage the one-man control, the separate
pointer and trainer system would be retained for other forms
of attackj The above recommendation of the British Fleet
for a one-man control system was concurred in by the anti aircraft officer.
N,A.R,Ser.#ONI F-l 42-41-London-14 March 1941
*
"
«
*
Some form of shield for protection against machine gun fire
of gun detaciiments of both heavy and light antiaircraft"
equipments* (especially the latter) would seem very
desirable^ — — The shield might be fitted to the mounting
where the slight extra weight would be more than amply re paid by the moral effect produced. Alternatively, it might
be preferable to have an all round fpenf capable of being
carried in sections and quickly assembled. The height of
the 'pen' should he that of the predictor telescope for com mand posts and gun layer's eyes for gun detachments, It could be quickly dismantled if guns were required to engage
targets below angle' of sight zero* . '
M,AkR,4383B-London-30 July 1941
The British are discussing whether it is worth while devot ing any more effort to the use and development of Rockets . as antiaircraft weapons , There is general agreemerit that all future developments within sight f a v o r the gun rel atively to the Rockets* These include the Introduction of Guh Layer Mk, III; of the Molins fuze setting, leading to a greater rate of fire; percussion fuzes with a consequent large increase in the number of rounds fired per minute is likely to increase by a large factj hance of bringing an aircraft' down in a single enga< ' M,A.J
-125
IV - TACTICS AND^I^KIgllE^
1)
C a r t t A ^ (r^-^rvtltank role) (cont'd)
IflSu^k^ns, antiaircraft weapons, artillery, tanks and mo**
tol^tfticles were captured from time to time throughout the
Syrian operations, and in a majority of the cases were used
by. the Australian forces. Malor — knew of no previous
training in the use of captured weapons being given jto the
Australian Corps. However, he is very convinced that splen did use may be rrfade of captured weapons — : - f He stated that
. there was no —~r difficulty in teaching a machine-gunner, al ready qualified with his own weapon, to handle a captured
weapon. He said that It would be of value .to have avail able elementary handbooks of foreign Weapons in the division
echelon, • :" M;A.R146l54-London-7 January 1942
1)
Concepts (cont'd) (re - weapons)
.
It was the general consensus of opinion (at a conference of
commanders) that the light antiaircraft regimental -commander
could not be held responsible for covering any possible line
of tank approach.. There should be no such commitment. If
a good antiaircraft site is available that will also afford
antitank protection then that site should be selected. The
lessons from Greece, Crete, and the Middle East indicate that
it is necessary that alternate positions (at least
three) be reconnoitered and selected and that once the Bo fors have fired they should be moved to one of the alter nate positions to prevent -annihilation. The alternate pos itions might not be good antitank sites and for that
reason there should be no dual role assigned. The primary
— - role is that of antiaircraft and the light antiaircraft
commander should not be responsible for any antitank de fense. He will of course give any antitank protection he
can from any site occupied which permits the firing of
guns for antitank purposes,
M.At.R.43678-London-18 July 1941
^
The Bofors hav^,.^nsid^rs^e power-.against tanks. There is
a good deal ^"Uork be done oh drill for: Bofc-rs in
an antdJ^ajffi^ x^f-Js- -There* is more to it than switching the
gun £o a tank. Spotters for tanks are neces M.A.R.43986-London-ll August 1941
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE ^
1)
Concepts (re - weapons) (cont'd)
Question: In siting Bofors guns, how much consideration
should be given to their anti-tank capabilities?
Discussion: For different situations there will be differ ent solutions. In Crete it was totally unnecessary to think
of tanks. A heavy tank attack is generally accompanied by
a heavy air attack (both coming) together. It will
be- necessary to decide which is the primary role at that
particular time. The real primary role is antiaircraft. If
we can find a good antiaircraft and antitank site combined
then select that site* Bofors should not be counted on as
an antitank weapon but if the tanks get there, then -—(the
Bofors) become vital for all. In one place in France
we had a tank attack without dive bombers. In that case
Bofors could be used against them. In another village in
France we had a low level bombing attack (without tanks,
but we had) no Bofors. In that case they could have
been used to great advantage against their primary tar get. But light antiaircraft. Bofors cannot undertake both
an antiaircraft and antitank role, We should concentrate
on alternate antiaircraft sites, all combined with antitank
if practicable,
M.*.R,43672-London-18 July 1941.
We can't have an antitank role which would leave antiair craft defense of units or installations open to attack.
However on reconnaissances, keep in mind the selection of
antitank positions. It may be possible that one of the al ternate antiaircraft positions will be good for antitank de fense. A No.18 wireless set is necessary to obtain infor mation as to tank assembling or attacking. We also will
have to make minor adjustments of the sight to fit it for
an antitank role.
M.A.R.4^672-London-l8 July 1941
One of the.conclusions reached ty
of the employment of antiair*
year 1940 was that this type of aM.llI
creasingly against ground targets. Antiaircraft fire is
very accurate at short ranges because of its high muzzle ve locity. Because of the ease of mechanical manipulation and
- 127
m tAcllCS''^JfetPiNIQUE
1\
Joncepts (re - weapons) (contM')
accurate and rapid methods ,of fire control, it is very efr
fective against enemy tanks. With special projectiles, it
is deadly against fortifications. German Commanders .are
using it to an increasing* extent for direct support,
.' . . M.A,R, 18637-Berlin,Germany-l6 September 1941
The C-in-C, Home Forces'alio- stated that those handling
antiaircraft units must not get too antitank minded as.
there was a tendency among some Commanders'to shove the
antiaircraft units too often in a primary role of antitank
when their primary role was antiaircraft.
. M.A.R,48325-London-9 June 1942
(A report from British General Headquarters - Middle
East states:) "Antiaircraft guns should on no account
be considered as dual purpose weapons." My conversation
with antiaircraft officers in the field fails to support
this statement. Believe it is biased by branch conscious ness. Concensus of opinion by those -most experienced is
that all antiaircraft guns should be able to engage tanks
.and that all antitank weapons should be able to engage air craft, In this opinion I strongly concur.
M. iuR•2359-Cairo,Egypt-2 *pril 1942
Through personal observation in the field (in the Mid dle East) . I wish to emphasize the extreme importance
of organic antiaircraft units within the Armored and Inf antry Divisions. Dual purpose antitank antiaircraft weap ons should be developed, x N;,,R,2368-Cairo,Egypt-4April 1942
Two new German antiaircraft guns are — — t h e ' 4 barrelled
2 cm gun and the 5 cm antiaircraft- gun. Both these guns
as well as all German antiaircraft guns are fitted for en gaging land targets .^.lle^^i^^ly aiii convinced Germans are
- 128..- ; .
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUES I j| | FL 1
l)
1 u: £ f| ^ Concepts (re - weapolfeqlx 1[cctafc1 &) & « w
£ • 1 |
** • *
entirely sound *in developing dual purpose gun -—(although
some British officers)-— claim the German has ruined good
antiaircraft guns by making them dual purpose'* With the
industrial genius peculiar to America there can be no rea son why all* our antiaircraft guns are not fitted to•engage
tanks.
M,A,R*25£9-Cairo,Egypt-l6 May 1942
Nearly all German Antiaircraft Guns are capable of both
Antiaircraft and Antitank roles. i7e can never hope to have
either enough Antiaircraft Guns or enough Antitank Guns.
Brigadier Revell-Smith states that all the guns'we can get
should be capable of both roles when employed .with the Field
Army and that if this is agreed we must be prepared to ac cept some lesser degree of instrumental perfection until
such time as these instruments are less bulky and are built
to withstand ttte rigours of climate, travel and movement.
M.A.R.4356l-London-ll July 1941
An antitank unit shooting down roads will not live. A de filaded site must be selected. An antitank gun with flash-
less ammunition and a good trained crew, will give a good
account of itself. The C-in-C, Home Forces directed in
future exercises that umpires report any unit which takes
up a non-defiladed site.
M. A • R •48325-London-9 June 1942
2)
Operational Practices (A.D.G.B.)
Every Gun Defended Area in the Air Defenses of Great Brit ain has ah Antiaircraft Defense Commander who is respon sible'for the control and direction of the ground defenses
when his gun defended area is attacked from the air. In
the gun defended ai-ea there is a Gun Operations Room that
acts as a centre for collecting p n r L T i A r t f
Against seen targets direct control!''jjrf^fpic
commander is not exercised, each aile
to fight its own battle, With sS^i^lr^t^fhe mairTfunc
- 129
IV - TACTICS *ND TECHNIQUE
i €% I f f
^ A a t s L r C x ^ltic4s|(4fl|G#BO
(cont'd)
U r 'l^^jfela^ (jyF\>pirationSr 'Rooms are to give early warning and
to act as an information centre for the help of gun sites®
Early warning 'of approaching enemy aircraft is sent to the
gun sites from gun operations rooms* With seen targets the
gun layer is used at the heavy antiaircraft gun. The
target is seen by personnel on the gun site through the
Identification Telescope. Thp predictor and height-finder
are put on to target, the aircraft identified, the height
taken and set into the predictor and fire is opened when
the predictor is steady and the target within range. It
takes about 45 seconds from 'target seen' to the time the
guns fire the first round*. The Predictor transmits contin uously future bearing, future quadrant elevation and fuze
to the guns. Two of the layers on the guns match bearing
and quadrant elevation pointers, and the third follows the
fuze transmitted —-(and makes necessary allowances for
dead time,)-—. With seen targets fire control is quite
straightforward, all sites being equipped with a predictor
and using it to control the fire of the guns.
With unseen targets the,data is obtained from gun layer
I or II and wherever possible it is fed into the predictor.
The gun layer data, however, is not quite good enough to
allow normal operation at the Fredictor; there are two
types of gun layer and errors in rates of change of the
present position. It has been found that when the error
in the present position is at a minimum the error in rates
is at a maximum and vice versa. It has been found impos sible to smooth out these rate errors that are of a sin usoidal character, within a period (less than) about
20 seconds* In august.'40 the gun layer I had just made its
appearance on a few gun sites, its primary object being to
put the Predictor on target for visual shooting before the
target could be seen with the naked eye. In September '40
it was used to control -unseen fire, but with no means of
obtaining height. The elevation Finding attachment was
then devised that enabled spot readings of Angle of site
( A / s ) to be taken and these combined with spot readings of
slant.range gave heights to within about 600 - 1000 ft* A
height computer gear was fitted to predictors so that con tinuous slant range was fed into.one side, height curves
were followed with a pointer and continuous angle of sight
was generated the other side* This was the method used to
control fire wj^hpgtflLLayer I data. However, the inaccur acies^f^i^lTaXe^cfe'lp. soon showed that it was not pos
- 130
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQ
2)
iism m #
# f* A #
f Operational Practices (A.D.G.B,; (T&nt d) * '
sibleto balance either the Vickers or Sperry Freaictors
with such data and other methods:of controlling fire were
devised. The limitations of the gun layer at that time
(e.g. bearings only up to about 4.0° angle of sight) add ed further support to. the. policy'of ceasing to use gun
layer data for the direct control of the predictor. Plot ting methods were introduced, and the following method was
developed. Only a very small proportion of the gun sites
were equipped with gun layer and the sites in.every gun
defended area were grouped into groups of 4 to 8 sites,
each group being allotted a Master Site that had a gun
This site plotted the ground cijurse of a target
v layer. at 10 second intervals.for a period of 50 seconds, meaned
the course, measured the -distance covered during that
period, extrapolated the meaned course, predicted a point
on the extrapolated course and predicted the time that the
target should arrive at the point'. The point, height of
the target and time were telephoned to the. other sites in
the group who fired at the time appropriate to the time
of flight from their positions. This method was known as
Predicted Map Square Concentrations or Fredicted Concen trations, The overall time taken was of the order of 2
minutes during which the target must fly straight, at a.
constant height and speed. The method was obviously
..crude and a temporary expedient, A semi-automatic Plot ter' has since been devised that works on the same prin ciple but'gives very much better results, the plan posi tion of the target being shown by a continuously*moving
spot of light on a sheet of ground glass. The target is
plotted for 50 seconds and the speed measured: a prediction
is made that the target will cut an arc of a certain ground
range from the site,, all points on this arc requiring the
same ballistic data, except bearing. All that remains is to
give the bearing at the last possible moment, which.can be
by observing the spot of light, and the time'to.' order
fire, which is got from the speed of the.target and the
time of flight of the shell. This method is applicable to
the single, site only, but.Is has a few great advantages over
other.methods, predictor control included, The range and
height are only limited by. the g^ fuze targets,
flying erratic courses can be er if^iot with
..great, accuracy and a picture of
iour of.the target is displayed fojf
cer - a 'picture that he cannot get from the'
Whilst these plotting methods were being devised^
veloped, the gun layer I equipment was being improved, mat^
•'-131
2)
Operational Practices (AfD,G,B.) (cont'd)
.:
had been devised and.put up and gun layer II had begun to
make its appearance'. This led to feverish investigations
into how to make the gun layer I and II control predictors
»; >
with reasonable accuracy. ./,,...• . : The solution for the Sperry Predictor was found some
time before that of the Vickers. The Sperry Fredictor de termines the cartesian co-ordinates of the target, meas ures the rate of change of these co-ordinates ar^d calcu lates the future position by mechanically balancing the
equations involved. It is a highly sensitive instrument
and any variations in the rates unbalance it immediately;
and with gun layer data it was practically never balanced*
This difficulty was overcome by cutting the mechanism so
that the' predictor did not measure the rates, plotting sep arately on a semi-automatic plotter for rates and setting
them into the predictor. . Constant rates were thus given to
the predictor that followed the present position as given
by gun layer and the future position was only in error by
the amount of error in the present position (provided the
rates set in were accurate). To get sufficiently accurate
rates the course of a target must be plotted for 50 sec onds, they must be measured, set into the predictor and the
procedure thereafter is the same as for visual shooting.
The overall time required for th^s is of the order of two
minutes from the start of plotting to the first round, dur ing which the target must fly a constant height^ course
and speed, .To enable this method to be applied a special
clutch (X tsclutch) has to be made and fitted to the pre dictor.
The Vickers predictor proved a harder nut to crack as it
measures the movements of the target by the angular rates
method and the rates generated by the gun layer are sub ject to errors that prodijce gross errors in the predicted
position, The method adopted is to instruct the later al rate setter (whose normal duty is to balance the later al deflection set divided,by the time of flight balances
the rate of change of bearing generated by the bearing
layer) to ignore fluctuations in rate .generated by the
bearing layer and never to decrease the lateral deflection
before crossing point and never to-increase the lateral de-
flection/after. crossi^a-coint.. This drill requires consid erable i n t e L l i j g U n d e r s t a n d i n g of the tendencies of
defleiti^l^ph^b^ig the. lateral rate setter, but .has
, I iml^Jli
- 132
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
2)
Operational Practices (A.D.G,
been found to be quite practicable in the field. The pro-'"**
cedure is known as smoothing of the lateral deflections
and in laboratory tests it has proved unexpectedly success ful, quite often the error in the predicted position be ing less than the error in the present position. •
It is now laid down in air defenses of Great Britain that
whenever possible predictor control using gun layer data
will be used for the control of guns against unseen targets.
Where this is not possible semi-automatic plotter control
will be used (if an semi-automatic plotter is not available
manual plotting- control): if neither of these methods is
possible, due to overcrowding of the gun layer time base
or to other reasons, concentrations directed centrally
from gun operations room will be fired, the data being ob tained from whatever source is. available.-(a particular gun
layer might be working satisfactorily, a ground control in terception R.D*F. equipment might be available to give
rough data, or Observer Corps plot might be the only source
from which information is available), Predictor Control
has only become a reasonable proposition during the last
three months or so, Until November 19, 1941 it was not
possible to obtain accurate bearings with gun laj^er I or
II at over 45^ angle of sight which greatly restricted the
sone of engagement with predictor control• Modifications
to both the sets now enable oearings to be got up to 60°
angle of sight increasing the sone of engagement by an a raouni the order of 30/ O . a.A.C.#319.13/AUC-33
The responsibility for engaging any seen target rests upon
the Gun Position Officer in charge of the gun site. He
is responsible for opening fire, and for the number of
rounds fired. The following rules have therefore been laid
down to enable him. to accept this responsibility. Any air craft clearly recognized by appearance or actions to be hos tile is to be engaged, and certain listed acts are consid-'
ered to be hostile. The method of engaging a seen target
is left to the discretion of the-j^rk Position Officer, to
engage by the most suitable of tffeji^ar^f^^hode force.
There are no restrictions upon tJjj^umb^r if jr^uSSs:fwfr3?c')3»^ ,
Gun Position Officer may fire at^f mS^Jt^gftl ]
that "Mass" fi.re against a seen target is reitTiJt^'^jU
rounds per gun, but "Mass" fire may be repeated should c i i "
133 ^
•
I--.
Tg,
IV - TACTION, M D '^.CMintfe
T<
*
Practices (A.D.0,3.) (cont'd)
istarices warrant it, Should there be.a choice of seen
targets a gun position officer-opens fire at those targets with in his priority zone. — Flares - — ( a r e ) - — engaged by 3.7"
and 3" guns, provided the angle of sight is not less than
10 degrees. Parachute mines will be engaged by all types
of heavy Antiaircraft guns, by antiaircraft Lewis guns,
and by rifles, down to a height of 350 feet, provided the
angle of sight is not less than 10 degrees. Fire Is dis continued against any aircraft attacked by British, fighters,
as soon as the latter are seen to be closing to attack. In
deciding the moment to cease f i r e , — - the - — time of
flight must be remembered. - — Fire (is not o p e n e d ) —
upon any unseen target unless gun operations room has' pre viously given permission to do so.
M.A.R,43640-London-15 July 1941
With heavy antiaircraft guns five methods of engagement
of unseen targets are used by the British - — :
1) Continuous following of gun layer data using Vickers
Predictor
2) Continuous following of gun layer data using Sperry
Predictor
3) Plotting Control - Back Timing.using Semi-Automatic
Plotter ...
4) Plotting Control - Forward Timing using Manual plot ter - —
5) Zone Concentrations, (Barrages)
The methods of engagement normally employed by heavy anti aircraft guns are those detailed in paragraph 1 — — above.
Normally Zone Concentrations are only fired in cases
when individual control has broken down. They are normally
controlled from a gun operation room and are directed at a
poi,nt in space. This method allows of a simplified drill
being used and is considered to be more effective than
would be the case if an attempt were made to spread bursts
over a.volumejpf space, '
M.A,3*47006-London-10 March 1942
*V >
The . fo^lQwir^Sfethod of Fire Control are authorized in Air
Defettjfe'-a£ £reat Britain for the engagement of unseen targets
^ "^antiaircraft.. guns:
- 134
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 2)
M, ® AI
Operational Practices (A.D,Gt.B.(contfc
(1)
Fredictor Control:
a) Predictor Antiaircraft b) Predictor Antiaircraft c) Predictor Antiaircraft ed ) with GL/EF.
d) Fredictor Antiaircraft
No. 1 (modified) with GL/EF.
No. 1 (modified; with GL II.
No. 2 (modified and amputat No. 2 (modified and amputat
ed ) with GL II.
(2) Hotting Control:
a) EF of b)' c) EF or
Back Timing, using Semi-Automatic Flotter with GL/
GL II.
Slant range timing
Forward Timing, using Manual Plotting Board with GL/
GL II.
(3) .Concentrations:
a; Zone B
b) Anti-Minelaying Barrages
c) Prepared, Geographical Barrages, as authorized in M.
A.A.D. Vol. 1 Part I Pamphlet No. 10, Appendix E for use
against seen, targets-,
(4)
Special Procedures:
a) Predictor Control: Predictor. Antiaircraft No* 2
(modified), with GL II,
at the discretion of Brigade Com manders where Vickers Predictors are not available, pending
the of amputation b)fitting Flotting Control: clutches.
1. Vertical Screen, in areas as already authorized by
Antiaircraft Command.
, 2 . Spider, in. 6 iuitiaircraft Division area,
.c); Concentrations: Block Control, in 3 Antiaircraft
Corps .area. • . :
whenever, possible Predictor Control Ibul^with GL/EF
•amputated Sperry Predictors will bg^mp^Jed^in/preference $
to Vickers Fredictors. Hotting C W & P o d U M f a ^ I g v ^ en-^
gagement of targets that do not come within rangi w
tors, ana where .gun layer data is only available-from another
site. Zone Concentrations are fired only when local Predic
- 135
•
v
v. i
JTip Mp' ^aKraQUE •
P I ? ® f fe^f'i1^*
'4 Operational Fractices (A.D:G;B;) (cont'd)
tor or Plotting Control cannot be employed. When Zone Con centrations are employed they supersede local control
and every available gun is br6ught to bear, except any guhs
engaged in firing by Predictor Control.
Incl.-M.A.R.47006-London-January 1942-131/APE
Plotting control is a poor second to Predictor Control, 70%
of the Heavy Antiaircraft sites in Air Defenses of Great Brit ain are now equipped for Fredictor Control, This will
shortly be increased to 85%* It is essential that gun sites
should so far as possible be left to fight their own inde pendent batvies without interference from Gun Operations
Room or the distraction of being called on for plots or in formation while they are in action, With this in view the
Antiaircraft Command has legislated for control of the 15%
of Heavy Antiaircraft sites that cannot take Gun Layer I
or Gun Layer II by (the use of searchlight control (R.
D.F. equipment)) where that is practicable, and other wise by Semi-Automatic Plotting Control exercised from
a distant plotting room sited alongside a Gun Layer sta tion that will normally be at another gun site. Organiza tions will take necessary action'for independent control of*
all Heavy Antiaircraft sites by these methods. If jam ming of Gun Layer Equipments takes place it must be ex pected that it will be carried out with Teutonic thorough ness, and that all gun layer stations over a wide area will
be rendered inoperative. Should that take place resort
must be had to zone concentrations directed from Gun Opera tions Room or sub-gun operatluns rooms. It is not to be
expected that Gun Layer plbts will often be available for
fire control in these circumstances, ahd the data avail able for fire control in these circum'stances, and the data
available will generally be inadequate, and may often'be
no more than Observer Corps plots and the location of fires.
It is therefore essential that Wherever possible gun opera tion rooms should receive direct information from Observer
Corps. Centers and from the. Local Fire Service.
M.A.R.47067-London-24 March 1942
$)ly a variation of ground locators
•„ V .
v. , >, V «
X a W'J*
- 136
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE ^
2)
ti
*
a
Operational Practices (A.D.G.B.) (cont'S)
m
«
# if K
(R.D.F.) Central Control-. The principle and most
important difference is that.instead of endeavouring to
engage the enemy in any 1,000.metre map square, determin ed by estimating his future course, attempt is made to
engage him in a pre-determined 1,000 metre map square over
which reasonable gun density is certain* For this pur pose, belts or BLOCKS of 1,000 metre squares are arranged
around and through the Gun Defended Area, and when the en emy is plotted as flying towards one of these sectors fire
will be brought to bear on that sector by all guns detailed
to it. .
M.A.R«43646-Londori-l6 July 1941
Method of determining tine at which to fire when using man ual plotting —
(1) Back Timing. - This method is used where the .position
of the target is obtained continuously, as in the semi-auto matic plotter. The distance travelled by the target during
the time of flight (plus an allowance for firing delay) is
obtained proportionally from the time base.
(2) Slant Range Timing.- This "method is also designed
to. minimize errors in the time base. It can be used with
manual plotting but is more complicated to apply than the
back-timing method. The present position is found in the
same way as for back-timing. The slant range to the pres ent position is then calculated from the ground range and
height... The order "Fire" is ^iven when this ra.nge' appears
on the range receiver dial.
(3) Forward Timing - This is the simplest method used
with manual plotting, u stop-watch is started on the time
signal for the last plot -of the time base, as notified by
the Tactical Commanding Officer, who reports "-Zero Coming", The Tactical Commanding Officer must decide what forward
time is necessary having regard to the drill time and the
probable time of flight, e.g.,60 seconds. The time of
flight plus allowance for firing delay, e.g. 20 seconds is
deducted from this time, and the order "Fire" is given,
when the difference in time, in this seconds, is
shown on the stopwatch. ..fter the fi&M&Aiftkjtes l>een
fired, the Tactical Commanding Office^^frlpart Jt<eg* ^
Coming" before any 10 second time signal?. ¥ fjgfi pi
that the order "Fire" is passed by as few persoJfaf .'5 sible. The Tactical Commanding Officer's Assistant W J ?
- 137
IV - ThCTICS,INDTECHNIQUE
2)
V
Operational Practices (.i.D.G.B.) (cont'd)
holds the'stop-watch and orders "Fire" direct to the guns,
||if l&dmmuhicg^tions are available.
1 W i U y Q * " 'W
M • ^,47006-LondOn-January 1942
• . '
•
*
•
-'
*
••
•
In his major night attacks on towns in the Midlands and •••
South of England in 1^41 the tactics employed by the enemy
havp been first, to drop flares to ring the targets, sec ondly, to follow the flares with a considerable number of
incendiary bombs .which start fir.es. in the target area, and
then to bomb the area, defined by the fires with hi^h explo sive bombs. The intention in instituting what is sometimes
known as the "BLITZ BARRAGE" is to endeavor to place
A
a barrage belt around the area! marked by the fires. . major conflagration caused by incendiary bombs, in any part
of the Gun Zone is reported immediately to the Gun Operations
Room • By using cross bearings, the iintiaircraft Defense
Commander locates the area.affected and plots.it or'some
part of it, as a 1,000 meters square. Having determined
the KEI SQUARE, he broadcasts the coordinates of it, Control
Officers (by use of) griddea traces (and) grid- ded boards (together with other certain devices, auto matically obtain what are called) BLITZ BARRAGE SECTORS.
The warning that (the Blitz Bar; age)--r- may be em ployed -—(is) broadcast • The order - — ( i s ) — — re peated and a period of not less than three minutes (is)—* allowed to elapse in order to give Control Officers time .; to place, the templates on their griddea boards and to num ber off the squares which form the barrage sectors. .Method of fire (is)—• by order from — ( t h e gun operations room) without a time count. khen fire is ordered, •A two rounds per gun.—-(are) fired as quickly as possible. All gUns within fuze range of the sector ordered par* ti«ipate,fuze range being determined from the graphic range tables. • , 'a a' ••• ' • ' M.A.R»43650-London-l6 July 1941
•, .
The resul^%foc . f m o n t h s for night fire are:-:
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 2)
1 1 11ffS I
Ipf I
Operational Practices (Aw.§.B.) (cont'd) <
"Birds" •-
Month
8 6i 17i 11 16
September October November December January Total
~~59
Rounds per bird 19,200 16,700 7,270 16,900 4,090 10,800
--— The fire control methods that gave these results were
a mixture of map square and predictor firing.
Incl##l-M.^.L.44864-10 October 1941
(Despite many failures) the faith in concentrations
of fire was not diminished, and a further important argu ment in their favor was put forward, that a large number
of shell bursting at the. same time round the target would
be a far greater deterrent than the same number -of bursts
spread over a period of time. During the last few months,
however, much has been learned about the merits and demer its of the present methods of fire control against unseen
targets, about the chances of destroying aircraft, and about
the avoiding action taken by the enemy. It has betln found
that only a small fraction of enemy aircraft jink when fired
at. It has been calculated that even if in the future most
enemy aircraft jink after the first salve the errors with
predicted concentrations are such that the chance of hit ting with one salvo from a 4-gun site using predictor con trol is as great as with 24 guns firing a Zone concen * With the improvement in equipment now avail tration. able and chances of hitting it is (clear)-—
that wherever possible predictor control would be employed,
that satellites should do their own plotting and prediction,
and that the only circumstances in which concentrations of
fire from sites "are justified is -when gun layers break down
owing to overcrowding of the Cathode Ray tubes.
M.A.R•47006-London-18 March 1942
There^ are* two main methods of fire cont
aircraft equipment:
- 139
Practices (A,D.G,B.) (cont'd)
Predictor Control. ,
2) Forward Area Sight (F.n.S,) Control. The Fredictor used, the No, 3 (or Kerrison) Predictor, pro duces extremely accurate results up to about 3 seconds time of flight. This predictor is intended to provide a means of laying so that rounds can be guided precisely on the tar get by altering the lay. It therefore depends for success on observing single rounds and correcting on the observations made. The predictor provides the future quadrant elevation and bearing in terms of the range set (an approximation is used that time, of flight is. directly proportional to range). No. 1 of the predictor detachment estimates what range the target will be at* in, say, 5 seconds time and sets this range into the predictor. 'Fire is opened immediately and the target flies into the line of fire. If the range set is too small the rounds will be observed to cross the tar get's path astern of the target; if the range set is too great the rounds will be observed to cross the target's path ahead of the target and will be obscured by the target. Corrections to the range set into the predictor are made accordingly, so that an engagement is a series of static predictions based on the movement of the target and a series of estimated future ranges. Continuous corrections to lay for line and elevation are made by the layers on the pre dictor and aided laying is provided to give greater accuracy in laying. The guns are power controlled from the predic tor and thus all human errors in laying at the gun are el iminated. This method of control is by far the most ac curate method of control of light antiaircraft guns and is the primary method in Air Defenses of Great Britain, but its use is limited by the fact that the approximations in the equations only hold true for short times of flighty, that correction of aim by observation of tracer.is not practicable except for times of flight of 3 seconds or'less, and that a supply or power is required that is normally sup plied by a generator.that is not.always ready started up in time :or the engagement of snap targets. The secondary method of control Forward Area Sight Control. This meth od is direct the target by layers on the gun, the def 1 ectior^^elja'gje'it.^ma ted. by another member of the detach ment ^^orders*'3|itfii'*'to the lAy£rs. The deflections are ieli^GScQTcling to the course and speed of the target
1
v;
."ons made from observations of the tracer, With
^\rea Sight Control automatic fire is normal* •(
is.to be supplemented and improved b- the use of the.
- 140
fV-TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
Operational Pracfci) Stiffkey Stick de;
/.BiG.B.) \(ctant!<
iftjL** A %y ed elsewhere.;
«* A.A.C.#319.13/AUC-33'
The object of Rocket Projectors is to place a large
number of bursts in the sky as simultaneously as possible.
With direct predicted fire it is not often possible to fire
more than one salvo from one Battery at a target. The
equipment, however, is very suitable for firing barrages
and concentrations for deterrent effect, as considerable
fire can be obtained with comparatively few personnel (each
single projector requires a detachment of 2 men compared
with 10 for a heavy antiaircraft gun). The method of fire
control is to plot the course of a.target for 50 seconds,
measure the speed, select a point of engagement and fire
at the time appropriate to the time of flight. This takes
a matter of 70 - 100 seconds during which the target must
fly at a constant height, course and speed. At present
about 15 out of the 53 batteries deployed are equipped with
gun layer to obtain data for plotting and firing, the remain ing 35 receiving data from a gun layer on an adjacent heavy
antiaircraft site. Eventually all Z Antiaircraft (Rock et) sites will have their own gun layers. When concen trations are fired they are directed centrally from gun '
operations rooms from the best information available.——
A. A. C. #319 •13/AUC-33
Z ("Zed") Antiaircraft Batteries (Rocket Batteries)
engage high level targets by Plotting Control, and targets
diving at the Battery position by Visual Control. When a Z
Antiaircraft Battery is not equipped with a Semi-Automatic
Plotter,, control is by manual plotting from gun laying R.D.F.
data. When a Z Antiaircraft Battery has a Semi-Automatic
Plotter, the Plotter is fed with gun laying data from the Z
Antiaircraft Battery Gun Layer or from a Gun Layer at a heavy
antiaircraft site. In the latter case the Z Antiaircraft Plot
ting Room is at the heavy antiaircraft site. Drills for
Z Antiaircraft Battery Control with a Semi-Automatic Plotter
will be issued as Appendix. B to this Instruction, and the '
necessary equipment will be issued in due course. Until
this equipment is available Z A n t i a i r c ^ ^ l ^ ^ l i e ^ w ^ h ^ |
-la-
'uli^Uiiw
IV - TACTICS AND
A P l f e
1f?t I
t>.Q..Bj (cont'd)
Plotters may „use any systems of Semi-Auto matic Plotting Control .that they have devised,
M.A.R.47006-London-January 1942
hll light antiaircraft layouts are for multiples of
one, two, or more, complete troops (of three guns or
four guns each depending on the -table or organization in
effect) . All emplacements for light antiaircraft equip ments — - arc constructed to enable guns- to shoot down to
zero degrees. In cases Where ,guns are sited on eminen ces it — — is'necessary for them to be able to shoot at
angles of depression in order to engage aircraft flying low
over the Vulnerable Point. The inner - — side of the angle,
subtended by. the dead arc (of the gun) will norr
mally be tangential to the perimeter of the vulnerable area
thus allowing guns to fire directly over the vulnerable area
or point, ALTERNATIVE POSITIONS are selected — . I/here
main positions have been constructed more or less along the
perimeter.—-(of the vulnerable area)-—• use is made of
alternative positions to get depth, - — Light Antiaircraft
dummy positions are constructed at all vulnerable points,
as materiel and labor permit, though airdromes have first
priority. These dummy positions are made realistic enough
to deceive both visual and photographic reconnaissance.
They — • are sited in consultation with Local Defense Com manders in order to avoid attracting bombing on to Infantry
defense pcffta.
M,.i.R*44496-Londori-15 September 1941
The principles upon which .British Light ;urtiaircraft layouts
are. based are laid down in — - "Manual Antiaircraft Defense"
In order to prevent the neutralization of •..all the defenses
by preliminary bombing, the principle of,-defense; in depth .
is as important in the defense of an airdrome or other vul nerable. point* as .in anything else, Therefore guns will NOT
be sited merely alpng the perimeter of the airdrome or ot her vulnerable poi ^area where the number of guns, per mit, and partial1i are reinforcing guns are deployed,,
c.raft guns will be sited out to
irus from' the perimeter.
M.A.R,44496-Lonaon-l$ September 1941
V A u
- 142
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE ^
2)
Operational Practices (A.D^G.B*) .(cont*d)
In my visits to various•antiaircraft heavy. gun sitesrin
Great Britain I fpund that .they are .all of — f a substantial ly) - — u n i f o r m - c j Emplacement
has been superseded by — J ' h ^ ' f u r ^ ,are spaced
about 150 feet apart. — A t t a c h e d .'to this repcSr are draw ings of Static Heavy Antiaircraft Gun Emplacement 3 •7"/
4.5" — . • .
M. A .R •44887-London-ll October 1941
Light antiaircraft guns are used in the air defenses of
Great Britain to protect specified small vital points
against low flying attacks. Two forms of low flying at tacks are encountered, i.e. low level flying attacks and
dive bombing attacks, - The principles upon which-light an- *•
tiaircraft guns are sited are:
(1) All round defense against both level and dive attacks,
(2) Maximum field of view, .
(3) Maximum volume of fire to be brought to bear on the
target before it releases its bombs,
(4) Engagement of all targets* which,, either simultaneous ly or in succession, approach the defended area, - (5) Provision of early warning.;
(6) Element of surprise should be present-and sites moved
periodically, ••=-,-. The gun density is obv-rously, the maximum available.
A-. A .C. ^319.13/^iyC-33.-London-February 1942
The principles upon which Heavy antiaircraft layouts are
based- are- laid down in the Manual ..intiaircraft Defense —
The speed and height of enemy aircraft are taken as
300 m.p.h, and 20,000 feet respectively. Four-gun sites
are normal in all gun defended areas, including
aerodromes, The policy is that all gun positions will •
eventually be equipped with gun layer and therefore all posi tions should either be -suitable for gun layer or such that
a gun layer can be sited within 500 yards. Owing to the
"effect of blast, — - in static defenses huts are —
mally not sited nearer than i^nsf91 maximum distance is - — • 40(|j j ^ d ^ * -4- il|L iW&vimisS
•sited that they can engage ^ e l ^ ^ i & e l fi^jMiilic:
- 143
TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
v. Operational Practices (A.D.Q.B.) (cont'd)
.
|.At airdromes•all guns must be So sited that they can en-
preferably by direct,- otherwise by indirect fire,
enfemy ..aircraft which may land on the aerodrome or other
levoi;,yg,round within range, For each mobile Heavy idi tiaiixafaft site, several alternative positions are select ed* In^the use of these alternative positions, CONCEAL MENT ,'- @Ven at the sacrifice of some all-round field of
fire - is ' (considered)—T the basis of success. No pro tective worft^is^—^done on these positions; platforms
are selected Ind then some natural cover and minimum provi sion for accesshare all that are required, A11 arrangements
(are)-— made'for-occupying these ...positions, which • —
are occupied from time to time at the discretion of Anti aircraft Defense Commanders* T&/.CK DISCIPLINE is of the ut most importance to guard against giving away alternative
positions. All vacant'—- as distinguished from alter native heavy antiaircraft sites are maintained as dum my positions. Where materials and labor permit, further
dummy positions are built#. Local defense commanders
are alwa s to be. consulted with'regard to the,siting of
these dummy positions so that they do not attract bombing
on t.o Infantry Defense Posts. The best dummy positions of
all will —r- are the main gun sites with dummy guns install ed, after alternative positions have been occupied, •— MAIN POSITIONS must rely on protection as opposed to
concealment. Therefore protection is made —r(as nearly)
100$ effective (as. possible)—-. All. walls, whether
concrete or sandbagged, are earthed up,
M.A.R.44496-London-15 September 1941
where circumstances permit, manning and standing down
is ordered in four stages as indicated below:
; Executive Order , Circumstances . Acti.on •"Stand by"
This is in the nature of a Gun. Position Of-
Warning order at. the dis- fi.cers telephon . creation of . the. A.A.D.C.- ists ' and lookouts
. but would normally be t-o be especially
given-when Enemy aircraft, alert. Gun Layer
are within 75 miles of Stations and Com the•Defended.Area or Vit- mand Posts to be
al Point. fully manned. No.3
Predictors to be
started.
-144
IV - TACTICS >IND TECHNIQUE
2)
Operational Practices (A.D.G.B.) (cont!
Executive Order
Circumstances
Action
"Take Posts"
At.the discretion of A.Ai Gun& to be fully
D.C., but would normally v man
be given when Enemy air craft are within 55 miles
of the Defended Area or
Vi.tal Point.
"Stand Easy"
No immediate action antie- All numbers will
pated* . remain ready in
gun and Command
Post shelters.
"Stand Down"
No Enemy aircraft reported All Detachments
within 75 miles of the De- break off, leav fended Area or Vital Point.ing normal look-
o its and tele phonists,
: M.A,R.44523-London-l6 September 1941
The layout of the heavy antiaircraft defenses of a partic ular area in the Air Defens'es of Great Britain are based
on the following principles:
(1) Heavy guns form the framework of the defense*
(2) A11 round defense must be provided wherever possible.
(3) Before aircraft reach the line" of bomb release they
must be subjected to the maximum volume of fire, (The line
of bomb release, depends, of course, On the target height,
speed and direction of approach),
(4) Defenses should be sited in depth wherever sufficient
equipment is available^
taneously or in
(5) 'ill targets, whether approaching succession, must be capable of being er^
at the ex (6) Vital, points are given maximum pi a whole,
pense of lesser gun densities over the ar^ d Areas
The layouts of nearly all the larger Gun speed 300
are now based on target height 20,000 feetSj miles per hour,
uary 1942
A.a•C.J!19•13/AUC-33-Lond2 The drawings of the Layout" for AntiaircralJ^efejise of
-145
IV
TiXTI&^Jm TaCHNIQUP*„
.? k
2) Operational i r act^efif"'. D. G. B.) (cont'd)
a certain Ordnance Depot in Great Britain shows that
4 Heavy antiaircraft Guns and 8 Bofors are provided,
M.A.R.4666l-London-19 February 1942
32 single type rocket projectors are being installed at
Gibraltar for antiaircraft barrage work. The barrage at
present is put up by the antiaircraft guns. The barrage is
a very important part of the night antiaircraft defense of
Gibraltar since' the searchlights cannot be placed out far
enough from the objective to insure pick up of planes be fore they reach the bomb release line.
.••-'• M.A.R.14-Gibraltar-16 March 1942
It has been calculated that the average speed of bombers
crossing the South Coast of England on night raids over
land during April and May was 180/190 m.p.h. on the way in
and 230/240 m.p.h. on the' way out", the average heights be ing 15,000 - 16,000 feet and 13,000/14,000 feet respective ly.
A.A.C.#319 #13/AUC-13-23 .ugust 1941
Experienced — German Air Force — — prisoners say
. antiair that there has been a great improvement in craft fire by night.' since September, 1940. — T h e y
all respect antiaircraft fire by day — - . -hen crews
have made a number of War flights, they tend to become
over-confident and rarely taict •avoiding action when heavy
antiaircraft fire is encountered. Many consider that
the best tactics are to fly straight on', as fast as pos sible, and thus leave the danger area at the'earliest pos- .
sible moment, Others continue to fly on their.course tak ing mild evasive action. —
M.A.R.43892-London-5 August 1941
aircraft generally fly at heights between about
Normally the angle of sight never
-146
A *•;••• -T."!
IV - TACTICS .iND TECHNIQUE
%
/
2)
Operational Fractices (A.D.G.B.) C k o n t p l *
minations reaches a value at which reasonably acculfete t ^ f the can be made by Gun Layer Ivik. I or II, The The target at beginning of engagements m st be e supplying British are trying to discover the best metho range to the predictor. It is believed that a method of
range.control - magslip transmitters geared suitably to the
ground range screw of the Range-height Conversion Unit An tiaircraft No. 1 (associated with the Semi-automatic Plot t e r ' s the best approach to the problem, Magslip receivers
are fitted to the ground range, dials of the. predictor. By
following slant range at the conversion unit, ground range
is transmitted to the predictor,
. M.A.R .4763 6-1ondon-29 April 1942
ItTiere loss of static equipment cannot be avoided cer tain important parts of guns, instruments etc.,
are not allowed to fall into enemy hands, — It is essen tial that the same parts are removed in each case so as
to prevent the completion of other equipments by the enemy.
It is a point of honour that antiaircraft guns are fought
to the bitter end and are then prevented (at all costs)
from being captured, '
Fighting Book Instructions
^• •
,
k.A.R.48083-London-27 iviay 1942
The increased effectiveness of German antiAircraft gun and
searchlight defenses, which have been reported several times
from this office, have'been such that the antiaircraft Com mand have, flown y/ithin the last few weeks on bomber aircraft
making attacks against targets deep into Germany, Their
3 jY RK 9 d$ £j; l ,St
.
'
IBM t ' V
IV - ^ i & S ^ S ; jND TECHNIQUE •
2)
Operatiunal f rSctiq^^Mobile) (cont'd)
by Middle East in their report (on experiences to
June 1941) • Throughout these operations the necessity
for light antiaircraft protection'for the field artillery
area and the forward troops has been stressed. For the
protection of aerodromes at least one battery of light an- tiaircraft - — ( 1 2 -40 mm Bofors) per aerodrome was es sential to adequately defend the aerodrome* In both .
Greece and Crete the enemy made deliberate attacks on both
heavy and light antiaircraft gun positions, -r—. Some Bofors
were needed for the protection of the heavy antiaircraft
guns.The enemy has appreciated the fact that the light
antiaircraft guns have engaged a diver only until he has
released his bombs and then change onto another diver com ing down to attack. The result is that when a formation of
10 or more are attacking, the first 3 or 4 return on com pletion of their dive and attack the light antiaircraft
guns with machine gun fire. Dive bombers invariably
machine gun as they dive and ammunition in the pits has fre quently been hit. To prevent charges being ignited either
by incendiary bullets piercing the case or by the primers
being struck, rounds arc placed under cover in the pits.
If rounds are placed with the (nose of the projectile)—
facing in to the centre of the pit, casualties to the de tachment are avoided .as, if the charges are ignited, the
cartridge cases do not blow off among the detachment. It
is the practice to erect Command I ost i rotection to the
height of eyepieces of the predictor and height finder.
Walls if of sandbags are 5-ft. thick, or if of drums
filled with stones, 2 drums thick at the bottom and one at
the top. Fredictor cables — - are covered with sandbags
or ammunition boxes filled with stones.
Extracts from (British) Middle East Re port (to London) on Experience in Em :. > ployment of antiaircraft Units (June 1941)
The general principles affecting' employment of antiaircraft
^^-t^^lery^in mobile operations were, well exemplified
f
A|ej| &|ent operations in CY^.JC.'i. The fact that there
As f ^ J f e f "front' line" was ajaSi clearly emphasized. & so the Jtiaircraft Units were absorb ed into theand role or pl-Otetst^s^ines of were communications »
Both heavy light a.ntiaircraft units used, with sue—
-14B
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
2)
Operational I ractices (Mobility (c.6nt,M)
m g new in
cess, ag-inst .ground targets. Ther^w^s $ e their
this, but care had to be taken not tOcorapgg in
primary antiaircraft role. The average^ the desert, of heavy antiaircraft units 5 mph,
and they could not keep up with light raobil umns.
It was therefore often necessary for Light Antiaircraft
Units in the "Battle Zone" to engage aircraft at greater
heights (6,000/7,000 ft) than is normally the case.
Incl. to M.^.R,2353-Cairo-November 1941 to
January 1942- A.C#319.131/ASA-l
Light antiaircraft was deployed as early as possible,
(in Cyrcnaica) in its normal role in priorities
decided by (the Task) Force Commander, This was usu ally:
(1) Supply Forts
(2) Royal .ir Force Landing Grounds
(3) Inland Supply and ammunition dumps
(4) Headquarters
(5) Convoy Routes
In general there were sufficient light antiaircraft re sources to give thin protection to all the above but as
regards.(5) above the resources only allowed the 'picket- .
ing' of selected,'bottle n e c k s l o a d i n g and unloading
points, etc. For long convoys where 'leap-frogging' was
not possible, light antiaircraft accompanied the con voy, head and tail. The speed with which the Bofors can
be brought into action and if necessary fired off it?
wheels afforded — - some protection.
M. M. . R. 43617-rLona on-15 July 1941
Instances occurred of' Bofors firing heir^wheels in
order to drive.ofi'»enemy aircraft. On ©Cc^ion two
bombers coming straight up the road with t:% bomb ing a halted Australian convoy, were engageULb ie.-Bofors
firing off their wheels and were driven off.
• . .M.A.R.43845-Ajondon-
Difficulty was experienced (in the Middle.EastT in observing the tracer owin^ to the dust, flame, and s
-149
f'" tm My n/•« #id
$ f jp ^ •
&(&i&S/AND TECHNIQUE
J;: ^ . • • >) OperationM" lattices (>>pbfle) (cont'd)
> •:
This trouble was overcome to some extent by Nos. 1 and
10 each standing by one of the layers and guiding them with taps - on the right and left shoulder of the layer
for direction, and on the neck and waist of the layer for
elevation,; • :
M.A.R.43842-London-30 July 1941
(In the middle east) spotters have been found to be
invaluable, V/ith a large number of enema planes in the
sky at once, three spotters were necessary, of whom one
concerned himslef solely with fighters and bombers on the
. .
gun-site. • M. A.R.43842-Loncon-30 July 1941
It is reported that during a recent fighter/bomber op eration against MAZINGAR3E, enemy antiaircraft fire appear ed to be directed at the fighter escort rather than the
bombers. It is likely that this may have been done with
the intention of making the fighter squadrons break forma tions, so that-they had some difficulty in keeping with the
bombers, which were thereby exposed to fighter attack.
' •Incl. "B" to M* A.L.44935-London-ll October ,1941
Question: Vhat methods are .used-to identify"friendly air craft in time to prevent receiving friendly fire? If more
than one method is used, which of these appear to be the
more practical under various situations?
answer: Approach corridors, pyrotechnics, code signals
and identification friend-or-foe radar equipment-.
A, A • C. t£319 • 1321/F
For attacking motor transport convoys from the air, a
ground level attack from astern has been found to be the
_best opening attack (from the Air Force viewpoint) .
?th«scg^voy stops, attacks from the beam have best ef-
I J! fs £nk*r V®* s> nm^
iS
*
kI LMIE-'
-150
IV - ThCTICS ,IND TECHNIQUE
2)
Operational Irac'tices (Mobile) (coring;
feet; in convoy attacks, surprise is neck's d a dive
from 13,000 feet or.above usually attains :owledge of
the position, speed, and method of defense of -.the convoy
is most valuable if an effective attack is to De planned.
Air Information Bulletin NO.2-13/.ARM-33-2
Information of the experiences of antiaircraft units
in the Middle East indicate that enemy tactics have
consisted chiefly of dive-bombing, low level bombing, machine
gunning and reconnaissance. There has been very
little high level bombing. The most noticeable feature has
been the increasing height from which dive-bombing (Stukas).
have made their attacks on each successive raid, and the
comparatively shallow' dives made.when faced with light an tiaircraft fire.
Incl.l to M.A,R.46476-London-30 January 1942
The only weapons smaller than the 40 mm Bofors employed in
Antiaircraft Defense by the British are Lewis and Bren guns
and a few Oerlikon and Hispanos at airdromes, Lewis guns
and Bren are controlled by Hosepipe methods and Oerlikon
by Forward Area Sight or Hosepipe, At Tobruk one captured
Breda 20 mm was used at each Heavy gun site for local pro* tection.' 1 ' M.A.R.47593-London-27 April 1942
(Royal Air Force pilots are advised that) the diffi culties in antiaircraft gunnery are increased to such an
extent that•accurate fire is almonqt impossible if aircraft: (l) Change height — This necessiJfjfafrB^different data
being put into the predictor and thelfcjjp're. -slows up the rate
of fire.
(2) Jink to right or left — This assumption
of straight flight In predictor,
(3) Change speed — This also upsets one^ on m
predictor,' (4) Fly at staggered heights — This makes
more difficult for the Gun Laying set ta pick up1
fV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
"^Operational Practices (Mobile) (cont'd)
tai%e€ SfajtiChaving picked,it up to continue to follow the
same target^ Jn additior)/ in visual shooting, it makes it
most uncertain tha£ predictor operators are laying on
the same target as thatviT)n which the Heightfinder has taken
a 'height. . *
British Air Ministry-21 May 1941-OCCA 319-131/OG
During recent raids on Kiel, a number of crews who made
gliding approaches reported that they were not engaged by
Flak or by Searchlight. Some were engaged after they had
dropped their bombs but three aircraft which glided in, one
from 21,000 ft. down to 13,000 ft., one from 20,000 ft.
down to 16,000 ft., and one from 17,000 ft. down to 14,000
ft., obtained complete immunity. Experience indicates that
when several aircraft are over a target at the same time,
ground defenses are likely to concentrate on those aircraft
which, by flying steadily, make prediction easier. Aircraft
with engines throttled back, changing height and speed con -
tinually are difficult to follow, and may often escape at*
tention in such circumstances.
Technical Services Memo.#6-23 April 1941-OCCA#319.131/LF
- — Orders had laid down maximum range at 1,500 yards for
engagement of planes in Crete by light Antiaircraft weapons.
— — If.this order had not been in force a lot more planes
could have been engaged because the heavy antiaircraft guns
were put out of action early in the battle. After that,
enemy planes, which seemed to know the maximum range at
which Bofors were opening up, used to circle round out of
range and come down to attack objectives one at a time,
. . .. M.A.R. 43842-Londo.n-30 July 1941
— — It has been the experience at Tobruk that — — there is
a critical moment in a dive bombing attack on a heavy an tiaircraft site when the first dive bomber is at about 4,000
feet, A ferocious burst of fire will cause a premature re ^ lease of bombs with corresponding loss, of effect and will
£i£vrn following aircraft.
Incl.BES-333-6 May 1942
i u L i | 4 vv..*i,
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
2)
Operational Practices (Mobile) (cont'd)
"Deterrent fire" is vigorous fire at long range, Se-^
signed to br~ak. up the enemy formations and to cause thf
to release, their bombs prematurely (ana therefore probab]
short of the .target). This policy is of ten. far. more ef fective than holding the fire in order to use more accurate
methods in attempting to single out one aircraft for the
individual bag - possibly after he has already done the dam age. Examples are as follows: (1) "The Porcupine" formation adopted by gun positions
when attacked heavily from all angles; all guns point out wards and fire over 65 degrees,
(2) Light antiaircraft engaging dive-bombers; all guns
face away from the vulnerable area when awaiting a.ttack;
those on the near side of the target open to give maximum
volume of fire at long range. The guns on the far side then
swing round to engage the attackers with accurate predictor
metlods as they flatten out, T*ith U is one method of fire,
over 60 Stukas were definitely destroyed by the light anti aircraft defences at Tobruk between April and October,
Army Training Memorandum No, 43
Question: (In North Africa) how are Army Support air craft directed on to targets, and how long did it take from
calling upon them until the attack took place?
Answer: Close support bombing does not appear to have been
carried out closer than 10 miles ahead of our forward troops.
The selected target was in the hands of Headquarters, The
demand for close support was theoretical as in this country the demand going through the normal channels to the aerodrome
where the pilots were immediately briefed, Meanwhile the
demand was reported to advance battle Hea^uart^rs, •who de cided whether the demand was, in fact, met*
M.A ,R,48227-^5%>n--C>June 1942
From experience gained'in TOBRUK and in the W^^gfi -ues
ert the construction of a number of realistic pJpJAions,,
in the neighborhood of each light antiaircraft positi^J*' ^ ^ and their manning by a dummy flash firing party, makes 4me
selection of the target difficult for the Stuka formation,
-153
:cs AND TECHNIQUE
I I oJfra&oll^
(cont'd)
Irfel
as the Stuka c!lv£s ashes or dust clouds raised by
real or dummy light antiaircraft positions. Personnel
at guns must be provided with slit tronches.
Incl, 1-M. A.R, 2354-22 February 1942-a- A. C.,7-319.131/^RY
The 4th /Antiaircraft Brigade at Tobruk without air
support has had considerable success in dealing with Ger man air attacks great use has been made of camouflage
and of dummy batteries which are attacked by the Germans
as frequently as the real batteries. Dummy men are placed
around the dummy batteries and captured Italian hand gre nades- buried in dust are fired to deceive the German
aviators. The batteries were frequently replaced by dum mies especially after an attack. Emplacements wero made
as small as possible so as to give- all possible lateral pro tection. A direct hit ivas usually required to put a battery
out of action, bofors and machine guns protected the 3*7
inch batteries from dive bombers,
N.a•R.Ser.#-F01:X-18-18 July 1941
Question: What is the limit of dispersion of light antiair craft? Can guns sited in pairs be taken as the minimum, or
three? If sited in pairs, how far apart should they be?
i' •
Answer: Middle East favor three.
Question? For the protection of Artillery areas is it best
to site guns close in for dive-bombers or in a square 1,000
yards apart?
Answer: Sited in triangular formation - sides of triangle
880 yards to-1,000 yards.
M.A.R.48227-London-4 June 1942
The- digging in by troops referred to consisted of narrow,
shallow trenches in the greater number of cases. Troops
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
2)
Operational Practices (Mobile) (cont^dfe - 1
both in Lybia and Crete habitually dug this
after each halt for protection against fighter aVia'tic^n,' as
well as against enemy ground fires.
Fm. U .S. Military Observer Singapore,S.S.
Rpt.No.48- 1 September 1941
(in northern Africa in Bivouac areas) adjacent tents
were from 100 to 20o yards apart ana the earth from the in terior excavated to a depth so that personnel could sleep be *low ground level. The efficiency of this method where cover
is lacking, in preventing personnel losses from air bombing,
is well established. Protection to vehicular vital parts
(engine, differential) was also provided by parking the vehi cles in a ditch of approximately "V" shape.
Rpt.-BES-353-T<'»ashington-24 July 1942
Reconnaissance for Light Antiaircraft (Bofors) sites must
take, into consideration the possibility of a secondary anti tank role. The troop commander is the only one that
can judge the moment to abandon the primary role (antiair craft) for the secondary role (antitank). Light Antiair craft guns must be in position to engage enemy tanks when
they come within 800 yards range,
M.A.R.48325-London-ll June 1942
Army Training Memorandum, # 43•
The clipping of Armour Piercing with High Explosive in the
proportion of one to one (for use against tanks)-— was
the most successful method used. Tracer aids laying against
tanks at close ranges and in addition, it is considered,
has considerable effect on the morale of the tank opera tors, On one ocassion, a troop being attacked by tanks,
ran out of armour piercing and continued with high explo sive only, which not only held off the tanks but assisted in
driving them off.
•333-6 May 1942
IV - TACTIC
2)
»»
(Enemy)
Operational Practices (
The source (of this information) stated that German
antiaircraft officers had explained (to him) that
British bombers were flying into Germany in two. formations
on the same course. The first'formation with the smaller
number of planes came over at about 15,000 feet while the
larger formation came over at about 22,000 feet. The
antiaircraft officers stated they had no difficulty taking
the lower formation under fire, but that they were having
difficulty operating .against the higher unit.
M.A.R.18080-Berlin,Germany-17 March 1941
Gliding approaches made by a large number of aircraft
over Berlin nave been engaged by flak in most cases. Over
other targets, however, gliding approaches have met with
more success and have often attracted very little flak.
This points to the fact that in the first instance, methods
of detection other than sound are being used (by the
Germans) against which gliding approaches are ineffec tive, It seems'therefore, that although gliding approaches
are likely to be effective in most areas, they should not
be relied on to give immunity from flak, particularly over
the most important and heavily defended targets.
Air Information Bulletin No. 2-13/ARM-33-2
-:— The tendency to revert to a more or loss regular dispo sition of heavy gun positions throughout a target area
(.in German territory) has be n further observed in recent
months, and has been accompanied by a considerable increase
in "continuous following" and "predicted concentrations" at
the expense of barrage fire. This may to some extent be
related, especially in the case of more inland targets,
to a .weakening of the defenses, since an effective bar rage is more likely to be put up where equipment is plenti ful. . It may also be considered to provide further pre sumptive evidence in favor of some improved means of fire
control, though there is as yet no definite information
-156r
a
•4k /.:•, n Af IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 2)
^ ^
Operational Practices,(Enemy) (cont'd)
I
tnat a form of gun layer is being used,
M;A.R.4'6l30-London-9 January 19
Light (Antiaircraft) guns are in almost all cases
sited by the Germans close to or at vulnerable
points. In densely populated sections, and in wooded areas,
where flak is necessary, towers have been built above the
height t>Y local objects in order to obtain a 360° traverse.
At important industrial areas, 20-mm. flak are mounted'
on the roofs of many 'buildings, Numerous new types of
flak towers' have been observed in use and under construc tion, Some of these are platforms set upon iron uprights
which are, in turn, set in concrete blocks. Other more
heavily constructed towers include provision for accommoda tion of the gun crews and some contain public air raid
shelters in their bases. Photographs and ground reports of
Berlin show massive six-storied, steel and concrete
armoured towers, A moveable light tower, eight
meters high, constructed of 20-mm, steel tubes has been
reported. These tubes are said to be of standard pattern,
and for issue to light Flak units as required,
• }a.A.R,46l30-London-9 January 1942
Except over the Channel ports there would appear to have
been a considerable decrease recently in the volume of
light Flak fire. There is, however, no evidence to show
that light guns have been withdrawn'from target areas with in Germany for use elsewhere. It is thought more probable that new operational instructions governing opening ranges have been issued,. In the past the smaller caliber light
guns have- not hesitated to open fire at random over the '
vulnerable point or in the approximate direction of an air craft even though the aircraft may have been as much as
3,000 ft, above their maximum effective ceiling. In re cent weeks, however, the majority of the fire has been
directed at the apex of "cones" of searchlight beams or up the beams themselves, and* then only when the target' has
been well within range^
kR,47110-xJondon-27 March 1942 " ** ft v * t, 'h
& ff
Iliirsi is
fcS-*' S I
i .. ; R rs A: .-4%Hft.%
:
rT F
•' 'f J
IV 2)
Operational Iractices (Enemy) (cont'd)
By day the use by the Germans of course and speed sight
enable fire to be opened with light antiaircraft weapons
with reasonable accuracy after which corrections are made
by observation of tracer. The light guns are highly ma neuverable •and can engage targets almost immediately they
come in view and in range; they rely for their effect large ly- on rate and volume of fire, but against low-flying tar gets, i,e., at heights below about 1,500 ft., they have
proved exceedingly accurate, fit very low level, i.e., 0-50
ft., accuracy is likely to be considerably reduced, owing
to probable limitation of field of view, with consequent
restricted time of engagement; this disadvantage, however,
is offset to some extent where guns are mounted on towers.
By night method of engagement (of illuminated targets) is
similar to that employed by day, though it is probable that
greater reliance is placed on observation of tracer. Against
"unseen" targets light Flak fire is little more than a de terrent, as there are no instruments for"unseen" firing of
light guns. Guns are sometimes sited close to searchlights,
from which it is thought some data may be obtained, to en able the target to be followed at least approximately. To
heighten the deterrent effect resort is often had to'moving
or rotating the barrel whilst firing. Fixed or curtain bar rages are occasionally fired by day or by night over small
vulnerable points such as ships or on likely lines of ap proach. '
Air Min. Weekly Int. Summary Up to 27 May 1942-#143
As a general rule German light guns are sited in threes in
the form of a triangle, though in areas where the defenses
are limited they are occasionally sighted singly. They are
often mounted on the roofs of factories, or other buildings,
or on special Flak towers. These are usually constructed
of wood set in concrete foundations, though a mobile type
consisting of light steel tubes has also been reported; they
may be anything up to 75 ft; in height. 'The siting of guns
on t o w e r s ^ v e r y widespread, ensures a good field
« ofiqfltefi and 'if^re&uently adopted amongst trees where there
t
H^
Hi. VTIV
.
• -158
iy'' • y <
IV - TACTICS ;IND TECHNIQUE
2)
Operational Practices (Enemy) (cont'd)
is the added advantage of relative concealment.
Air Min. Weekly Int. Summary Up to 27 Maj
German training manuals lay it down that for defense against
low-flying and dive-bombing attack armoured columns must
march in extended order and use their rifles, machine guns
and super-heavy machine guns. Light antiaircraft artillery
may «also be distributed throughout the column by troops or
even by single guns,
.M.A.R,44063-London-15 august 1941
It is laid down in German training manuals that the speed of
armoured columns makes it impossible for antiaircraft bat teries to "leap-frog", ,'intiaircraft batteries are, however,
employed to defend assembly areas, embussing and debussing
points, bridges, defiles etc,
M.A.R.44063-London-15 august 1941
The Germanspossible because of the great air superiority
which has characterised their previous c mpaigns, have not paid great attention to concealment from air observa tion. There is evidence that serious attention is now
being paid to this matter, (In Libya armored fighting
vehicles) and (Motor transport) are painted a
light khaki "desert-colour", and disruptive colouring is
not used. , Grease mixed with sand is also smeared oh vehi cles to obtain exact conformity with the colour of the sur rounding ground. Guns are painted yellow, and no partic ular ' care is taken to conceal them, although the sun-cov ers provided for all guns help to conceal the outline. Nets
exist, but they are very seldom usedy Smoke is employed
frequently —-(armoured vehicles whiSh)-— #i£hdraw under
its cover.
Incl.5-M,A,R,2457-Egypt^fi) July 1941
- TACTICS M D
E
^atiohat '"Practices (Enemy) (cent' d)
tan' fighters painted very dark green on top, very
light gray under the fuselage, with yellow wing tips and
nose, have been very difficult to detect, for they blend
well with the sea. Enemy markings are sometimes surround ed by distinct circles, giving a first impression of be ing British, Many of the Me-109's are camouflaged a dark
red and black and have black crosses in red circles.
Air Information Bulletin No,2-13/ARM-33-2
Reports from Middle East state that about 30-40 Ju.88s, or
Ju.87s., with an escort of about 10 Me,109s, are often em ployed in attacks. Formations generally approach at
between 14,000 - 17,000 feet and dive out of the sun. The
Ju. 88s, generally dive at an angle of about 50/60 degrees,
but the Ju. 87s, always at angles of between 70/80 degrees.
T u"hen antiaircraft .'ire is intense, aircraft maintain a good
interval and very few dive through the barrage, but release
their bombs from about 500 feet above it, with consequent
loss of accuracy. Occasionally, when the antiaircraft fire
has been less intense, attack has been made by four air craft at a time in single line. After pulling out, the air craft generally fly away very low, sometimes at an altitude
of only 100 fe^.t. This is done to reduce casualties, Ocr casionally, attacks have been preceded by high level bomb ing by Ju.88s, approaching from the opposite direction,
with the obvious intention of distracting attention from
the dive bombing attack. Light antiaircr ft fire, particu larly Bofors, has been most effective against dive bombers
especially when the aircraft is about to pull out of the
dive. Aircraft have also been engaged during this period,
it has often caused pilots to take evasive action, and' ac curate bombing is tnereby rendered impossible.
M.A.L.47191-London-l' April 1942
Direct attack on heavy antiaircraft four-gun sites (have been) met (effectively at Tobruk) by pointing the
guns to all four quarters and maintaining rapid rate of
fire at 65 degrees quadrant elevation and at fuzes 2, 3, &
4. Incl .-BES-333-6 May 1942
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
2)
v
Operational Practices (Enemy) (cont'^i) £
% V ^
S.
(At Tobruk) reconnaissances were nearly Always,
ried out by M.E. 110's at 25>000 ft. On one occasion
reconnaissance machine (Me:110) was shot down at 23,00(5^t.
InCl.-BES-333-6 May 1942
(In the North African desert a somewhat) new tech nique was developed in enemy air attack against our troops
and motor transport. Fighters approached the area in
loose "V" formation' at heights between 8000 and 12000 ft-.
If dropping bombs (about 40-100 lb), the attack was deliv ered with a moderate dive down to 3000 to 6000 ft, each
aircraft diving independently on the target area. When
machine gunning, which form of attack often followed the
bombing, the attacking aircraft circled the objective in
a wide sweep and .then, with a shallow dive 'and boost down
to between 3000 and 100 ft., delivered a short burst on
the target, quickly raising and jinking. The aircraft
having delivered its attack again joins the circus of cir cling fighters at 3000-4000 ft, height and returns to re peat the attack. Aircraft adopting this technique are dif ficult to engage with antiaircraft fire due to the speed
at which the attack is delivered, the continuous avoiding
action and the fact that they take advantage of dust storms.
The best way of meeting the problem lies in the training
of detachments, particularly in applying larger deflections
and ^in cultivating a rapidity of action and quick thinking
corresponding with the increased speed of the diving fighter
over the bomber.
M.A.L.48l65-London-2 June 1942
—-(in^North Africa)-— German airplanes in ground strafing
attacks paid particular attention to staff vehicles (Ford
station wagons) and trucks hauling water; In areas within
range of German light bombardment, British convoys moved
with 100-200 yards between vehicles, aa^jajf x — vehicles
carry troops there was One man detail^^.^ entry.
R. #BES-3 53-Washingfeg^ $JLy 1942
-161
w TaCTJCS ;VND; -TECH:TIQUE
2) 'Operational Practices (Enemy) (cont'd) Captured Instructions for use of the German BZA-1 dive
bomb sight contain the following paragraph:
, "If a ..number (of) oives are carried out immediate ly following one another, the aircraft must not be climbed
in spirals after a dive and then dived again immediately,
as the gyroscope will be set incorrectly. 'Mist climbing
fly on long straight stretches or in a straight course for
five to ten minutes before the new dive, so that the gyro scope can recover itself. In the event of antiaircraft
fire, however, the pilot may curve immediately before the
dive. This curve should not, if possible, be continued for
more than five minutes," The necessity for this long
straight run between dives means th-1 the bomber must
either mak§ himself a good steady target for five to ten
minutes, or abandon hope of precision bombing after his
first dive. The BZA-1 sight has so far only been found
on the Junkers 88, but it is probably also used on the Ju.87,
M..i,L,47191-London-l April 1942
3)
Antitank
In selecting the firing position — - ( o f the German 88 mm
satisfied as far as possible,
(1) The 'vngle of impact should not be less than 60°.
(The loophole must be visible),
(2) The range should generally not exceed 1000 metres,
(3) There must be an adequate downward slope in the gun
lever. The wheels.nearer the enemy must be lower (The gun
lever varies from - 3° to - 15° from the horizontal of the
muzzle),
(4) It should be a concealed position as near to the tar get as possible. (More accurate fire). This is an aid in
achieving a maximum surprise effect when opening fire. The
field of fire must, wherever necessary, be prepared by saw ing through trees and branches. Careful note must be taken
of the height of the muzzle from the ground.
(5). The lanes of approach and withdrawal to and from the
assemble point must b e as firm, level and wide as possible,
- Inc 1, , R. 245 7-Cairo, Egypt-27 July 1941
-162
-
••••-•
IV - T:\CTICS :ND TECHNIQUE 3)
?
Antitank ( c o n t ' d ) ,
-
f*".. >
The attachment of antiaircraft unit^to the Field Hclce Oft*' t w in
the forefront of an advance in order to ptrfo^m theJaual
antitank and antiaircraft role is now an established fea ture of German policy. These tactics were very much in ev idence in the Battle of France, and have been developed
during subsequent campaigns. It was of interest to note
that approximately 40% of a recent consignment of 88 rim,
ammunition was antitank.
A . A, C, ;/319.13/aUC-13-23 August 1941
In the Russian Campaign, against - — strong armor ed forces, large air combat forces, and very numerous for tifications, the missions executed by the (German)— antiaircraft artillery in assisting and supporting the Army
have been especially important and difficult. Its main
missions consisted in combating aerial targets,
But the antiaircraft artillery has also been the insepar able companion of the points of the advancing columns. It
has not only given them the necessary artillery protection
against air raids and tank attacks, but has often quickly
attacked ancl destroyed by means 'of its direct fire, large
concrete dugouts &nd other obstacles, otrong concrete
dugouts have succumbed to it, (It was in Russia)
that German iintiaircraft artillery was first employed in
this manner. Thus an Arm which was at first assigned only
defensive missions, has been converted by means of suitable
training and experience into a unique weapon of attack.
C-5195-17 October 1941-German
Germans attack with their tanks closely supported by their
Mk, IV tanks with 7*5 mm, guns firing high explosives and
armor-piercing, and by 50 mm, antitank guns in positions
on the ground. The latter have proved effective against
British tanks at 2000 yards (type not stated). The attack
is also accompanied with 88 mm, guns which knocked out
British ;Infantry Tanks at 1500 yardsfc The .Germans tend
to hold off the heavier weapons andrhocJ^er armor until a
T1J^y—consistently
favorable opportunity arrivesf attacked in Middle East in the ev he^sun behind
them. In addition to the traditional
-163
IV - T VCTICS AND TECHNIQUE
3)
Antitank (contldX-- ^ gf
amsi^i i t ,
i out ^of "the -sun, this has the added advantage of giving
\ 1ifieoi'^bhc battlefield Shitfing the night for recovery — - of
|J5I equipment .
M. A. R.45966-I,ondon-23 December 1941
From a captured German document entitled "Organization
uf Defense" — it appears that.the German builds his de fense about his basic weapon usually in 88 ram. antitank gun
if possible. He aoes not fit the weapons into a preconceiv ed defensive lay-out. To insure readiness for action liv ing quarters and fighting quarters are combined. Dummy
positions are (considered) essential, and mining
is all important.
M.A.R.2327-Cairo,Egypt-23 March 1942
From study of the German•"Tactical handbook for the
troop Commander"— used extensively by German junior offi cers ana from observation in Germany of its application
the following practices have become well established •
(1) The use of German antiaircraft materiel for antitank
purposes (in Poland, on the Western Front ana in Russia.)
(2) The use of light and medium antiaircraft automatic
cannons against machine-gun nests (in Russia).
(3) The use of antiaircraft searchlights for illumination
of hostile planes, hampering the orientation of hostile
plane crews, and for deception as to location of ground ob jectives.
(4) Use of antiaircraft guns for defense of artillery.
(5) Similarity between German and American methods for
attaining information of enemy air operations.
(6) Consistent with German doctrine, emphasis is placed
upon harmonious cooperation between antiaircraft units and
the arms of the army.
(7) — The altitudes (or slant ranges) of responsibility
for defense by the different antiaircraft weapons against
enemy aerial attack,.
Special Rpt.#6-Bad Hauheim, Germany-24 March 1942
-164
IV - TaCTICS -.ND TECHNIQUE
3)
.antitank (cont'd)
A captured document gives the following instructions for
the operational employment of (the German 88 mm. anti aircraft gun) in an antitank role,
(1) The assembly point should not be more than 200 metres
(219 yards) from the gun position sclected,
(2) The gun position should be chosen in the light of the
following considerations: a) Angle of impa'ct should be between 30 degrees and nor mal.
b)' The range should not be more than 1,000 metres (1,100
yards).
c) The gun must be sited on a downward slope with the
wheels nearest the enemy loWer, (Arc of fire varies between
- 3 degrees and -}- 15 degrees from the horizontal).
d) It should be a concealed position as near to the tar get as possible. The field of fire must be prepared, where
necessary, by the removal of trees and branches.
e) The approaches to and .from the assembly point should
be as firm, level and broad as possible. Trees up to"5.9"
by the self propelled mounting. The jack arms must not be
let down till all narrow points on the road from assembly
point to gun position have been negotiated. Both in advance
and withdrawal the barrel and .shield must be pointed towards
the enemy,
(3) In firing the gun from the self-propelled and trail er mountings, the beet position for opening fire is with
the barrel parallel or at 45 degrees to the carriage. Re coil caused by firing at right angles to the carriage makes
the carriage sway. Care should, therefore, be taken to se lect as level an emplacement as possible. When firing at
this angle, the crew have to hold on. tightly to the carriage.
In the case of the trailer mounting, Nos, 1 and 2 of the
,gun crew have to be strapped on firmly.
Note by British Observer: The German regard the 8.8 cm.
antiaircraft gun as their most effective antitank weapon.
Little is known of trailer No. 201 except that it is on
four pneumatic tyred wheels, with twin tyres on the rear
wheels, and is fitted with a deep shield* There is no indi cation that it is possible to employ in its anti aircraft role, either on the self-pr .ng or
from the trailer," without removing the?
M.A.L.4719.1-Lo'
- -165
IV - TACTICS AN£ Tffi&feQUE
(cu^-M)
* — This^epqrt forwards a study on the Development of
Germaft Defensive Fractice in Libya, It contains valuable
data. The German definition of defense is that: "The ob ject of the defense is to wear down an attack before a
counterattack, generally with armored troops" and it is
believed that so long as the defender thinks in terms of.
ability to ward off (attack) and then deal blows
there is no danger in a defensive role, nother ob servation is that in defensive warfare 60$ is with the
spade, 30$ with field glasses, only 10$ with the gun,
(However)— most important data contained in the study
is an account of 83 mm. antiaircraft guns used against
tanks. In June 1941 one battery Knocked out 92 armored
vehicles, of which 82 were tanks. The 88 mm. guns destroy ed 1 tank for each 20 shells fired, ^t another point four
88 mm. guns knocked out 14 tanks, 8 armored cars. 1.1 an other point four 88mm. guns were attacked by 70 tanks; 11
tanks were knocked out, the remainder forced to retire.
There are numerous other instances of extremely effective
work of the 88 mm. antiaircraft gun against tanks. Out
of 137 tank casualties in the 1st Army Tank Brigade 25/b
were from mines, 75$ were from guns. Until British learn
how to neutralize the 88 mm, antiaircraft gun they must
expect heavy tank casualties, • M.a.R•2481-Cairo,Egypt-3 May 1942
During the campaign in i oland and on the Western Front,
the 37 mm. gun was the principal German antitank weapon.
In Russia, the 50-mm, weapon is replacing the 37-mm. anti tank gun and 37-mm, gun in the Kark III tank, as rapidly
as material becomes available. Even the 50-mm. gun is not
• sufficiently effective against the largest Russian tanks,
therefore a more powerful weapon is needed. Large caliber
antiaircraft guns ar^^JJmfor this purpose. TP/hen the air
is relatively aircraft, the 88-mm. guns form
the backbone o f d e f e n s e . For this r,.. son,-the
German practifj^ ^"""ass^&iing an antiaircraft corps to a Pan zer army^<©je^V^s»feful purpose in giving great defensive
fire ^ow1|vvt||5^^&rong offensive force,
e^*i.I.S.,War Departm'ent-13 August 1942-13/AUW-5
h,
^
:
ivW*
-166
IV - T .CTICS AND TECHNIQITE
: - 4 8 £% 1 i p i y r i 1* W
n
-i ? ' 3 i
* * I§
3) Antitank (cont'd)
The Red Army antiaircraft artillery has learned to com bat tanks as well as planes• Dual purpose antiaircraft guns
make good antitank guns because of their high muzzle, velo city, high cyclic rate of fire, and 360° traverse. "In the
first six months of the war Red .army antiaircraft artillery
fired in self defense at enemy tanks when they broke through
to the battery positions. Gradually the antiaircraft a.r tUlery'became an organic part of the antitank defensive
system. In numerous instances Soviet antiaircraft guns suc cessfully repulsed attacks of large German tank units. "The
antiaircraft units learned that most tactical operations
seem to eiviue themselves into two phases. In the first,
army artillery concentrates heavy fire on enemy tanks be fore they can jump off. It then lays down a screen of fire
to prevent the enemy tanks approaching our forward line of
defense and breaking up our infantry formations. this
time the antiaircraft units are busily engaged in repelling
the attacks of enemy aircraft, particularly dive bombers,
which attempt to open the way for. the tanks. "In the sec ond phase, after enemy tanks have broken into the initial
line of defense or deeper, the enemy aviation generally
shifts its attack to counter-attacking or reserve units. •
In this comparative lull antiaircraft guns fire at the Ger man tanks by direct laying: the more point blank the range,
the more effective the fire. "It is remembered, however,
that the prime function of .antiaircraft artillery is against
planes, but in areas where-there is insufficient antitank
artillery, antiaircraft guns must be employed to drive off
tanks which approach the battery positions or threaten to
break up the battle formations of our troops. "In order to
successfully combat enemy mechanized forces the antiair craft artillery must prepare its antitank defense in advance.
'•.Tien the guns go into position they must .be ready to open
fire against attacking tanks immediately. To establish such
a system it is necessary to:
(1) make a complete study of the surrounding terrain, par ticularly as regards possible tank approaches\
(2) determine the sector of fire for each gun, including
ranges to key reference points;
(3) build the minimum amount of field fortifications nec essary.
(4) establish special antitank observation points.
All antiaircraft personnel not working at .the guns during a
IV - T . C m | N M ! M Q ! i E
3)|l^titank ^oorit * d)
''
^
.
tank attack take up positions in the vicinity and use hand
grenades, gasoline bottles, or armor-piercing bullets a gainst the enemy tanks."
Ii,A,R,2141-Kuibyshev-24 June 1942
Question: ire antiaircraft guns and automatic weapons
expected to perform anti-mechanized missions? If so, what
special equipment and training is provided? --'hat is the
3ritish doctrine in .reference to this subject?"
iinswer: The accepted principle is that antiaircraft guns
both heavy and light antiaircraft normally have a primary
antiaircraft r.ole. It is however recognized that they have
a secondary antitank role and that there may be occasions
on which they may be allotted a primary antitank role where
the tank threat warrants it, It is also an accepted prin ciple that any antiaircraft gun will fire upon any enemy
tank which is within 600 yards of the gun position. No
special equipment other than armor-piercing shot is issued
for antitank engagements; modifications are however made to
the sighting arrangements • Training in an antitank role
is given special attention and allotments are made to anti aircraft units on antitank ranges,
::.u.R*47482-Lonaon-20 *.pril 1942
From many experiences (in the African desert)
tj-iere can be no doubt as to the effectiveness of the 40-m/m
Bofors gun firing armour piercing ammunition against armour ed vehicles at ranges of 400 yards or less. The v-^lue of
the gun for thickening antitank defenses in rear of the main
antitank defense is recognized by column commanders and com manders of defensive-positions,. If there is a tendency to
consider this. role -of primary importance, then — - antiair craft Commanders must be jafl^rir^d to stress the importance
of the Antiaircraft rolrfiS^th- t the «un should nn all but
exceptional circumsi^^Bfb^^ted with this role in view.
Further e v i d e n c * the "'sO'uacmess of clipping armour pierc ing with h^n^xj^os.'iy^s* (for action against tanks has
siting a 40-mm gun for antitank de
-168
IV - ThCTICS,INDTECHNIQUE
3)
antitank (cont'd)
fense, it was found desirable, when^feTL possible, to keep
the gun concealed by a crest or piuf^^i^^a^way that the .
position could .not be observed by
$$$ within range of the guns, ,T here tnia im^Qf time and ground permits the personnel dust $ in trenches, if possible, and spring tft their • gun' as t M
tanks come into range, M
ill M.A,L.48l65-London-2 June 1942 *
The guns (of one light antiaircraft regiment) were
used in an antitank role on two occasions (in the Mi dole-
East) .
(1) ihen one section was given the task of covering the
withdrawal of Toeiforce In tiie Merd javoun Sector and
(2) "when one Troop was ordered, to provide primarily anti tank defense over a period of 48 hours during the auvance
on Damascus,
On both occasions the use of the guns in this role met with
considerable success. In (l) two medium tanks were engaged
with the solid antitank ammunition, and, the gun scoring
direct hits, disabled the tanks which were subsequently de stroyed, In (2) three tanks were engaged oh each of two oc casions a t about 1000 yards range and. driven 'off. In both
cases the counter fire of the tanks was ineffective. The
danger of regarding the light antiaircraft Bofors gun as a
dual purpose weapon tended to be overlooked,
Incl,-BES-333-6 May 1942
Question: Do the British believe that jay armor protection
is necessary for the crews of their antitank guns?
Answer: Yes, The British believe that antitank gun crews
must be protected from small arms fire. The 2-pdr, and 6 pdr, antitank guns have such armor protection on the front
and flanks. The top edge of the armor plate of the 6-pdr,
gun is cut in a wavy patternJas. an aid in concealment. It
is not known at this date wl^^j type t^f prote^i ^n will.be
used on 'the finally acceptecP#e|.f--pro^l Ivf
M. ..A.454^7-10^0:^19 I^vs
-1.69
• TACTICS AND TEC HI
ivntitank
* u;
Tha
that ^ t h Heavy .jitiair craft and Light jjrti aircraft
suited to engage ground targets (such as Armor 7g Vehicle's etc.) needs no elaboration. This pos role must however be viewed in* its true perspective
and antiaircraft guns should nn no account be considered as
dual purpose weapons, for the reasons that:
(1) Antiaircraft artillery is neither trained, equipped
not organized for a Field Vrtillery role (the 3.7-inch anti aircraft gun has no greater range than the 4.5-inch Field
gun),
(2) The siting of antiaircraft guns for employment in this
secondary role may compromise their siting for their primary
role of defense against air attack which may develop in a
matter of seconds.
M.A,R.436l7-London-15 July 1941
No one special unit should be charged with the laying of
antitank mines, but all troops of the combat arms and appro priate services should be thoroughly trained in this phase
of antitank aefense. There shuuld be an organic supply of
mines in each unit,
C-5195-Grerman-17 October 1941
after a tank is stopped by gun fire another hit should be
obtained to insure disabling the crew. Many crews of disa bled tanks in France captured antitank guns.
Final report on Temporary Duty in England as an .uatitank
Observer.- Received G-2: 22 October 1941.
Question: Is any development taking place.in Great Britain
on a light, his^lfprale-velocity antitank rifle for issue
to Infantry^/&%^%2%" and Coast Artillery for locaJ: se curity? - V ^ / V v naw
i^./^tfelopment of this kind is taking place. The
gun will be dual purpose,
M.A.R;45457~London-18 November 1941
-170
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
3)
Antitank (cont'd)
^_
rSmwEr soi- |
: attack wherp
I O w J
*
Answer': Yes. It is the consensus of all observers in the
antitank group that the British have succeeded in indoctri nating soldiers with the feeling that tank attacks can be
stopped. This has been accomplished by explaining the "net"
defensive system to every individual soldier. Each one's
part in the coordinated defense is understood - for instance
the front line infantryman understands that he is to dig
himself in; remain as inconspicuous as possible; take a lim ited toll of individual tanks with antitank rifles, grenades
etc., as these targets of opportunity present themselves;
and remain in position to fight the accompanying .enemy in fantry, Each antitank gunner realizes the part his gun is
to play, where the other guns are located, how they are coor
dinated and has confid.ence that his gun will destroy tanks,
The taxtical knowledge of junior officers and non-commission
ed officers of small units, is superior. The intensive,
realistic training undergone by each unit, without regard
to ordinary peace-time safety precautions, has had a great
deal to do in building the confidence of the officers and
men in the capabilities of their weapons. The British of ficer and soldier has — — the "will to fight" and has con fidence that he can repel any attack which may be launched
against him in the modern mechanical way.
M,A,R.45457-TLondon-19 November 1941
The War .Office has instructed Army Commanders at home and
overseas'to change the point of aim for antitank ana other
field guns firing against tanks to the centre of visible
mass (both for elevation and for linej , This conforms
to Royal Armoured Corps practice,
M. ,.Rt4b852-London-6 March 1942
In the engagement of ground targets in Libya by antiaircraft
units it was stressed at all times.that'air tar
has priority but that gun position officers
powers of .decision to cease fire if engaging gr
and revert to Priority Role.
M . A . R . ^ R ^ L
Single^shot, using armor piercing, is extremely effective
when tanks, are attacking singly and provided fire is held
until they are within range (500 yards). Similarly, it is
very effective if tanks, moving in line, can be engaged
from a flank. On the other hand, wheretanks are attacking
in a mass (and head on) rapid fire with high explosive proves
the greatest deterrent and, in many cases, (will divert the
attack)
appendix "C " -M. A. R.47438-Lon< i . o n - 1 7 .-prii 1942
Ouestion:
Is dust a serious handicap to antitank shooting?"
Answer: Yes, It is important not to get the first round'
minus unless a r^und is fired \dth the object of screening
the target,
M. A. R.48227-London-4 June'1942
There were many occasions (in the operations in Libya in
November-January 1942) on which, owing to breaks through
and counter attacks by enemy armored fighting vehicles, an tiaircraft units were used in their secondary role of anti tank, There were, however, no occasions on which antiair craft were deliberately pulled out of their antiaircraft
role for use against tanks. On several occasions heavy an tiaircraft was used wit a. success in a Field ^irtillery role
against an enemy aerodrome in harassing fire an*, counter
battery, In engagement against tanks the following points
in connection with light antiaircraft are of interest: (1) a useful rule of thumb measure for deciding priorities
of antiaircraft and antitank roles for light antiaircraft
was found to be. thus,:
. t Antiaircraft ijatitank
Light antiaircraft^ witra Divisions 50$ $0%
* Forward Army 15% 25%
# —-yfth Rear ^rrny 90$ 10%
(2) The i^'ort^n$e of holding light anti aircraft fire
against Ge-^afr^^y.'fll and Mark IV tanks until they were
within e. At ranges of. ..over 1,000 yards armor
pierc" 'from Bofors failed, to pierce, and. were seen
on on to bounce off the front of the tank. On the
tanks engaged within 500 yards- were penetrated
-172
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
3)
Ant it ank (c ont'd)
by armor piercing shell, even in the turret,
(3) Alternate armor piercing and high explosive were used
and found to give excellent results,. Tracer of the High Ex plosive was found to give confidence to our own Infantry and
to shake the determination of the enemy tank crews, Dur ing the enemy preparations for attack it was essential that
Bofors guns should remain silent, and should be protected by
gun pits', slit trenches or Sangers. The Bofors is a very
conspicuous weapon, and its protection offers considerable
difficulty. It is again stressed that a shield- to give
protection against small arms fire would, be of the greatest
benefit.
BES-333-6 Kay 1942
4)
Lessons and Trends
During lulls it is best not to leave a shell in a hot gun,
A shell may exude TNT and also get stuck in the bore, pos sibly causing damage when the gun is again fired. This is
now a British Fleet general order,
American Legation-Cairo,Egypt-18 October 1940
In thirteen weeks (during the autumn of 1940) the
British Antiaircraft gunners destroyed 357 bombers and
fighters, The greatest altitude,, of record, from which
a plane was shot down was a Messerschmitt 109 fighter,
at something over 26,000 feet, approximately twice as many
bombers as fighters have been destroyed by antiaircraft
fire. In addition to verified destructions there were
many aircraft "winged". This is proved.by the number
of bodies of German airmen and wreckage of aircraft washed
ashore'on the English coast. Examination showed that
many of them were victims of antiaircraft fire. In addition
to breaking up enemy aircraft formations and keeping them
above precision range antiaircraft fire has prdven of tre mendous value to•British fighter pilots in pointing out to
them the position .and direction of enemy planes which
would not otherwise (have been) located by tj^e
.. R.41810-Lond op
* -173
f\
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
-OF
4)
Lessons ar^T^rids (coi^t'i)
Pb%d aerial target is obviously the best
% x o u n d for training with live ammunition. It
swever, the very serious fault of giving.an entirely
^false impression of the very quick mental reaction and light ning physical action which has to take pla.ce in the snap
engagement of enemy aircraft travelling at some 300 m.p.h.
in and out of low clouds. Brigacier Revell-Smith stated
it was of the utmost importance to counteract this false
lesson of the sleeve.
M. .ft. 43393~London-24 June 1941'
Aerodromes being enemy ma.in objectives must be organized for
all round defense (including Fill Boxes) specially as para chutists may drop behind defenses. Defenses including ar tillery must be in depth. irtillery in sites with cover
have proved more useful than those in open with all round
field of fire, all ranks of all arms must be armed with
rifles ana bayonets and high proportion of tommy guns to
protect themselves xnd in the case of artillery, their guns,
By day it should be easy to deal with parachutists but it
must be remembered that parachutists may land at night and
secure an aerodrome. Main problem is tc deal with enemy
air borne troops ana as it is impossible to be strong every where there must be strong mobile reserves centrally placed
preferably with tanks. Defense must be offensive. Immedi ate action by mobile reserves are essential to prevent
enemy settling down, and in order to secure quick action
good system of intercommunication is vital. Delay 'may al low enemy air to prevent movement. During bombing phase
antiaircraft and light machine guns should remain silent
unless required to protect own aircraft on ground, iuatiair craft layout should incluae dummy antiaircraft guns rind al ternative positions. Fositions of antiaircraft guns should
be continually changed. Arrangements must be made quickly
to render ae^ouromes liable to attack temporarily unfit for
landing. Equally important to quick ..action of mobile reserve
is position of fighter airc^f^teupport, the existence of
which might prevent any^ir^b^rWllancling from succeeding, or
at least reduce eneriy, effort l|^£guing are interim lessons
which may be n^d^ie-d as result of views of special inter service:|ire^iijkt^ operations,
%
k k
Ministry-14'June 1941-OCCA 319.131/OG
B,A.C. Technical Services memorandum No,8
-174
IV - TACTICS . iJD TECHNIQUE
4)
Lessons and Trends (cont'd)
Dive bombers invariably machine gun as they dive and ammu nition in the pits has frequently been hit. To prevent
charges being ignited either by .incendiary bullets piercing
the case or by the primers being struck rounds should be
placed unuer cover in the pits. If rounds are placed with
the fuzes facing in to the centre of the pit casualties to
the etachment are avoided as, if the charges are ignited
the cartridge cases do.not blow off the shells am6ng the
detachment.
Command lost irotection should be the(height of eyepieces
of the predictor and height finder. 1 "alls if of sandbags
must be 5-feet thick or if of drums filled with stones, 2
drums thick at the bottom and. one at the top. — - All walls
of pits should- be as close to the as is practicable to
avoid unnecessary casualties from machine gun fire. Pre dictor cables should be covered" with sandbags or ammunition
boxes filled with stones.
M. .R.43S45-Loncon-30 July 1941
The German armed Forces organize task forces or teams to
accomplish assigned missions, .:lien a leader is assigned a
mission and has betn given the means to accomplish it, he
can use the means to accomplish his mission. There fore, we see -»—• antiaircraft guns performing infantry weap on, artillery and antitank assignments, antiaircraft mate riel is very effective with the field forces because of
its mobility, the short time required for. it to go into ac tion, the accuracy ana high rate of its fire, its high muz zle velocity, and its general all-round adaptability. There
is a trend toward the use of antiaircraft artillery as the
direct sup ort artillery in the German army, Antiaircraft
fire "Control methods are being, extended to other types of
artillery. From the results which the Germans claim
for the anti-drcr ft artillery assigned' to their Field
Forces, following are, the deduced missions:
(1) Antiaircraft defense
(2) antitank missions
(3) Counterbattery
,ir IV - T.£TIC£
TSCHNIQTJB*
*
trends ^(cont'd)
*ning the detection of unexplodcd bombs, it is important
To secure prompt and accurate reports of the bombs and other
missiles which do not explode. Bombs which do not explode
may be genuine duds or may be fitted with delayed action fuses
A bomb v/hich explodes \ hen it falls may or may not pene trate the ground. A' delayed action or a dud bomb is almost
certain to do so, The diameter of the entry hole will
vary according to the size of the bomb. Its shape Is roughly
circular, subject on soft ground, to the effects of "splash"
as is described below. Thus a 100-lb, bomb normally has an
entry hole of between 8 in, and 12 in. in diameter, a 500-lb,
bomb a hole between 12 in, and 18 in, in diameter, a 1,000 .
lb, a hole exceeding 28 in, in diameter measured below any
surface orator effect. Depth of penetration. The depth
to which a bomb penetrates varies considerably according to
(a), the height from which it is dropped, (b) whether the
bomb strikes any objects before ^entering the ground, and. (c)
the nature of.the surface and the subsoil. Depths of pene tration are in ascending order in the following grounds:
rock, gravel, compact sand, shingle, chalk, dry clay, wet
clay. The heavier the bomb the deeper it penetrates. For
example, a 2,000-lb. bomb in wet clay went 40 feet deep.
path of a bomb in the ground. The path also varies con siderably according to the surface and subsoil. The hole
made by the bamb usually starts slanting away from the ver*
tical,and continues straight for some distance. In some
cases it "jinks" sideways so that the bomb may finally come
to rest some feet from a line drawn vertically through the
entry hole. Shells fired by our antiaircraft guns sometimes
fail to explode, and, if they penetrate the ground, make
holes of le'ss that six inches in diameter. There is no dan ger if the shells are allowed to remain untouched. Antiair craft shells coming to rest on the surface are similarly
harmless unless tampered with, and suitable precautions
should be taken, e.g., bv^ft^veririg them with sandbags, to
prevent unauthorized ii^rerference..
^fe~300-Washington, D.C.-27 October 1941
*
r •The Director Antiaircraft has stated that — — a good
warning sys%?mbenefits all forms of antiaircraft Defense,
by cut-y^k down tension and allowing a minimum number of
men J^^gl Kept permanently on watch. In the field, a lower
of warning) 'must be accepted as the distri
-176
IV - ThCTICS,INDTECHNIQUE
A) '
v
Lessons and'Trends (ccnt'd) " i mi?,
' I . \ h p :, i f,1
bution of warning information,.was not as easy as ini>the
ic defense system, Radio-Location was taking'the' place of
the old system of many visual observer posts. Development
was - going on in obtaining range, bearing and angle of eleva tion with greater accuracy. In the field two conditions
existed' (1) Fluid condition in front, where Corps and Divisions
were concerned with providing antiaircraft defense for the
army on the move.
(2) More permanent condition further back, at bases and
on lines of communication where a co-ordinated system of
antiaircraft defense coula be established.
The command in the field of the main bulk of the antiair craft artillery should be centralized under an antiair craft Commander (assisting the field commander) .
Defense of units on the march from .surprise low-flying
attack with cannon and machine gun is a formidable problem.
If no warning system exists, light antiaircraft guns (Bofors)
cannot be deployed in time irom the column. An inter mediate weapon between the .303 and the 40 mm. is. required,
and the 20 mm, Oerlikon was being developed for this purpose,
but would not be available during the summer 1942. (Note:
The British do not use the .50 .caliber antiaircraft machine
gun) .
M,A.R.45S40-London-13 December 1941
(The following is quoted from a German Army Corps order)
' claimed to have been captured by the Russians . "Dur ing the past two months it has been found necessary to use
heavy bombers with planes of comparatively low speed and •
maneuverability in coordination with attacking ground troops.
It has been found that our loss of planes from small arms
ground fire has been exceptional high, The reas$>n,
lies in the well organized Soviet antiaircraft fire. Our
aviation units have made the following observations:
Soviet ground units attacked b y our aviation
open fire on our p3_anes with rifles and other infantry weap ons, The probability of hits on'a- small target from fire
widely distributed on the"ground is very great.
"(2) Upon being attacked, Soviet cavalrymen dismount
fire from a standing position with their rifles
the saddles. The infantry men lie on thfeir bat
Ik 1 6 V* ® I
IV - TACT:
Trends (cont'd)
3) Mortar fire is also used* I do not point this out
as an example to be followed bub to point out that the Soviets
use all weapons ,found with ground troops to' fire on aircraft.
"(4) The Soviets place, light and medium antiaircraft ar~
tillery transported on sleds, at the head of the columns.
"(5) Four barreled machine guns which are well camou flaged are brought into action suddenly. They are often
used to protect advanced headquarters and airdromes,
it Our units must be able to combat enemy pianos with
all types of small arms in a similar manner. That this is
possible can be seen from an incident which took place on
January 24, 1942 with the 24th Tank Corps, when a Soviet
plane was knocked down with an automatic pistol. In connec tion with this , our leading units should be clearly marked
with signal panels. Poor marking of our own lines might
be harmful to our planes. Bombers must not fly low over
their targets; otherwise they will be subjected to a concent
trated fire."
For the Corps Commander
/s/ FIEBIG
Chief of 'Staff Gutner"
M.A.R.2049-Kuibyshe v-21 March 1942
The enemy will always be seeking to find the weak spots in
the antiaircraft defenses, and therefore all ingenuity pos sible is needed to keep him guessing. Here are some of the
ways in which surprise was developed at Tobruk from obser vation of German bombing methods and by intelligent antici pation : (1) Changing methods of fire control — Various types of
barrages were improvised to deal with various types of at tack, e.g., a special arrangement with searchlights counter ed, aircraft attemptingf^t^mine the harbour by night. As
soon as the enemy ap^parap^o be able to locate the edge of
a barrage, it was*%l*t <>r ecnr
(2) Frequent Waltera^^on of lay-out — This creates sur prise by thp "reach" depth, and disposition of the
defense;,Ai^y,so pl&ys on the enemy's nerves by keeping him
guessijig^her^Jtfie guns will be next time.
[ar'ia'feLon of the density.of fire — From silence to
leJ^^fexvity to mislead attacking aircraft.
-178
I? - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
4)
— Lessons and Trends (cont'd)
» - |i kk* Jk
_
(4) Use of alternative positions and camouflage
The antiaircraft gun by the nature of its role is extrel
ly liable to attract attention to itself, with serious- con sequence. The bomber will tend to attack previously known
gun positions and any fresh ones it.can locate. Deception
by the antiaircraft defense is, therefore, very important,
though it is not easy to practice it. The following expedi ents were adopted at Tobruk apart from those enumerated
above: (1) Pxtensive use was made, of dummy gun positions; these
were provided with portable dunmy equipment and "smoke and
flash" apparatus. These positions w. re also used in con junction with the alternative positions. When properly in stalled, these portable dummies may deceive even photo graphic reconnaissance, and they can be readily adapted to
any nature of country. A stuka pilot attacks what he sees,
and if he sees a dust cloud with flashes coming out of it
he often takes it for an antiaircraft position. In August,
40 Ju. 87s. and 88s attacked five heavy antiaircraft gun
sites; but, as three of the heavy antiaircraft sites were
dummies, and tho other two defended themselves with only
half their guns, the harbour barrage suffered little..
(2) Normal camouflage methods, that is,-painting, fitting
into the existing ground plan, or simulation of other ob jects.
(3) Appointment of special officers to organize the car •
mouflageparticularly of new sites,
(4) Study of survival — Many examples occured of 30
or 40 bomb craters within 100 yards of the gun position.
All guns pits were therefore counter-sunk to give maximum
protection, and constructed or strengthed to stand up to
1,000 lb. bombs within 10 yards of them, '."here this work
was skimped, casualties increased.
Army Training Memorandum No, 43 .
Anything moving is easy to see, as a pilot is constantly
looking for moving objects — . Anything stationary is
comparatively difficult to distinguish, Many good camou flaged position;? are given away by mgr^lookirig_up. The
white of the skin is easily seen if
for anything concealed.
Air Forces General Information Bulletin No.3-12 August' 1942
-179
IV - TACTICS AND TE 3H
4)
Lessons
ja^cbnt1 d)
3«£$Ch Unrot^&d Projectile Rocket Projectors are inaccu chances of hitting with high explosives are
s m & y ^ The heavy gun is always infinitely the hetter weap on. Deterrent effect of the 3-inch Unrotated Projectile
Rocket is great, however, and they are extremely useful
for boosting up defenses especially when barrage is neces sary. The new type "K" of ammunition appears to be a pos sible solution to the saturation raid.
M.A.R.48431-London-16 June 1942
The British fire prepared to resort to a form of barrage
fire at definite points (and Not areas) in case their gun
layer tube becomes so cluttered up that it will be impos sible to obtain data on any particular aircraft in a "sat uration" or "mass" raid. The data is worked out purely
from the map, the range tables and estimated heights based
on the best information available. If, at any time, a gun
layer can get a target on which it can do continuous follow ing, that site will automatically engage, that target as
opposed to joining in the barrage.
M.A.R.48420-London-15 June 1942
Some of the apparent trends for the 40 mm. antiaircraft gun
are : (1) The "Stiffkey" Stick (a mechanical sight corrector)
is in production. — —
(2) The self-propelled antiaircraft mounts will be used
for antitank role as well . The United States practice
of using telescope will be followed.
(3). No predictors will be used in Division Artillery of
Home Forces,
(4) The predictors may be eliminated from use with all
self-propelled mounts due tdJ^Uieir causing an increased length
of time to go into action*
,-vA*. .R.4870S-London-3 July 1942
Japanese a»ti:
f^nel bombs
-180
(in Rangoon)
(the 50 lb.
IV - TACTICS AMD TECHNIQUE 4)
J ,p • Jf Lessons and Trends (cont'd:]
< ^
^ ^ I P f f
*
type) were devastating in their effect upon people in
the open, but practically instantaneous, and upon detonat ing, the bombs sent a flat come of splinters from knee height
to chest height for 50 to 60 yards with deadly effect. Some
splinters took higher trajectory and were lethal to distances
as great as 300 yards. In one location, where many slit
trenches had been provided, frightened (civilians)
fled from the trenches where they had been safe, and as a
result, suffered frightful casualtiese — Informational Intelligence Summary No.19
. April 27, 1942 - A.A.C.#319.13/AUH-19
It has been shown by Professor Blackett, and the results
of trials have supported his theory, that high velocity auto matic light antiaircraft guns firing a percussion fuze at
120 rounds per minute should be several times more effective
against aircraft at heights of 10,000 to 16,000 ft. than
3.7" guns firing a time fuze at 12 rounds per minute. The
self-destroying time of existing 40 mm. ammunition, which
is designed only for use against low flying targets, is 5
to 6 seconds. To enable the 40 mm. gun to be used in an
intermediate role for lethal effect against targets up to
10,000 or 12,,000 ft,, with visual control by day and search light control (Elsie) by night, and for deterrent effect
against targets up to 16,000 ft. by night, ammunition with
bright tracer burning for 12 seconds is under design. The
Germans make extensive use of Light Antiaircraft guns fir ing bright tracer for deterrent effect against targets up
to 13,000 to 14,000 ft. by night, but it is considered
doubtful whether they have developed the use .of Light Anti aircraft guns fired in an intermediate role for lethal ef fect.
'
:.•
A. A. C. #319.13/AUC-33 J anuary 1942
In rocky country, where pickets cannot be driven in, pre dictor control— of the Bofors guns has not be eg
V 1 i?*
«* n *
-181
IV - TACTICS AND TEC
4
%
W Jkd trends \(conttJ3)
l e — - as'the gun mounting is apt to "slew" during firing,
thus' putting the predictor out of line with the gun.
Incl.-BES-333-6 May 1942
When (light antiaircraft) guns have been sited on dusty
or sandy ground it has been found impossible to lay stead ily or accurately on targets at automatic fire due to the
continuous cloud of dust or sand obscuring the view.
Incl.-3ES-333-6 May 1942
A large number of misfires occurred in Middle East which are
believed to have been largely due to faulty primers, other
possible sources of error having been eliminated as far as
possible. There were cases of misfires being due to feed
cylinders becoming tight caused by sand, and one case of a
broken pin securing firing hole bush. By actuating the fir ing mechanism with a forward movement of the loading lever,
it has usually (not always) been found that the round will
fire the second time. This procedure not only saves the
delay in following the drill book misfire procedure, but
enables the gun to continue to engage the target. It is
recommended that this should be introduced into the drill
book as the first action to be tak^n on "misfire".
Incl.-BES~333-6 May 1942
The predictor No. 3 is an admirable instrument in hands
of a well trained detachment but takes a considerable time
to establish a reputation for efficiency. If issued to
partially trained troops they may lose confidence in it and
revert to the Forward Area Sight.
Inc1.-BES-333-6 May 1942
At Munster (29 Januar craft were unable they were not e
A
y of the attacking air get owing to cloud and
5r searchlights. A single
IV - TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE
4)
Lessons and Trends (cont'd)
aircraft, arriving over the area about one hour after the
main body, was immediately heavily engaged and was able to
drop bombs in the centre of the gun defended area as indi cated by gun flashes*
Hq Ji.A,Command"Glenthorn",3tanmore,Middx.
28 February 1942-A. A. C.#319.131/ANX
The Chief Instructor for antiaircraft artillery at Malta
has stated:-— "T,vhen a fort is receiving heavy and contin uous air attacks, in order to keep a foui' gun heavy anti aircraft battery in action one needs an extra gun detach ment and a second complete command post, officers and all".
M. A • R,23-Gibraltar-12 May 1942
B I B I
I O G R A P H Y
(l) Antiaircraft Command (Air Defenses of Great Britain)
Standing Operation Instructions.
a) No. 3 - Procedure to be used in operations rooms.
b) No. 4 - Measurement of Cloud Base,
c) No. 5 - Survey of Heavy Antiaircraft Gun Sites.
d) No. ? - Engagement of Unseen Targets.
e) No.13 - Issue and Security of Aircraft Recognition
Signals
f) No.20 - Engagement of Targets by Z.A.A, (Rocket) Bat
teries,
g) No.21 - (Appendix J) Zone Concentrations using man ual1 plotting board or semi-automatic plotter,
h) No.22 - Supply of meteorological reporvts to antiair craft gun sites ,< - " • '
i) No.30 - Manning and state of readiness of light an tiaircraft guns.
j)
No.31 - Ammunition,
k) No,33 l) No,36 m) No.38 Stations'.
n) No.41 o) 'No.45
- Royal Air Firce Night Operations.
- Engagement of Seen Targets,
- Action on receipt of 'Stand to' and 'Action
- Ground Defense
- -antiaircraft Cooperation with^- ft
IV - TACTICS AND TECHN:
- Operational Command
-^'Ko. 52 - States of Readiness
r) No. 54 - Gun Operations Rooms
s) No. 55 - Fighter Nights
A,A.C•319•131/VG
(2) Engagement'of Unseen Targets.
Incl.#1-AAC. 319.131/APE
(3) British Close Support Bombing Directive.
M.I.D,-/ATX-19 June 1941
(4) Antiaircraft Artillery Emplacements, Layouts and Com mand Posts - Drawings,
M.A.R.456l8-I,ondon-3 December 1941
(5v) The German Motorized army - translation of a confiden tial French general staff study (Vichy),
M.a.R.25360-W-Vichy-3 April 1942-132/BV
(6) 48th Antiaircraft Brigade Standing Orders (Air De*»
fenses Great Britain).
M.A.R.48081-London-30 April 1942
(7) Manuals of Antiaircraft Defense (British) - Pmploy ment and Gunnery.
November 1941-13l/XU
(8) 48th Antiaircraft Brigade Operation Instructions
(Fighting Book Instructions).
M.A.R.48264-ijondon-6 June 1942
(9) Organization of Gun Defended Areas for Fire Against
Unseen Targets, '
Incl.6-M.A,L.46140-131/VG
V - TRAINING
l)
Schools and Courses
Great Britain because of its small size, has a great advar
tage compared with our army schools. (Officers) :
short courses may be given without an officer's losing more
than two days in travel plus the time actually spent with a
course, The general theory (of officers courses)
requires that students be potential instructors, and that prior
to attending the school they be well acquainted with their
train him to
own and their juniors! duties. The schools master his own job better and to bccome a better teacher for
those junior to him. The majority of courses are short and
intense, normally lasting for periods of two or three weeks.
Hence the courses do not cripple combat organizations, after
short courses officers return to their original units and
duty.
M.A.R.46395-London-29 January 1942
The Commandant of the Royal Artillery School, Larkhill, has
a great influence on the technical training of units, through out Great Britain • This he accomplishes by means of semi annual conferences attended by all senior artillerymen,
by the teachings of the school, by training pamphlets, and
perhaps most important by Instructors of Gunnery. The
Corps of Instr ctors of gunnery is a pool under the control
of the Commandant, School of artillery. In addition to
those instructors employed on the School staff, others are
detailed as instructors at practice camps and with'units.
The Instructors are rotated on these duties to insure that
current thought and procedure is spread throughout the ser vice, The term "I,G." (Instructor of Gunnery) is
greatly respected throughout•the British Army; qualified
instructors have the letters "I.G," printed after their
names in the Army List, ana senior commanders are proud of
the "I.G." after their names. The School also instructs a
group of senior enlisted men in a Gunnery Staff Course, and
those selected from this course become Assistant Instruc tors of Gunnery. This "A*I,G,", as the name implies, assists
the Instructors of Gunnery in the^classroom and in the field.
In general, the "A.I.G." is thfe .eip|]@
ance *.nd service of the piece Jf flES^
V I V O L
-185
ichools and Courses (cont'd)
men and giving them high non-commissioned ratings, they procure
personnel who make excellent instructors for officer and non commissioned classes for units, and at the same time a very val uable assistant to the Instructor.
M.A.R.46395-London-29 January 1942
An assembly of all commanders of Army, Corps and Divisional
Artillery is held at the School of -.rtillery, Larkhill, twice
each year. At this confercnce a kind of critique of the past
six months' effort is conducted, policies and plans for the
future arc outlined. New developments in equipment are demon strated. ^nd proposals for changes in equipment and technique
are discussed.
M.A.R,45840-London-13 December 1941
Due to the recent addition of a Light anti-aircraft regiment
to each Division it has been considered essential to institute
courses for Regimental Commanders'and Staff Officers of these
Regiments, to teach their tactical handling. The course will
be conducted at the School of Royal Artillery, Larkhill.
i,uA.R.43005-London-l6 May 1941
The following new courses have just been established - —
at. the school of Royal Artillery, Larkhill, for training
of Officers of both Artillery and Infantry in the handling of
light antiaircraft units being assigned to tactical organi zations of the Field Army.
(l) For Antiaircraft Officers.
Regimental commanders and battery commanders of light anti aircraft regiments of the Royal Artillery (40 mm Bofors) ear marked for employment with divisions of the Field Army will
attend course of two-weeks •'du&aki.on covering the general pic ture of organization, adminltstA t ion and handling of forma tion of the Field Army and i o ^ employment of the light anti , aircraft regiments in the .deferent phases of battle; size
of class 20 officers. *
Antiaircraft
-186
V - TRAINING
l)
Schools and Courses (cont'd)
Regimental Commanders of Light Anti-Aircraft Regiments, anc
Commanders and Staff of divisions and brigades will attend
courses together at Larkhill covering the handling of Light
Anti-Aircraft Artillery from the point of view of divisions
and brigades. This is a short course of four days, 18 offi cers per class, 12 light antiaircraft regimental commanders
and 6 brigade or division commanders or staff officers of
formations to which some of the antiaircraft officers belong,
}H,A•R•42798-Londo n-18 April 1941
A course was attended at the School of Artillery, Larkhill,
from July 7 to 11 inclusive, for Regimental Commanders of
Light Antiaircraft Regiments, Royal Artillery, and Comman ders and Staffs of Formations to which they belong. Its
purpose was to teach the handling of Light antiaircraft
Artillery from the point of view of Divisions and Brigades,
It is designed for 20 officers and is intended to give offi cers a general picture of the organization, administration,
and handling of formations of field army and to show how
Light .intiaircraft Regiments should be employed during dif ferent phases of battle. The course was conducted by lec tures, demonstrations, problems, and discussions. The class
was divided into six syndicates (groups of four members ex cept one of five) representing the Formations or Divisions
to which the units and staffs were assigned for the solution
of problems and presentation of views. The conduct of the
course was excellent,
' M,AiR.43660-London-17 July 1941
At the final session of the Larkhill course for iintiaircraft
Regimental Commanders, etc., one of the Directing Staff very
ably summed up the conclusions arrived at during the course.
I.hen he finished, criticism, comment and suggestions were
called for. The class concurred in his summary — which
was an accurate presentation of the composite, in fact prac tically unanimous, conclusions of the Staff and students as
I had noted them throughout the course, • ^
M... R.43269-London-16 Jnn«f: 1941-*;,
-187
JBELJSSEL.
V - TRAINING
\
w
JchpolC^an^ Qpura|'|^UIt1 d)
,, ,,.. „ry sre
'taken out of the War office ana placed under a Major
General with headquarters at Windsor, This headquarters
(Antiaircraft training establishments - AATE) has a complete
training staff including several officers of the Auxiliary-
Territorial Service (women), which service is now to fur nish part of the personnel to man the antiaircraft defenses
of Great Britain, This headquarters has no administrative
or operational functions. Under this headquarters comes
the School for antiaircraft defense commanded by a Briga dier with headquarters at Shrivenhara, This school consists
of three separate units or wings, Gunnery, Searchlight and
Wireless, The Officer Candidates Training Units for Anti aircraft, commanded by a Brigadier with headquarters at
Shrivenham, comes under Antiaircraft training establishments,
M.A,R.A4205-London-25 August 1941
The School for Antiaircraft Defense with headquarters at
Shrivenham is commanded by a Brigadier ana consists of
three schools or wings. Each wing has a commandant and a
senior instructor of gunnery. The Gunnery Wing at kanoroier
on the south Wales coast, handles all instruction of both
light and heavy Antiaircraft guns with some instruction in
use of Giln Layer and Unrotated Projectiles (Rockets). The
Searchlight Vang is located at Shrivenham and handles all
instruction on searchlights and searchlight control. The
operational side of Visual Indicating Equipment and Radio
Searchlight Control Equipment . (Elsie)-— is also taught.
The wireless Wing is located at Watchet and teaches the
technical side of all Antiaircraft radio detection equipment.
The courses at the Gunnery Wing in general fall into two
groups:
(1) War .Gunnery courses of approximately three months
including the 3.7 inch gun, Sperry Predictor and height-
finding, 3 inch and 4.5 inch guns, Vickers Predictor, Light
Antiaircraft gunnery and equipment and General Subjects
such as Tactics, Unrotated Projectiles, Target practice
firing, etc. One week's leave. is»gr%rted in the middle of
v \% rel="nofollow">
the course, t (2) Refresher courses -on spedl^wsftjects given to all
ranks as the occasiprjf&emand§. *lhese courses are usually
T.
i\;
"
-188
•V - TRAINING
l)
Schools and Courses (cont'd)
of two or three weeks' duration and are intended primarily
to bring officers up to date on latest methods and equip ment so they can act as unit instructors when they return
to their organizations.
M.A•R.44125-London-20 August 1941
In order to reduce the large number of officers found un suitable for training when examined at the School
of Antiaircraft Defense, Wireless Wing, Ratchet, a pro cedure has been prescribed for the pre-selection — of
officers for training as Instructors Fire Control. Officers
on prepared lists are interviewed at suitable cen ters by qualified instructors fire control under ar rangements made — - with Field Commanders. Inter viewing officers select candidates in accordance with the
following instructions:
(1) Candidates should not be of higher rank than Captain.
(2) They should (except in very exceptional circumstances
as to suitability) be not older than 35 years of age.
(3) They should, if possible, have a sound working know ledge of electricity and magnetism, mathematics and elements
of trigonometry. A knowledge of radio is desirable but not
absolutely essential.
Interviewing officers report on candidates to Commands
.classifying them into four - — categories:
(l) Those with sufficient up-to-date knowledge to pass
an immediate examination in the — — (subject listed in
a syllabus) and to undertake an immediate War Special
Wireless Course.
.(2) Those fit to undertake "A" after a period of pri vate study of one month.
(3) Those considered likely to be suitable to undertake
"A" after basic courses in not more than two (subjects)
•(4) Those unsuitable,
k.A.R.4676l-London-27 February 1942
The —The all
headquarters of the Antiaircraft officer Cadet Training
School is located-at a regular army post near •
cadets are housed in permanent modern barracks (with
modern conveniences) . The school is commanded by a
V - TRAILING
l)
i Schools -and courses&(cont'd)
Brigadier who Jiafc a complete administrative staff* Each
V - ;]unit Ijtas; ^lieutenant Colonel in command with a staff for
- adpu^tistration as well as a chief instructor who is in gen eral charge of training. A unit usually consists of an
administrative battery and four training batteries. Two of
the units at the school are for basic training and one
for technical training. A training battery is commanded by
a Major who has a Captain for administration and five or six
Capt .ins or Lieutenants and six or more Non-commissioned Offi cers as instructors. The training batteries are charged
with the administration of the cadets during their entire five
months of training. The intake to the training batteries is
not constant but an attempt is made to keep cadets entering
each battery at the rate of forty per month giving a
strength of two.hundred cadets per battery at all times. The
battery conducts basic training the first two months and
again the fifth month. Instruction during the third and
fourth month is given by one of the technical batteries. The
total number of cadets that can be conveniently handled by
all three units at one time is sixteen hundred. Cadets
receive training only on the one phase of Antiaircraft which
they have been with as enlisted men, unless their qualificat i o n s are such as to recommend that they be trained in
another phase. Physical training and massed games are
stressed as this subject is considered of prime importance
on gun sites in Great Britain. Infantry training, weapons
and minor tactics receives much attention because the school,
including cadets, has a permanent defensive area to man. It
was stated to me by several instructors that probably not
over 25% of the cadets have had sufficient mathematical
training to grasp ballistics and gunnery and therefore most
of this type of instruction had to be simple and practical.
All candidates for commision come from the ranks and regu lations lay down certain necessary qualifications such as
length of service and educational qualifications. However
neither of these regulations are strictly followed. Leader ship is considered the most important qualification. The
principle objective of the school is to teach leadership and
make each cadet a qualified instructor in his assigned phase
of anti-aircraft. The Britisi^gpadmit that specializing in
one of the three phases of^ l^tMtcraft at this stage of
training of an officer,i# able but they feel that
time and the need for.jurdb&J^icers is so important that
•V - TRAINING
l)
Schools and courses (cont'd)
they must train them in this manner, TK| i-schoOl-at^era^s^'ll
1 to bring the cadets gradually up to th| ^|atus of | |
by using them as non-commissioned offi'fcj#:g ^uring £ ^ $
the second, third and fourth months aria as officers the
fifth month. During the first four months the cadets eat
in messes run by regular soldiers just the same as battery
messes. The fifth Month the mess is run more as an offi cers mess, with waitresses and complete table service. The
method of selection of candidates for the school is, first
selection by regimental comm-nders, then by a regimental
board of officers, then by a divisional board. This lat ter board has the chief function of trying to keep up the
standards between candidates from different regiments.
According to the school this doesn't always work as some
regiments and divisions always send in good candidates
while others send in poor ones. The school can turn them
back at any time but recently has not turned back over 5%
apparently because of the dearth of good material and need
for junior officers. Observer's comment: The system of
teaching cadets to be instructors is excellent. 2nd lieu tenants going out to antiaircr ft organizations in the field
must know all the details possible about their equipment
and drill. However in such technical work as antiaircraft
and with technique and tactics (and materiel) changing
as rapidly as the-y are, it is believed essential that all
officers should be well grounded in fundamentals and as
little dependent on rule of thumb methods as possible,
M.A.R • 44170-London-2.2 August 1941
The Antiaircraft Command in Air Defense Great Britain ob tains an allotment from the War Office for students to
attend the following courses. The Antiaircraft Command
then sub-allots vacancies except for those conducted for
training of tradesmen (which is allotted directly to Anti aircraft Units by the War Office),
(1) School of Antiaircraft Defense, a) Gunnery (Wing) Course
b) Searchlight (Wing) Course
c) Wireless (Wing) Course
(2) Royal Ordnance Factory Course (40 mm. Equipment) (3) Cooks Course
i U
-191
u
•>«*
*
ffi" .I
V - TRAINING i)
a m
4 Is*
V*
& 100% Irind(cou5ses"(cont' d)
fj-kih) v Coarse
Physical. Training Courses Course,
Passive Air Defense Course
Camouflage Course
Staff Course (Camberby)
School of Administration
(10) Intelligence Course
(11) Training of Tradesmen
(12) Course at Army School of Hygiene.
Antiaircraft Command itself conducts the following schools;
U ) staff Duties
( 2 ) Recognition of Aircraft (3) Mreless
(4) Dive-bombing
M.A.R.46712-London-23 February 1942
The Antiaircraft Command Recognition School was formed in
England in February 1940 with the object of training
unit instructors in Recognition of Aircraft. The school
now takes seventy students (26 officers ana 44 non-com missioned officers) per course, the instructional staff con sisting of four officers, including the chief instructor
and commandant Major. In addition ,there is an adjutant
and usual administrat ive pers onnel, the school being a self-
contained unit. At present a number of vacancies on each
course .are allotted to T.ar Office for Field Army personnel,
end at various times members of the Navy, Royal Air Force
Royal Observer Corps and Civil Defense Forces have attended
the school,
M.A.R,47328-London-10 • April .1942.
Eafih Antiaircraft Division has Divisional Schools composed
of several wings, including Heavy and Light Antiaircraft,
Searchlight, I.ireless, Motor Transportation, Physical Train ing, Aircraft Recognition, Tactical Training, Passive Air
Defense, and others. Certain, Divisional Schools are
also designated as Corps S .ings, and in a particular
Corps, the Corps-will pntf ourses for that School
V - TRAINING
l)
Schools and courses (cont'd)
"wfcJ'lvtSSj i
T
""or .ing.
M.A.R.46711-London-23 February 1942
There are attached hereto typical syllabi for Gunnery, Search light, Gun Layer, Physical Training, and General Duties lings
(Schools) as conducted in an Antiaircraft. Division in Anti aircraft Command of Air Defenses of Great Britain, The vari ous Antiaircraft Divisional Schools all carry out slightly
different courses depending upon the state of training of
Units in the Division. ?
M. A .R, 4732.7-London-10 April 1942
The principal object of the Gunnery and Searchlight Wings
of Antiaircraft Divisional Schools is to train unit
instructors. In addition to imparting technical knowledge,
therefore, courses at these Schools are designed to teach
students
(1) How to instruct
(2) How to organize training.
^ M.A *R.46958-Incl .Vl-London-319.131/APN
No establishment is authorized for antiaircraft Brigade
Schools. They may be organized on an unofficial basis as
considered necessary by Corps Commanders.
" M.A.R.46958-Incl.#l-London-319.131/APN
At Larkhill in June 1942 (the Artillery School) the
sj ectators were enabled to examine the new 17 pounder Anti tank gun, which appeared to be a very formidable weapon.and
should provide an adequate answer as far as performance is
concerned, in penetration of armour. Several rounds
were fired at a stationary hull-down- tank target cat a
range of 1200 yards, also several rounds at a small house
target at a range of 1500 yards. It was particularly notice-
cable the shortness of the«time the. shell took to arrive at
-193
T'
i
, ,;
m.
iff V - TRAINING l)
""
-
,
Schools and courses (cont'd)
the target, this being due to the relatively high muzzle veloc ity of this gun. The results appeared to be very good, in dicating that the gun at this range was extremely accurate.
BES-350-Hashington, D.C.-27 June 1942
In demonstration No. 8, at Larkhill in June 1942 at the
Artillery School a Bofors 20 mm. light antiaircraft gun was
shown in an antitank role, engaging (a moving tank tar get) . On the first run the target was engaged by pre dictor control, using single shots. Results were only fair ly accurate ana the rate of fire was comparatively slow. On
the second run the crew engaged the target with forward area
sights which had been developed by the School of iartillery,
again using single shots. Much better results and a higher
rate of fire were obtained in this way. at the final run
the gun crew engaged the target with automatic fire, again
using the forward area sights, A very high rate of fire
and, talcing all things into consideration, very good shooting,
was carried out by the detachment. It was pointed out to
the spectators that the crews of the Bofors used in Demon stration No. 8 were not specially picked and had not used
this equipment in this role prior to 2 days before the
demonstration.
BES-350-TWashington, D.C.-27 June 1942
16 officers from Antiaircraft Command were selected from a
number of volunteers in November 1941, as air Observers to
be attached to Bomber Command. In order that they should
not be merely "passengers" but should be capable of taking
their part as operational members of air crews, it was
decided that they should be trained as air gunners, and
fly as front gunners. The selected candidates were given
one week's course at School, antiaircraft Defense, (Search light Wing) Shrivenham, and then a 3 weeks' course at an
Officer Training Unit of Bomber Command, after v/hich they
were attached to a Bomber Group. — ( U p to 27 January
24 reports had been submitted by the*se officers of flights
over enemy territory)--—.
a M.A.R.46431-London^c February 1942 FX . A. ,«. 14 V -'
- 194
V - TRAINING
2)
Individual Training
4
The policy for training individuals of all ranks in tb
Antiaircraft Command Great Brit in is:
First: To ensure that each Officer and man has the
necessary elementary military training to fit
him to take his place in the unit as a soldier.
Second: To ensure that each Officer and man is brought
speedily to the required standard of efficiency
in his particular role according to the units
establishment.
Third: To maintain the standard of performance of each
individual by constant exercising and testing
at his primary role.
Fourth: To train each individual gradually in a secondary
role. In the case of non-commissioned officers
and officers this is the role of the next
senior in rank. •
M.A.d.46958-Incl.#l-London-319.131/APN
General reports on courses from a variety of Schools,
including the General Headquarters Battle School, all
emhpasize the low standard of physical fitness of Officer
and Non-commissioned Officer students. These reports state
that, as a general rule, this lack of physical fitness
applies more to junior than senior officers. Leaders must,
of course, be even more fit than their men, and this is,
therefore, a matter which•clearly requires further attend
tion, -*• M. A . R. 48014-London-22 May 1942,'
The degree of success a unit or formation achieves in
battle depends above all else upon the will to win. There
is a time in all battles when the men on both sides are
exhausted« It is the man who can hold on longest and who
fights with the gre-test determination who will w i n T h e
will to win'requires constant attention. It is. made up
of many factors, two of the most important being Physical
Fitness and Confidence irffffig^rps we use. Physical fit ness is difficult to j^tJfriaatinn is-the enemy
of physical fitness ana9'MBiSU &.
- 195
-41M
U1M
V 2)
Individual Training (cont'd)
the more need there is for training. The knowledge that
we (New Zealand division in North Africa) could move, long
distances and fight at night proved to be of the greatest
assistance in all our planning and gave us a great feeling
of confidence when carrying out our operations. In Africa
in the move North to cut the fortress line and in the bat tles around Tobruk, wherever we used our pace of 40 miles
in 24 hours combined with movement at night, we always
caught the enemy unprepared. Success was immediate and
casualties often extremely light.
AAG #319.131/AZN
Teach your officers and men to think for themselves one
jump ahead of the game. Slackness, lethargy must be jumped,
on. Explain to all ranks that we are up against a cunning
and ruthless foe and that to beat him requires greater
cunning on our part. Let the men know all the time what
you are doing.
M.A.R.4S277-London-8 June 1942
In British antiaircraft Regiments (Heavy and Light),
basic recruit training, la.sts one month, then three
months are allotted for 'specialist' training as either
drivers, gunners, specialists etc., after which recruit
proceeds to unit for a further five months collective train ing on the basis of four days a week collective and two
days individual and maintenance; recruits may then be con sidered as trained fighting men.
Incl.#7-M ^.R.45572-London-28 November 1941
(Combat Security Training) cannot be overstressed.
During a German reconnaissance in force on September 15,
an armored car regimental commander was forced to abandon
his armored car because, of mech$ difficulties, In
it the Germans found most of t h ^ tions orders, instruc tions, and codes which were in then on the Western
- 196
M. A. R.2008-Cairo,Egypt-10 October 1941
The (British) are equipping (dive bombing)
planes with sirens and klaxons. The Commanding General
of the Home Forces and other high commanders are anxious
to have these planes dive on their troops in their normal
training, but up to the present time they have not been
able to make these arrangements, almost without exception,
they feel that this should be done until the ground soldier
becomes accustomed to the din and noise.
M.A,R.42254-London-29 January 1941
Fifteen antiaircraft officers from Antiaircraft Command,
Air Defense of Great Britain, are sent for one week's duty
with armored units to obtain knowledge of armored force
vehicles. This is considered essential so that officers of
antiaircraft units which have a dual antiaircraft and anti tank role may familiarize themselves with tanks to include
characteristics^ capabilities, limitations, and tactical
use. These officers will ultimately have service with
Field Forces overseas.
M.A,R.45947-London-22 December 1941
The testing of all "other ranks" (enlisted personnel) in
Elementary Training in Protection against Gas ordered in
antiaircraft Command Training Instruction No. 9 has now
been completed. The proportion of failures in the results ;
so far reported indicates an immediate task of some5magni tude, if heavy gas casualties are to be avoidad3 The con tinued elementary training,. ana subsequent retching of
those who have failed will therefore take precedence over
all other forms of gas training. This elementary train ing" will be selective ana will be directed to the.particu lar weakness manifested by each individual during the test.
No failures in the Inspection Tests and Standard Tests can
be accepted, Withholding of proficiency pay from soldiers
who fail in these sections through lack of application will
V - TRAINING
.J iiJ: .1 . •' Vjt /
Individual Trkining^.cont1 d)
it'i pi £ < ** • i "»i •*
therefore Be tne normal sequel.
Incl•#10-M.A.Ltr•A7759-London-28 April 1942
2)
The following suggestions are made regarding dark adaptation
of personnel:
(1) T'hen action is expected, accommodation lighting
should be dimmed.
(2) The period of handing over duties in darkness should
be not less than 15 minutes.
(3) During intervals in action (e.g. on "Stand at Ease")
detachments should not go into any artificially lighted
place,
(4) All gun and searchlight detachments must be continu ally exercised in periods of inactivity at taking post and
moving about in complete darkness.
(5) Personnel whose duties involve the actual observa tion of targets by night should be fully pre-adapted before
action by wearing pre-adaptation goggles at least 45 min utes before assuming duty.
(6) If it is inevitable that a man must enter a brightly
lit room during night operations, a useful measure of dark
adaptation may be retained by keeping one eye closed during
the period of exposure to the bright light.
The following suggestions are made regarding conservation*
of night vision:
(1) For the comfortable use of brightly illuminated in struments in the dark, some men may require to use tinted
glasses these should be available for issue to those
desiring them,
(2) Personnel operating instruments should be instructed
to close their eyes momentarily when guns are fired. The
introduction of flashless propellant for heavy antiaircraft
guns will greatly reduce this difficulty.
(3) Screening from direct flash or glare by parapets or
canvas should be developed l°ca.Lkv wherever practicable and
found necessary in respect, ^J^^Tsonnel under paragraph b
above,'
%% V |
(4) Projector s^oTtfri&fiuallyoperated search lights- gho^lid l^v^^omm^'^Sm of "blinker" goggles so that
virhen \ th^J^Jplrent' end of the beam the base of
the , be afti" is,W* ,.ofe ac&ii^ cf.
... '
, •
-198
V - TRAINING
2)
Ss>
Individual Training (cont'd)
(5) The be'st optical instruments should be reserve*
personnel whose duties involve actual observation of t<
by night, and stands, steadies, or control pillars d.eve
oped for all binoculars and telescopes.
(6) Staring should be avoided when looking into the dark
for objects, since these are best seen when the eye is
looking a little (10°) to side of the object to be viewed.
If illuminated instruments must be referred to during this
procedure they also should not be stared at. • M.A.R.46668-London-19 February 1942
The United States Technical Training Command (of the
Army ir Forces) is introducing in its courses, thorough
training in the reading of blinker light Morse code. Based
on careful studies of the ground-air communications facili ties in all present and possible theaters of operations,
the Directorate of Communications has concluded that such
training is absolutely essential, and that all air crews
should be able to read Morse Code by blinker lights at a
rate of not less than five words a minute. The efficient
radio operator can take about 30 words of Morse Code a min ute, but the same operator,' switching over to sight from
hearing, may be able to'take only two words a minute by
blinker lights. It is a proven fact that efficient opera tions depend on efficient communications from ground-to
air, and vice versa, - In instances where this cannot be
supplied by radio, the blinker light system comes to the
rescue. Inability of a fighter crew to read blinker light
signals.from the ground fast enough, could easily cause
failure to intercept a flight of bombers in time to pre vent serious damage. One needs but little imagination to
think of countless examples, a little practice with blinker
lights by our air crews in the field* is good insurance
against a day of emergency.
Air Forces General Information Bulle tin IJo.3-12 august 1942
3)
Unit Training
%$' / 'r;
The organization of Training insideJintjEaircraft unit
V « TRAIN,
in p w % fv ;A S% w,
r I a)
v ,;>
IS n & "U * is the responsibility of the Commanding Officer. Methods
may vary in different units according to circumstances and
the fullest latitude is to be given to Commanding Officers
in the organisation of the training in their commands,
It is of the greatest importance that the best use be made
of the time that is available for training on site.
Training sessions, and especially those carried out on sites,
are .short and are held as far as possible at regular
hours. A man who has done only 30 minutes really good
training on his site ends the day,feeling that he has
done a better day's work than a man who has hung about for
2 hours listening to something v/hich he has heard many
times before.
Incl.#1-M.A.R.469 58-London-319.13l/APN
British training regiments specialize either as Antiaircraft
Searchlight, Heavy Antiaircraft Gun, Light Antiaircraft Gun
or Antiaircraft Rocket regiments. Recently there were
in Great Britain,
9 - Heavy intiaircraft training regiments
8 - Light Antiaircraft tra.in.ing regiments
13 - antiaircraft Searchlight training regiments
5 ~ Antiaircraft Rocket (U.P.) training regiments
There are a total of (about 16) practice camps in Great
Britain. Some are for Heavy antiaircraft Guns and
others are for Light Antiaircraft Guns. At present all Anti aircraft Rocket firing is done at Heavy Antiaircraft Gun
practic camps. All of the practice camps are small areas
on the coast where antiaircraft firing can be done over the
water. Cooperative air squadrons are located near all the
camps and frequently on the same reservation. The camps
have commandants, Instructors in Gunnery, (both commissioned
non-commissioned) administrative staffs and some per manent personnel for maintenance of the camp and equipment.
The camps are also used by operational batteries, re lieved from active gun sites to freshen up and fire target
practices. Searchlight practice is conducted at training
regiment stations, rather than at the practice camps.
Recruits are received and processed by the training regiments.
During their first month training is-dte«voted almost exclu sively to basic training such drill and physical
V - TRAINING
3)
Unit Training (contfd)
training. The second month is devoted to persorMgl se^e^
tion tests and technical training in the phase of Antiair craft to which the new battery is assigned. Each map
must become expert in at least one position during this
month. This training of recruits is under the perman ent instruction staff. At the same time the cadre from
an active battery, — - undergoes a refresher course in tech nical duties. The recruits and. the cadre are wedded
at the end of the first month the cadre going most of
the instruction under close supervision of the permanent staff.
M.A.R.43660-London-17 June 1941
The British place great stress on having well disciplined
and trained soldiers. From personal observation, I believe
the average British Antiaircraft soldiers, individually and
as a team have a high state of discipline and training.
They are alert during training and training inspections.
Each soldier does his utmost to make a good impression.
However, in my opinion, during gun drill there is too much
noise too much sounding off. The British quote Lt. Gen.
L. J. McNair, U.S. Army, as stating after the recent maneuvers
of the 2d and 3d armies that ,"there is no question many of
the. weaknesses developed on these maneuvers are repeated
again for lack of discipline." and they add comments to the
effect that the sentimental dreams of a "Democratic" army
do not produce an effective .army.
M.a.R.466.92-Lon j.on-21 February 1942
I was attached to tiie Headquarters of the V Corps in
Great Britain — for maneuvers for the period 28 Sep tember to -1— 3 October 1941. I believe that both offi cers and other ranks arc in excellent physical condition,
sturdy and tough, well trained, smart, serious, interested
and enthusiastic, The movement on the 29 September from
its concentration area to its objective, was speedy, orderly,
and well conducted. — It reached its objective, a dis tance of 70 miles in a little over 12 hours, half in darkness. Camouflage nets were used on vehicles as 'soon as a
halt was made. The vehicle density/if! daylight was from 12
-201
• Unit Train,ir% (cont'd)
\t \\
'
&
t o w S Vehicles to the mile. The columns travelled about
15 miles in the hour. This exercise offered the first
opportunity for Antiaircraft regiments in the Corps and
its affiliated Divisions to function with their units.
This has been due to lack of motor vehicles and guns and
to need of available guns in the Air Defense of Great Britain,
No qualified antiaircraft officer was oh the staff of the
Commander of the Royal Artillery of the Corps, nor of
the Division Commanders. The regimental antiaircraft Com mander, at no time, was asked for advice. He received orders
as to v.hat he was to protect and as to the number of guns
to be put at each place.
M.A.R.45427-London-17 November 1941
The British Division Commander has on his staff a staff
officer for physical training, a (pth Antiaircraft divi sion) member of the Army Physical Training Corps, He
is charged with the organization and supervision of physi cal training within the division and operation of the divi sional physical training - — school. Physical training
is required to be conducted daily for at least 30 minutes.
This training embraces boxing, wrestling, unarmed obstacle-
training, swimming, athletics ana games as well as physical
exercises. Each regiment has a regimental officer in charge
of physical training and games whose job it is to supervise
and organize the program within the regiment assisted by the
batter*/ sports officers. Football, cricket, boxing, cross-
country, and other matches are arranged between regiments,
batteries and even individual sites. Regiments often con duct their own football and other leagues. A large number
of matches of all kinds are played during the season with
other service teams and with civilian clubs.
I .A.R.43363-London-25 June 1941
The subjects "Night Operations, £ir%indedhess, and battle
efficiency", are most important .^i^S^mve been previously
emphasized in our cables and repoi^ -^^ Unless Tin! prsthey +.h<=>vare
.stressed in the training of our its efficiency will be
disastrously reduced. v.iierever j;e are without air superiority
;*
^iSBsefctiit
- 202
V - TRAINING
3)
Unit Training (cont'd)
all movements are regulated to night operations.
M•A.R•2008-Cairo,Egypt-10 October 1941
Much stress is placed on anti-gas training in all units in
the Air Defense of Great Britain, This was especially noted
on my visit to the headquarters of the 5th Division and of
all subordinate units of this division from June 2 - 5 inclu sive, It is standing orders that gas masks will be inspected
and tested regularly, that gas mask h versacks be kept clean,
and that all ranks wear respirators while performing their
normal duties from 15:00 to 15:30 hours on Monday of each
'week. The air sentry, however, will not wear his respirator
during this period but will make up the practice drill so
missed, immediately his tour of duty as air sentry is finished.
The gas masks of the men are stored in a recess at the gun
sites so th. t in answer to a warning day or night the men
will have their gas masks at the site and not left in the
bunk house,
M.A * R.43374-London-25 June 1941
Recent operations'have again emphasized the importance of
preparation and attention to detail in the embarkation of
antiaircraft units required for immediate and rapid deploy ment, The following points are stressed:
(1) I articular care is-necessary to ensure correct res ervation of space for antiaircraft units embarking last
especially with regard to equipment. On two recent occa sions a miscalculation resulted in "shut outs".
(2) The early disembarkation of Workshops section is most
desirable in order to ensure and effect repairs to damage to
equipment that has occurred during the voyage.
(3) Where possible the "flight" containing antiaircraft
units should be preceded by an antiaircraft Reconnaissance
party of sufficient strength of complete reconnaissance
of the proposed "layout" and to provide guides for the Anti aircraft units on disembarkation,
(4) The presence of a Staff Officer with Antiaircraft
experience at the ports of embarkation and debarkation is
V - TRAILING
3)
li^g Unit Train:;
\cron0i)
of consMsrabl^ .i/tlue and an officer from each antiaircraft
unit ^Lfttjiid•^f&ere possible supervise the stowing, etc., of
unitsf\$giu%pfocnt and accompany it.
V M,A.R.43615-15 July 1941
The results of field checks in Antiaircraft Command confirm
the experience gained at practice camps that only a minority
of detachments can be considered capable of ensuring that
their equipment is correctly lined up. It dors not appear
to be sufficiently ap reciated that an accurate line-up is
essential if full value is to be obtained from the use of
the Kerrison predictor. The object of lining up is to en sure that all rounds will pass as close as possible to the
intersection of the cross-wires in the layers' telescopes.
However good the laying, continuous line of sight rounds will
not be achieved unless all .avoidable sources of error in
lining up have been removed. The fact that an ^rror for line
will result in an apparent elevation error on a crossing tar get is not sufficiently appreciated. This is shown in Figs.
1 and 2, representing the appearance of tracer for a target
with an angle of sight at the crossing point of about 30°,
Fig. 1 snows the target approaching the crossing point as
seen.by No. 3 and Fig. 2 the same target receding. The con tinuous line snows the tracer resulting, from a correct line
up, and the dotted line the tracer from a bad line up for
line (gun lined up to the left, tracer passing through point
A) and a good line up for elevation.
HiCh
y r \
\
(2) -204
•V - TRAINING
3)
Unit Training (cont'd)
- A a
a !
p i p
In Fig. 1 the tracer is low ancTin Fig. 2 high.
3 on the predictor can correct for constant elevation errors,
he cannot be expected to produce many line of sight rounds
if he is correcting his lay (through no fault of his own)
first for low aind then for high rounds on the same target.
Incl.#3-M.A.R.46598-London-AAC 319.131/APN
It has been noted that units 'equipped with the No. 3 Predic tor tend to neglect, the use of forward area sights in their
training. It must be realised that it is as vital-for these
units as for those without the Predictor to ensure
that all their detachments are properly trained in forward
area sight shooting. The noticeable lack of pre-theatre training in this regard cannot oe attributed to
lack of equipment. • Gun detachments should at least have
beui taught:
(1) The appearance of tracer
(2) Deflections
(3) Application of deflections (using model forward area
sights)
In some cases the selection- of personnel (within the de tachment) is bad. In many cases, very much better re sults could be obtained from the same men by a more intelli gent selection of personnel for the various duties".
British Antiaircraft Training Pamphlet-QC-29 July 1942
(There are)—- three men on watch at a 40 mm Bofors gun
position and there are three watches. One man per watch can
easily be trained to make proper deflections ana the- three
men on watch can fire the gun with the Stiffkey Stick where as normally only one man per detachment is qualified- to make
deflection adjustments with the Kerrison predictor and it
cannot go into action without remainder of crew being alerted
which requires warning and time. In the first target prac tice with a towed sleeve and with two recruit trainers,
using the Stiffkey Stick three hits were obtained out
of seventy rounds. Component trained men o n S t i f f k e y '
Sticks can be turned out in two weeks of technical trai|iingt>
with fifty rounds of firing. In Practice u
1
« ff.m >\ h & !
?.a hws vt
V - TRAINING
%— •
3)
a m ^
U n % gaining (cont'd)
targets and the Stiffkey .Stick 30 percent line of sight
rounds -—(were obtained with recruit layers) •
M. A. R.474A5~London-17 April 1942
4)
Training Films
During the early period of the present war, British Army
Training Films were produced by a variety of Army organiza tions. This system proved inefficient, and in March,
1942, all training film production was placed under the con trol of the Directorate of Army Kinematography• This
Directorate has improved both the quality and the quan tity of British Training Films. It has eliminated much
confusion and duplication of effort. In the British Army,
training films are considered an essential part.of training;
they save time and standardize the most efficient training
methods. They are a compulsory part of the military training
program. One hundred .and sixty-nine films are now in use
and one hundred and eight films are either in production or
are being prepared for immediate production.
M.A.R.48126-London-29 Kay 1942
The following is a partial list of pertinent training films
published or to be published by the British war Office.
ANTIAIRCRAFT
Recognition of Aircraft - British Machines (1940) (Sound)
Part 0* Introduction - Farts of aircraft.
Part 1. Spitfires and Hurricanes.
Part 2. Defiants.
Fart 3* Blenheim Fighter Bomber and Blenheim IV Bomber.
Part 4. (1941) Hampden, Wellington and Hudson.
Fart 5. (1941) Miitley and Botha,
Guns Part Fart Part
3.7 1, 2, 3.
inch (1940) (Sound)
Breech Mechanism,
Recoil System, *
Recoil System - control. ^
,
-206
V - TRAINING
4)
Training Films (cont'd)
Guns Fart Fart Part Part
4.5 inch (1940) (Sound)
1. General Description.
2 and 3. Examination of Equipment and duties of No. 1.
4 and 5. Preparing for action. .
6. Engaging a target.
Height Finding - Principles of (1940) (Sound)
Height Finding - Conversion Gears (1940) (Sound)
Mechanical Part 1. Fart 2. Part 3P Fart 4.
Maths. (1940) Antiaircraft Instruments. (Sound) Addition and Subtraction, Multiplication and division. Solution of triangles. "Memory", Explains graphic range tables and three dimensional cams.
Fredictors - the No. 1 (1941) (Sound)
Fredictors - the No. 2 (1941) (Sound)
Predictors - The Sperry (1940) (Sound)
Fart 1, Examination of equipment.
Fart 2, Tests and adjustments,
Fredictors - The Vickers (1940) (Sound) Part 1, Examination of equipment.
. Part 2. Tests and adjustments.
Range-finders - the U.B.7. (1940) (Sound)
Part 1. General principles.
Part 2. Examination and operation of equipment.
Fart 3. Tests and adjustments.
Anti-gas Equipment (1939) (Sound) use of:
Part 1. Personal anti-gas equipment.
Part 2. Individual gas detectors.
Part 3, Gas alarm and protection against burns, « Part 4. Gas ground detectors, and gas warning signs.
Anti-Gas Equipment for Antiaircraft Units. (Sound)
Anti-Gas Training (1941)
(Sound)
4)
Training M ^ l * ^
CQNCEALME!
Camouflage
f
**
m " ranks, (1941) (Sound)
Camouflage for officers. (1941)
T^'XS
Friend of Foe (1941) (Sound)
Fart 1. Recognition of British armored fighting vehicles.
Fart 2. » » »» » » »
Tactics - Light Tanks (1939; (Sound)
Part 1, Illustrates principles of tank tactics.-Diagram matic,
Fart 2, Suggested ways of de-ling with tactical situations.
Forcing a crossing and penetrating antitank gun
screen, -—
k.A,R,42863-London-28 April 1941
All matters pertaining to British films are now being handled
by the Assistant Military Attache (Signal Corps)© — - The
present arrangement is for all films produced in the future
to be forwarded to Washington through the British Purchasing
Mission, Some recent films are:
Description
Recognition of Aircraft In 7 parts, from .iir Minis try Film - British Aircraft,
Aircraft Recognition
New Series British and.
German.
Security
Pictures to make troops
security-minded.
The Louse
Decontamination of person,
E f f ^ b ^ c f lice as regards
Antiaircraft Gunnery «
How ^o^ackle the Job,
.#t j.
Antiaircraft Gunner,
All about Dials.,
Light Antiai
Aided Laying,
-208
1 V - TRAINING
4)
'Training Films (cont'd)
Heavy and Light iintiaircraft Gunnery
Handling Hanai/heels,
Antiaircraft Gunnery
Do's and Dont's for Anti aircraft Gunners.
Antiaircraft Gunnery and Ground Locators
How to see in the Dark.
Mosquitoes and Malaria
Demonstration of preventive
equipment•
k,A,R.46047-London-31 December .1941
Nine reels of a (training film entitled "Eye Shooting')
used for training (Nava,l) ratings to fire Antiaircraft
guns were shown (recently)-— by the Gunnery School Offi cer at Halifax. The film is in technicolor and clever-ly
utilizes animated drawings and photographs to teach the prop er estimation of "Angle of Approach" of an attacking plane,
and the amount of "Aim Off" or lead necessary to use with
open sights. The film should be very worthwhile in train ing, particularly in impressing on -the mind the very brief
time available for aiming and firing.
N.A.R.Ser.ll63-41-0ttawa-9 December 1941
5)
Training Devices
The first test runs on the recently completed 20~foot dome
for training merchant ship and navy close-range antiair craft gunners were held'recently at H.M.S. ana were com pletely successful. This report contains a brief descrip tion of the device. Airplane attacks filmed from models of
German airplanes are projected on the dome surface and the
plane is followed, by-means of open sights, by the gun's
crew being trained. Sound effects for plane and gun are
used to increase, the realism of -the attack. 32 domes are
now being built in this country, four of which are to be shipped to Canada.
Antiaircraft Trainir
Ser.IV-C anadiaf
V - TRAD ING 5)
„ V
Training i \ Devices 'A ^4 cent' d)
V
The R^fe. *SC5hadian Navy is to receive from the United King dom five of the apparatus known as the British admiralty
Close Range Antiaircraft Dome Teachers. The British Ad miralty states that the Dome Teacher is a great advance on
other types of teachers and is particularly useful for
antiaircraft machine gunners and others operating guns up
to two pounders.
N .A »R,Ser«544-41-0ttawa-29 August 1941
The dome (for the Dome Training devices) has been
erected in the form of a hollow half hemisphere. The Base
of the dome is a hollow half cylinder 20' in radius, 5' high. On the base, without any break in continuity,
(rests the) half hemisphere, 20' radius, A motion
picture projection of a dive-bomber is used as a target.
The gun-pointer aims at the target through a standard open
or wheel-type sight which has a yellow ray-filter in front
of it. The instructor looks through a check sight and ob serves a yellow dot which shows the actual point of aim of
the gun-pointer. The dot and the cross wire of light are
invisible to the gun pointer because of the yellow ray
filter.
N,A.R.Ser,ll62-41-0ttawa-9 December 1941
The Navy Dome Trainer is considered by the British Army
to be of immense value in training antiaircraft Units.
The Army is redesigning it for Army use and will purchase
16, It is an indoor teacher which in effect provides
a substitute for aircraft cooperation. Its objects are:
to provide practical aiming instruction in eye shooting
for. the crews of close range Antiaircraft weapons, and
simultaneously to give training in fire discipline; to
provide realistic practice in engaging fast enemy aircraft;
to accustom personnel to the general conditions of dive
bombing attacks in so far as noise psychological reac p mentally prepared
tion are concerned so that they wp sonnel aware of the
to meet this form of attack; tp'4"® attacking aircraft
extreme ly short t ime during 'which
V - TRAINING
5)
Training Devices (cont'd)
can be engaged by the close range antiaircraft weapons and
to provide verified aiming' practice.
K.A.R.45118-London-28 October 1941
Dome Teachers will not be generally available to
Antiaircraft Command (Great Britain) for several months,
The Navy have proved very willing to allow antiaircraft
Command courses to use the teacher when they do not require
it themselves. The Royal Air Force are1 a'^so erecting some
at various airdromes. Although the layout ana deflections
are not strictly correct for the 40 mm, guns, the errors
involved are not large.
M. .R.47406-London-15 April 1942 .
A device called a dive bomber simulator has been designed
in Great Britain which is intended to simulate an ap proaching dive-bomber for antiaircraft target practice. It
is intended for dripping from an aircraft flying at 12,000
ft. and functions as follows. On release, a Bickford delay
is initiated, which burns while the simulator is dropping
from 12,000 ft. to approximately 10,000 ft. At this height
the delay ignites either a flare or smoke candle (according
to the type of simulator used) which continues to burn while
the simulator falls to approximately 3,000 ft. During this
burning, a second length of Bickford delay burns and con tinues until the simulator reaches a height of about 2,000
ft., when a bursting charge ivs ignited to break up the con- •
tainer so that no heavy 'parts remain to fall on personnel
below. "
24 November 1941-AAC 319.13/AUC-16
On December 3, 4, 1941, Commander observed the oper ation of a Delamere & Williams Antiaircraft Training Device
installed at the Gunnery School Halifax, Nova Scotia.—
The purpose of the device is to train an antiaircraft gun-
pointer to aim and fire a stream of'tracer-like projectiles
V - TRAINING
5)
Training Devices (cont'd)
at miniature airplane targets, which move in a path either
like that of a dive bomber or a low level bomber. Mini ature targets one-fiftieth of full size are used
and the muzzle velocity of the pellet projectiles is like wise reduced to one-fiftieth actual velocity. Successive
attacks by the target airplane are at 9 second intervals.
The time during which the gun pointer can fire is about lj
seconds. Targets are scale models of Junkers 37, Stuka
Bombers, one-fiftieth full size, cast brass. The radius
of pull-out is calculated for a maximum speed of 350 m.p.h.,
a minimum of 250 m.p.h., and usual speed of 274 m.p.h.,
which corresponds to a pull of b G on the pilot. To simu late an attack by a low level bomber, the stationary can be
rotated through 90 and locked, thus giving a horizontal
approach toward the .gun pointer.
N.A.R.Ser.1154-41-0tt awa-9 December 1941
Question: How are radio controlled aerial targets employed
in training: that is, types of courses and types of maneuver?
Answeri (l) Queen Bee aircraft can fly on any course within
effective fuze range of heavy antiaircraft guns subject to.
a maximum ceiling limitation of approximately 12,000 feet
and speeds within 80-120 miles per hour.
(2) Within limitations in (l) above, the Queen Bee air craft have the following advantages in particular over towed
targets.
(a) Can simulate direct approaching and receding-targets
' (during a level flight).
(b) Can simulate avoiding action.
(3) Firing against Queen Bee aircraft, therefore, repre sents final stage in h e v y antiaircraft training at praetice
camps, since it enables sections to exercise tactical control
of fire.
M.e.R.45623-1ondon-1 December 1941
I was very much impressed with two (British) training devices believe they would be of value J.aflbffllLindoor
V - TRAINING
5)
Training Devices (cont'd)
training of our ;*ntiaircraft Automatic Weapons per?
They are the Holywood Range for teaching the
vation of Tracer and the adjustment of lay for crossing
targets with the No.,3 Predictor and the Slaymaker Tutor
for teaching Course Angle, Deflections, and Observation of
Tracer.
M.u.R.46763-London-27 February 1942
The Westex photographic mobile recording outfit is a great
step forward in recording. Eleven magslip dials can be
photographed every four seconds and the complete story of
a practice run can be built up. Notes-AUC 49- March 1942
The Admiralty has perfected a simple type of minature
glider for use as a target for Antiaireraft machine-gun
training. It has a wing span of 6' and a length of about
4'6n. It is constructed of very light materials, and is
weatherproofed by dope and varnish.- The glider achieves
an air speed of 25 m.p.h. It flies .in a circle, whose
radius is adjustable to some extent. The glider is winched
on launching in much the same way as a kite, until, at an
altitude of 150 or 200 feet, it is released from its tow line for free flight, A good percentage of target flights
has been obtained fair weather,
N.A.R.Ser,980-London-21 April 1942
6)
aircraft Recognition Training
One great trouble is in identification of airplanes.. In one case, one of our own airplanes was brought down 150 yards in front of the gun and of our'own infantry. Every one at the time thought it was a German plane. Our Infan try even cheered. It appeared to be a 1, 2, 3 attack with 4 Me 109's chasing a Spitfire and it was the Spitfire that was brought down. It happened and it will happen again. The sergeant (detachment commander) made the decision. His brigadier told him in the above casg ft^ Sf'^. right and just to try to be more careful, in the f Jtfe'e^/Mj^hti^Jication
- 213
^fi&m
•.. v r
*
V *
* f VA %
. % V
V - TRAINING 1 6)
Aircra%" ^6bgnition Training (cont'd)
is most important.
Brigadier Rev.Smith—M.A.R.43877-London-l August 1941
In one portion of the battle in Libya on 28 May 1942
the medium (U.S.) tanks moved forward on a line until
within approximately 2000 yards from the enemy where they
halted and exchanged fire. 15 minutes later the first sup porting artillery began to register on the enemy position.
At this time I could clearly see the enemy dismounted, artil lery men at their guns. 30 minutes later the supporting
artillery came down with an excellent barrage and the medi um tanks moved forward to attack. My observation was
somewhat hampered by having my command car fired on alter nately by the British and German tanks, with the air arm
dropping a load of bombs for good measure. As the attack
neared its objective the Royal Air Force came over in what
appeared to be excellent air support and Captain. Ahee and
myself were loud in its praise until after the action when
the British reported to us that they had been the ones
subjected to the attack.
M.A.R,25 80-Cairo, Egypt-4 June 1942
Owing to the large amount of air traffic in the neighbour hood of aerodromes, antiaircraft uriits deployed for their
protection should pay most particular attention to the prob lem of recognition of enemy aircraft. Not infrequently
enemy aircraft follow closely behind our own aircraft and
in consequence may be plotted as friendly. Alternatively,
friendly the hostile plots get temporarily interchanged
and therefore unremitting watchfulness on the part of look outs is essential. Recognition of unseen aircraft at
night by engine sound is often possible, but considerable
practice and experience is required. The recognition is
therefore normally negative i.e. all friendly aircraft usu ally operating at night are recognised as such; a stranger
is suspected as hostile. In order to be able to distin guish aircraft by sound, it is important for lookouts.to
place themselves in such a position"'tha? they are screened
t\
from the noise of aircraft "runriingviip' heir'engines on
•-V L4
V - TRAINING
6)
Aircraft Recognition Training (cont'd)
the aerodrome*
A.A.G.#319 *13/AUC-10-17 July 1941
Pilots should be required to recognize friendly tanks and
guns to the same extent that ground personnel are required
to recognize aircraft types,
M,A.R.45966-London-23 December 1941
In recognition problem (in the .^frican desert at times)
was particularly difficult, especially during the period
following several enemy fighter attacks when our own
fighters follow over the same area flying low. Complaints
were that our light antiaircraft had, on occasions, engaged
our own aircraft. The cLosest, co-operation by Royal Air
Force is necessary if such instances are to be avoided, and
pilots must conform with local flying orders both as regards
behavior and use of recognition signals,
M.A.L.4&l65-London-2 June 1942
From the commencement of, and throughout the campaign, in.
Libya Light Antiaircraft were forbidden to open fire on air craft unless they were definitely recognized as hostile or
committed a hostile act, Such orders required that detach ment commanders should be absolutely certain of their rec ognition in order that fire could be opened before hostile
action was taken and bombs dropped. The problem of recogni tion was, however, facilitated by the following circum stances: • ' (1) The general wide field of view in the desert.
(2) The almost complete lack of our bombing aircraft
over the forward areas during the third period,
(3) Fnemy aircraft when approaching the Vulnerable Foint
were in tight formation, whilst friendly patrols were always
in loose formation and
(4) Ju 87, Ju 88 and MI 110 were easily identified.
The Me 109F, being .similar to the Hurricane, was difficult
to distinguish. Had these been extensively employed in really
low level ground straffing attacks they would have been missed
- TRAINING 6)
, .
JW
Aircraft Recognitio^JJi^ning (cont'd)
V a C i ^
too often ^v^ng to uncertainty in identification, with the
consequ^&t'result that sooner or later Hurricanes would have
been fired on when flyipg low. r — Probability of the enemy
not employing single ongii.e aircraft for the extensive low
level attacks cannot be accepted, and consequently the Impor tance of restrictions being placed on low flying by the Royal
Air Forcej in any future operation is still imperative.
Other arms arc prone to fire not o.ly at absurdly long ranges,
but often at our own aircraft. It is suggested that where
Bofors are present, small arms .fire should be held until the
Bofors open fire and to cease fire when they cease.
M.A.R.2272-Cairo,Egypt-l March 1942
The following extract is from a letter addressed to Command
dant,Antiaircraft Command Recognition School by the Second
in Command of a Regiment about to go abroad, who wanted some
assistance in Recognition Training.
"If there is general advice you can give me on this subject
which now becomes of far greater importance to us, it would
be much appreciated.".
This amazing statement shows an utter lack of appreciation
of the importance of the subject. Recognizing the enemy is
just as essential in this country as overseas, and training
in recognition must be vigorously carried out.
M.A.R.48265-London-6 June 1942
The training of light antiaircraft detachments in recogni tion of aircraft do«s not ap ear quite so insoluble now. A
school was established recently at a large Air Transport
Auxiliary ferry aerodrome which has been putting through about
one hundred antiaircraft artillerymen a week. In the course of
the week they see nearly every operational British type and are
able to inspect them at close quarters; and by arrangement with
Farnborough spend a day seeing German types in the air and on
the ground. By emphasizing the practical rather than the theo retical aspect of identification and by concentrating on the
psychological side of making (.very man really keen on aircraft
a remarkably improved standard of recognition on sites obtained.
.#319.13/AUC-39
7
-•WK
.1
.
.
..
,»_ W
>
£
V - TRAINING
6)
.* j! i N•a —L- & fa 4'
Antiaircraft Recognition Training (cont'd)
The basis of training is by models, epidiascopes, etc. Any-
kind of analysis system is considered dangerous. Films are
particularly useful and a new up to date series is being
produced,
A.A.C.#319.13/AUC-13-23 August 1941
The Royal Air Force has developed a method of producing air craft recognition material photographically through use of
accurate, scale models of enemy aircr ft. This system em braces three steps: (a) consolidation of available infor mation on an enemy aircraft; (b) building the model, and
(c) photographing it in the desired position. More satis factory recognition material is said to be obtainable in
this way than by dependence upon chance photographs during
combat or reconnaissance.
M,A.R.46049-1ondon-7 January 1942
The only successful method of identification of aircraft is
by familiarity with the types in service, The means of
r achieving this is b repeated instruction. Training films
have been issued (and they are helpful) but it has
been found that they are of greater value if shown subse quent to lectures and other instruction. The most impor tant fact is that lectures must be 'given by trained experts
in the subject, A lecturer who has had no basic grounding
in his subject, or who does not have all the facts at his
finger tips, usually does more harm than good, ,
It is considered that the best method of training person nel in aircraft recognition is to deal with the subject ~ —
in short periods Of instruction at regular intervals,
One of the outstanding feature's is that if the subject is
put forward to the men in an interesting manner by an in structor who is obviously an expert and enthusiastic,
there is a very great incentive to spare time to study..
A certain amount of equipment in the form of models, sil houettes, photo-graphs, etc., is required for use of the
instructor, as he must capture the students', interest at
once. • . The whole basis of recognition traiftiff^ js^bound up in the
- 217
%V % % f V' %
f-
Q N & *%
V - TX-JNIK
6) xtircra
cognition Training (cont'd)
Tact thqt the time taken to identify a 'plane under operation al conditions must be cut' down to a minimum. It is the over looking of this point v/hich has often resulted in (train ing) methods being tried v/hich are in practice of little
value. In order to introduce method into the training of
personnel the question (has-been) reviewed on the fol lowing lines: It was found that although numerous people could identify
aircraft correctly in a very short time, they were at a loss
to explain how they could do it. On investigation, it was
at once noticed that they had been interested in aircraft
previously, and had become so familiar with the 'planes,
that they could tell them on sight. This held good (sim ilarly) for motorists who are able to spot.cars on the
road as a result of seeing them frequently. It was obvious
therefore that training should be devised to produce this
complete familarity which brings about almost immediate or
"sub-conscious" recognition. Other methods had to be dis carded because they did not fulfil the conditions required.
Many people have tried to introduce analysis system to
differentiate between various types of aircraft, ana al though these may have a certain value for elementary train ing, it is most important that under no circumstances should
they be used for operational work. They do not pro duce an answer in a- sufficiently short time to satisfy the
first essential. They have to be altered to include new
types, which may have very far reaching effects on the con clusions reached at the analysis. And since the a nalysis consists of dividing aircr ft into t^pes by means of
constructional features, the whole system will' collapse if
the original dividing feature is not visible in the first
view obtained. There is also the very serious'objection
that the system gives the temptation to carry a.reference
sheet in the pocket and this may leave the person concerned
without help, either during darkness or when the sheet has
been mislaid. In succession to the analysis system, it has
been suggested that the plane should be reviewed or inspect ed in a set sequence, e.g. wings, engine, fuselage, tail.
This may lead, 'where the first feature isifcindistinct, to
time being wasted on -that feature, wji^n tn'^L ' plane could be
identified by its general appearance ,vyls|[aMpr6m the'indis tinct feature. The meteod of Jfedentifi&%ton by familiarity
does not confine the spottegf^to feature. In some
V - TRAINING
6)
Aircraft Recognition Training (cont'd)
cases the aircraft can be recognised by the 'sit' in the
air alone, without the other features being discernible.
Nor does it confine him to any one view or position. If
he is familiar with the aircraft he will spot it from any
angle. The most obvious method of attaining this ob ject would be to let all necessary personnel see the actual
aircraft in flight until the required standard was reached.
This hov.ever is impossible, as even if we could collect a
complete set of all our own aircraft types in one place, the
provision of hostile types for practice would present diffi culty, The system of making up "flying circuses" by the
Royal Air Force has been helpful, but has very definite lim itations in view of the organization involved to give a com paratively small section of the people concerned a view of
the 'planes in flight. Luckily all these disadvantages
can be overcome, by the use of scale models. If a scale
model is made so that it is accurate for appearance in out line at any angle from a short distance (small details are
not necessary) then it can be used for training in a very
satisfactory manner. Thus a l/72nd scale model viewed at a
distance of 100 yards is equiv ilent to seeing the real air craft at a range of 7,200 yards or 21,600 ft. The ad vantages of the models are: (1) That it is easier to provide a complete set of mod els to units for training in comparison with arranging for
the real 'planes to be flying for training purposes in vari ous area, thus tying up numbers of operational aircraft.
(2) The training can be carried out irrespective of
weather conditions for flying and observation, since obvi ously an aircraft flying at a low height, does not present
the difficulty of recognition at long range. Using models
the training can be graded to suit the standard of the per sonnel under instructions.
(3) The training can be carried out to suit the programme
of the unit for time, since it is under its own control, and
does not involve arrangements with other units.
(4) The training can be concentrated on any particular
aircraft required under unit arrangements and can be repeat ed as and when required without the necessity of co-ordina tion with other units.
It is useless, however, to leave personnel to study the
models unaiaed or without directing their efforts. They
must be shown the difference between the various^ t^'ps^?
%J>I j
V - TRAINING 6)
ft% •
P ^ H* ,
Aircraft R^co^nit,! oji' Tr^ itoMg (cont'd)
til they knowNyp.!1 the details of their appearance. For this
purpose large scale silhouettes are required. By means of
these the shapes of various parts of the different 'planes
are pointed out and thus impressed on the mind. To supple ment the silhouettes, which are flat and only two dimension al, sheets of photographs are alscr necessary, especially if
* they can be used with an epidiascope, for spotting practice
on various types of 'plane. They provide a compact means
of providing the 'rep. tition' necessary to achieve complete
familiarity. The main point to watch in the arrangement of
training is that the interest of the stud; nts must be arous ed. It is !due to this interest, that many people without
special training became so conversant with aircraft types
that "spotting" or recognition came so quickly and accu rately. Some simple explanation of the "how -and why" of
aircraft, and short talks on the structure and operation
of controls etc. (should be given in order to give the
spotter background to which to pin the appearance of the
plane) . This will enable him to follow up his instruc tion by reading at'least semi-technical descriptions in trade
journals, etc.
Spare time activities should be encouraged by the use of
silhouette playing cards. Visits to aerodromes (to
view aircraft on the ground and in the air) have excel lent interest (and instruction) value if used to sup plement other training. (AS an original form of training
observation of planes on the ground is not so good because
planes are not seen in correct perspective.)
It is considered that with the forms of equipment at pres ent available, complete training by familiarity can be car ried out satisfactorily. — . '. 1'. A. R.47328-A » a. Command School of
Instruction, Buckhurst Park, Withy ham, Tunbridge Wells,-6 M- rch 1-941
'It has been proposed by Commander in Chief Home Forces that
non-antiaircraft units, excepting-their.antiaircraft elements,
shall not be taught recognition to any. definite standard but
shall be taught to "aim at and swing with any aircraft not
identified as friendly, and open fire hostile act is
committed, or hostile marking become. visibJk. The policy
with regard.to training and nr •-•vision af ^tiprcerial is now be
V - TRAINING
6)
Aircraft Recognition Training (cont'd)
ing worked out on these lines*
A.A.C.#319.13/AUC-64-Sundry Notes April 1942
As a result of my experience as Executive Officer of the III
Army Aircraft Warning Service during 1940 Maneuvers in United
States and from official report of the Fort Bragg Exercises
in Eastern North Carolina in 1938 and from talks with various
British officers during the past fifteen months as to the
keen eyesight and hearing of certain types of people, I firm ly believe that we should organize a Corps of Antiaircraft
Observers or Spotters for duty with Antiaircraft Units from
specially selected personnel and give them a thorough course
in aircraft recognition. Recognition of aircraft by antiair craft personnel, is becoming increasingly more important
and certainly more difficult. The observers, who would be
Experts, the same as we have Electricians, Master Gunners,
etc., would habitually do duty as antiaircraft iirtillery
Spotters ana could advise the officer or Non-commissioned
officer in charge of antiaircraft units, whose responsibility
it is to protect or assist in protecting his vulnerable point
Area by gun fire, in determining when an airplane, by its ap pearance and action, was friendly or enemy. I am sure that
with specially selected men who are well trained to actually
do the spotting and give advice that the officer .or non-com missioned officer in charge ^of an antiaircraft "gun or guns
will be able to make his decision quicker and with more con fidence, thereby increasing the effectiveness of our anti aircraft artillery.
M.A.R.49094-London-25 July 1942
'BIBLIOGRAPHY
(1)
Umbrella type dive bombing target,
' M*.A.R,44419-London-9 September 1941-131/XG
(2) Tactics and. Technique of Engagement of Ground Targets
and water-borne Targets by Antiaircraft Artillery.
T ar Department Circular (Trainma^ Ntt.
(3)
Antiaircraft TrainingHevices. I fc
"" ' ' ' ft M.A.R^5T^London-April 1942
- 221
V - TRAINING
Bibliography (cont'd)
A
^
>
1
(4) Courses at liilit^V-'fpli'yg^FScience (formerly at
Woolwich). •
M * , ,R.47022-London-March 1942
(5) Hunt Aircraft Recognition and Range Teacher (Mobile
model)•
M.A.R.48427-London-June 1942
(o) British Syllabus of Training for Antiaircraft Artil lery during long Voyages
M.A.R.46726-London-131/AOZ
(7)
British Army From (List with copies of the forms)
February 1942
(8) The Eyeshooting locket Book (British guide for crews
of Antiaircraft weapons).
N.A.R.606-12 March 1942
(9)
Silhouettes of Japanese Aircraft.
k.ii.R.46008-London-December 1941
(10) British Middle East Training Pamphlets
A. A.C.#319.131/XU
<
(11) British Antiaircraft Training Instructions Serial I,
II, III, and IV.
A.A.C.#319.131/XU-30-1941
(12) The Stiffkey Stick and How to use it.
A.A.C.#319.131/XU-34-May 1941
(13) Notes on training in Aircraft recognition (includes
detailed descriptions of American, British and German planes)
A. A. C. #319*131/ ARL
(14) British Training Documents Issued in ';|||J^tern Desert
Concerning Employment of American Tanks. ^.
v. A'.R^503-Sa^^"May 1942.
< .
(15) Aircraft Recognition British Manual, Ftirt I 1941.
A.A.C.^3#U31/Xl>r35-19 March 1941
(16) Aircraft recognitionj^Jhe Mih'dfen Tester.
^ ^^4.R.47742-London-May 1942
V - TRAINING
Bibliography (cont'd)
"
/i
*
v (17) List of draining Films for Identification of Ai
craft.
War Department Circular No.28
• . (18) Artillery System of measurement of angles — Italy,
Germany, France and United States.
M,A.R,2204-Egypt-9 February 1942
(19) "Antiaircraft Training Instruction" pamphlet serial
IV - Canadian reprint.
A.A.C.#319.13l/X-May 1942
(20) "Training in the Navy in•Aircraft Recognition " - Ad miralty Famphlet.
N,A.R.241-London-29 January 1942
(21) Irojector Drill for Projector Antiaircraft 3-inch
Single 1941.
M.A.R.43562-London-14 July 1941
(22) "Training appropriations for local purchases by
Antiaircraft organizations".
M.,i.R.45433-London-18 November 1941
(23) Pamphlet entitled "Instruction for installing Dome
Antiaircraft Teachers".
N.A.R.1120-London-4 May 1942
(24) gun.
Cross levelling drill, Q.F. 3.7 Inch Antiaircraft
M.A.L.45341-/iiFF-12 November 1941
(25) Instructions 14-8077, "The Sperry Antiaircraft Pre dictor" - Antiaircraft publications .M.A.London#457l6-6 M.A.R.45716-London-6 December 1941
Descriptive Notes on the Predictor Antiaircraft No.
I Vickers Type 1941.
M.A.L.457l6-London-28 May 1941
Vertical Deflections — Bofors 40 mm. Mks. I, II,
and III. Lateral Reflections - Bofors 40 mm. wks» I, II,
and III. —
M.ii..R.457l6-Lonaon-6 December 1941
j|
V - TRAINING
1
V, -! Nfc, i:;, 1% t 3
Bibliography (cont'i)
(25)
(contM)
Clock Hour, Bofors 40 mm, Mks. I, II, and III. —
M,A.L.4571b~London-6 Decmember 1941
VI « AIR DEFENSE SYSTEM (British)
Direct command of all forces concerned with the ac
defenses of the United Kingdom is held by an-Air 0:
the Commander in Chief, Fighter Command, Royal Air
The principal forces whose primary mission is to provide
air defense of the United Kingdom are the Fighter Command
aircraft and crews of the Royal Air Force the Balloon Bar rage units of the Royal Air Force, the; Royal Artillery's '
Antiaircraft artillery and searchlight units, and the Ob*
server Corps. As the active defense of factorios is inte grally incorporated into the active defense of the entire
country, units of all of the above forces may he involved
in defense of factories. See M.A. London Report No.41591.
No fighters are given a specific mission of protecting an
individual factory. Because of tho relatively 3mall size
of the British Isles, fighters are used to ongago any en emy at any time. Because of tho pressing shortage of guns,
antiaircraft artillory is not extensively used for the pro tection of specific factorios. --- Balloon barrages are tho
most frequent type of defense given factorios. - — Balloon
barrages have boon found to bo quite effective in protect ing factories from dive-bombing attacks. The Observer Corps
--- is concerned with factory defense only in-so-far as the
general scheme for tho discovery and tracking of enemy
planes and tho raid warning system applies to tho country
as a whole. It appears — ( t o this observer)— that the
centralization of the command of all forces having to do
with activo air dofonso is proper.
M.A.R.43122-London-29 May 19^1
An interesting, foature of tho Fighter Command was tho >
splendid .cooperative spirit which existed between the Royal
Air Force and tho antiaircraft artillery. — He, informed
us that, as an army officcr, he was charged with training,
feeding, housing, etc. all antiaircraft artillery, but
that for operational purposes, he served directly under the
Air Chief Marshall commanding tho Fighter Command. He
7 stated that the antiaircraft artillery was a part of the
Air Defenses of Great Britain, tho most important constituent
of which was the Royal Air Force and that in order properly
to coordinate his part of tho Air Defense his forces, must
necossarily operate under the commander, in general/charge of
.the Air Defenses; — While visiting the dug-out of a Bat tery commander — the Battery command me that a
k v " -225
^MW
- AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (British) (cont'd)
«, «
.•
.
ti \Ll
"flash"- had just "been received JroBi«ttierTighter Command that
— BriMgli fl^tera ,Hero- 6t^ng into the London area In
pursuitfe
after that "flash" was received, antiaircraft fire in the
Lcfridonarea ceased. --- A few minutes later it was resumed
when the "flash" from the Fighter Command stated that the
British fighters had left the area.
: " Incl.#l-A.A.C.#319.131/IE
Fighter Command operations room is about 35 feet square.
There is a gallery about 8 feet high running around the
room and overlooking a platform with a large (about 25 ft x
20 ft.) map of England, — . This map is marked off into
squares with coordinates and group zone and sector "bounda ries marked on it. There is also shown one north-south and
three east-west lanes, each about 20 miles wide, in which
friendly bombers must fly. Around the map board sit plot-
ters^..with .telephone headsets connected to Command, Groups
and Observer Corps headquarters. Every hostile or doubtful
aircraft or formation is plotted on the map as soon as re ported. Each raid is given a number. Plotting is done by
colorod tabs — indicating the location, direction and num ber of enemy raiders. — No plotting tabs --- represent
information more than 15 minutes old. "Tellers", on raised
seats on side of and overlooking the big map, with telephone
head-sets, report direct to Fighter Groups every change of
situation* as shown on the map, so that Group operation
maps are kept up to the minute with that of Command Head quarters. On the raised gallery the Operations Officer over
looks the large map and all the other maps or charts. He
has direct telephonic connections with the Commander in
Chief, Fighter Command, who in turn has direct, connections
with Fighter Groups, Coastal Command, Admiralty and Bomber
Command. Working with Operations Officor ore Admiralty and
Civil Air liaison officers.
M.A.R.40506-London-23 October 1939
The Antiaircraft Artillery headquarters, under the com mand of Lt. General Pile is located in the vicinity of the
Fighter Command headquarters. The Antiaircraft Artillery
in England, Scotland and Ireland consists of seven Antiair craft Divisions, oach Division of 5Qj0tX&men, which will bo
organized into three Corps. The main^wkon is the 3.7 inch
gun which has a maximum range of ab^^^O,000 feot, and is
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (British) (cont'd)
credited with firing effectively at 28,000 feet.
From an operational point of view, the outstanding fea^
ture of the British Antiaircraft Artillery was the wny in
which it was effectively tied in with the Fighter Command,
in order to get Immediate action in cooperation therewith
in withholding its fire, opening fire, or in changing from
one condition to another in any particular section.
The British Antiaircraft authorities are going ahead in
the development and construction of bigger guns for their
large cities that will be able to fire effectively to 40,000
feet and above will, of necessity, have pressure cabins —
that will be very vulnerable — to shell fragments.
Observations on trip to England-15 December 1940
The Sector Operations Room — ( o f one of the Fighter Com mand Sectors)— has been moved — ( t o a school building) — .
— There are two operations rooms, one large room for the
Royal Air Force operations and one somewhat smaller for
the — Antiaircraft Brigade - Gun Layer Plotting Room. —
The gun layer Plotting Room had a large map of southern
England. There was a control officer and an enlisted assis tant, four women plotters; and one woman switchboard operator,
also one woman tracer who makes a record of the courses flown
by enemy planes and plotted from information received from
the gun layers. Gun layers are linked to plotters by tele phone, each plotter having from ono to three gun layers. —
Plotters use head and breast telephone sets. The gun layer
Control Officer, uses a head and breast set with ono earpiece
for communicating with the batteries and a hand microphone
for dealing with Royal Air Force plotter or sector control
officer. An antiaircraft liaison officer is on duty con stantly in the sector operations room and in telephonic com munication with the gun layer control officer and he keeps
in constant and close touch with the whole tactical situa tion, i.e. general course of raids, position of fighter air craft, etc. and it is his duty to anticipate the requirements
of the Sector Control and thus render the maximum assistance
to the Royal Air Force in the interception and destruction
of hostile aircraft. Normally the senior antiaircraft offi cer of the watch or on occasions the sector antiaircraft liai son officer is the gun layer control officer.
'
M.A.R.43391-London-26 June 1941
-227
- AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (British) (cop&Vd). " """
>,
— ( i n general in the) - cbmaunications for aaf^antiaircraft
division * — in the Air Defenses, of'Great Britain. — Tho
commercial telephone lines are U3ed. Where they are not
available field wire is used, units connecting to the near est — commercial line. When communications were first
organized the lines were all routed into the city or main
switchboards. — Whon the cities were bombed communications
were disrupted. It is now tho practice to use lines going
around the cities so that communications are intact. No
trouble has been experienced since this practice was adopted.
M.A.R.43371-London-25 June 19^1
The communications — to and from a gun operations room in
the Air Defenses of Great Britain are as follows:
Gun Operations Room to Royal Air Force Group Operations
Room: Two way - receives from the Group Operations Room
plots of enemy aircraft and friendly aircraft (except fight ers) and gives to the Group Operations Room, plots and in formation about enemy aircraft, as required.
Gun Operations Room to Royal Air Force Sector Operations
Room: Two way - receives from Sector Operations Room, plots
and. information of friendly fighters and enemy aircraft not
.shown by Group Operations Room and gives to Sector Operations
Room, plots and information about enemy aircraft, as required.
Gun Operations Room to Balloon Barrage Controller; gives
plots of aircraft, as required; requests grounding and close-
hauling of balloons; gives warnings of impending low flying
attacks..
Gun Operations Room to Fire Service; receives information
from Fire Service of fires in gun defended areas so' that
particular areas can be given special protection.
Gun Operations Room to sub-Gun Operations Room: Two tele phone lines and one wireless link; gives to.sub-Gun Opera tions Room general information and particular directions and
receives from sub-Gun Operations Room plots of aircraft and
other.information such as Intelligence.
Sub-Gun Operations Room to Gun sites: Lines to those gun
sites detailed to give plots of enemy aircraft two lines;
one for receiving the plots from-the site, the other for
giving general information and particular plots and receiv ing information and intelligence. To otheri£te3 there is
one line for receiving and giving partic^jbld^lots, general
information and intelligence. At the-^uV^Qii^/w^erations Room
there is a switchboard that enables any ou4 .jfjdfe to be •
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (British) (cont'd)
W d J
switched through to all the other sites in the
to direct a concentration should that method of conti
"be necossary.
A.A.C. #319.13/AUC-33-January 19^2.
H« h rJC&ra
HM d-
jet O» CD 1 O w s o p
9 3 3 32
p*
zn
f-3 M O
i
> a
M > M W O 5 3 O
O
ca
i>
a
M
3
POSSIBLE LAYOUT FOR A GUN OPERATION
OM
:: ."V * ••>•.' * Qp,ftrati oris Tahl a
« • -v - «
¥
Plotter To R.A.F Sector
*
Plotter •*
I To
Plotter *
Warning Line
Exchange T-
n* To R.A.F, Group
To 2 R.A, F.Sectorg
Sector Aerodrome
To Gun : Stations (
Operators
.Microphone Table
( X v .
Recorder
To Exchange
x
i
Gun Control Naval Lia- !• Officer I§on Office*
DAIS 4 1 \
' Operator
V "Entrance
Plotter equipped T
Internal Telephone Extension -231
To Senior Naval Officer, G.H.Q.
Other 0.0, Rs. rea Are ccombined HQ C.F.D. Gun Fosition ficer set,
1 1 Itt1
i
f
\
$
Ufeftitw^ VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (British) (Cont'd)
Tho lethal radius of "burst of the British antiaircraft equip ments is taken as follows:
3-inch - 30 feet
3.7-inch - 60 feet (static and mobile).
k.5-inch - 90 feet
The above figures, it is believed, give a good indication'
of tho effectiveness of the three types of heavy antiair craft' guns. For the defense of a permanent vulnerable area
with static defenses it is felt that 4.5-inch guns are the
most desirable with 3.7-inch mobile available to augment tho
defenses of ono area or another in a mobile role. The Brit ish do not hesitate to move mobile regiments to areas they
consider are likely to be attacked or areas over which oneray
airplanes fly to attack other areas or what may bo consider ed as likely lines of approach.
M.A.P,.49026-London-22 July 19^2
Since tho start of hostilities enemy radio weather reports
have been received and readily broken down for use. Those
reports are of the greatest importance for successful oper ations over the continent, as very meagre and unreliable
forecasts would otherwiso result. The Germans have continu ally broadcast their weather by radio extending their net
to tho occupicd countries. , — Tho codes used have
broken down by the British. Sometimes thoy break them
by working back from a known synoptic.situation. • In other
cases the Germane havo v.ory foolishly sent out the weather
of a clear station such as Horta in the Azores. — The codcs
are changed rather infrequently. There is apparently no
schedule. Thoy change when they think it has been broken.
When they do change it is sometimes as long as two woeks be fore it is completely broken. During that period English
weather maps are very incomplete. Italian weather reports
have been easier to break down than the German. At the de coding desk a secret Italian code book was seen which may
explain the facility with which their weather code is broken.
Another factor which "has made Axis weather, easy to break Is
that the Italians havo not been changing their code at the ,
same time as tho Germans. Since thoy rebroadcast German
weather, it has often been just a matter of about two hours
to broak down tho Germans code. Ifo^ntly a change of
code was .made simultaneously and -e ono i dor able time to
break.
' '^?7-London-3 May 19^1
"232"
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (British) (cont'd)
After Dunkerque the army was unable to defend all the air dromes. The Royal Air Force contemplated its own defense
"but found in "actuality the number of men required far sur
passed the original plans. — M a n y army officers felt that
airdrome defense interfered with raising an army, that many
"battalions scattered around the British Isles were restrict ed to individual training and accomplished little in ad vanced or organizational training. —
• BES-1^5-Washington,D.C.-lV May 19^1
— A f t e r much agitation in the press and in Parliament,
tho entire system of aerodrome defense has "been rehashed.
The Air Ministry has formed the Royal Air Force Regiment
(Corps) from existing ground defense personnel, which will
"be augmented "by transfer and recruiting. - The Royal Air
Force Regiments.are to provide the "hard core" of local
defense and trains other Royal Air Force station personnel,
who. are now to "be armed. A Major General — has "been loaned
"by the Army to the Air Ministry as Commandant, Royal Air
Force Regiment. He is responsible for the organization and
assignment of units of tho Royal Air Force Regiment, and
for the training of the Regiment, and advises on the train ing and dispositions of all Royal Air Force personnel for
aerodrome defense. In addition, he is to be Director of
Aerodrome Defense, Air Ministry. — Army Area Commanders
— retain the general responsibility for the defense of
their areas, including aerodromes therein. Royal Air Force
Station Commanders now command all personnel on their sta tions and are responsible for local aerodrome defense
against air attack, dir landing on or near their stations,
and ground attack. Antiaircraft guns remain under the com mand of Air Defense'of Great Britain and under operational
control of Fighter Command.
.....
M.A.R.46660-London-March 19^2
Tho amount and type of defense of an airdrome will depend
upon the distance the field is from the front and the effi ciency of the warning system. A standard defense system
cannot be applied to all airdromes, as the ones in the
combat area will require more, and those further behind the
lines — less, defense. —
The types of armed defense may
(l) A standing patrol in the at
- 233
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (British). (egnVd)
(2) drome. (3) (4) (5) (6)
A patrol.j&tggid^^i; warning on the air
'anti^ircraft" a'6signed to ..field,.
Squadron personnel manning light machine guns.
Rockets. •• A balloon barrage.
(1) A standing patrol over the airdrome is probably the
best means of defense. However, this is too expensive in
man hours, equipment and fuel. — The real need for a
standing p a t r o l . — is when squadrons are working out of
an advanced field. There should be a patrol over the field,
whilo the planes are landing, being refueled, roarmed, tak ing off or until all aircraft are dispersed about the field.
(2) There should be a flight standing by during daylight
on the field at all airdromes that are within reach of en emy attack. The pilots may be on any of several stages of
call up — to sitting in planes, ready -to start engines to
take off. This will dopond upon the tine element and effi ciency of the warning system. - —
(3) At all airdromes or groups of airdromes sufficient
arcy antiaircraft .equipment should bo stationed.' In vicini ties where large scale, often repeated attacks are made, it
is impossible to have too much. Tho antiaircraft personnel
should be at stand by guns from ono half hour before dawn to
two hours after, and from two hours before sunset to one half
hour after, as these are the best times for surprise'attacks.
(4) While at all fields it is desirable to have army anti aircraft stationed, this is'Sometimes impossible or the anti aircraft will not arrive until the outfits havo boon at the
station for some time. Therefore, it.,is desirable for the
squadron to have its own antiaircraft machine guns for de fense against straffing. '•
(5) At valuable a i r d r o m e s ' r o c k e t projectors may be
placed around the circumference of the field. These will be
placed especially in places giving best moans -of approach
to- ground straffing planes. They can be electrically con trolled at a center point, preferably near operations and
— discharged in the path of straffing planes as they start
their approach on the field.
(6) The balloon barrage has — been, adequately covered
by observers in England,
*ton,D.C.-9 October 1941
• : / , . ;, BES-25I1
Airdrome Defense Ar^aig^ents' £&d 'Tactics as now conceived
-234-
- <-'
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (British)
by the British include a defense-in-depth syotem>
Defended Localities characterized by field
-works plaiined
for mutual support and fire coverage. — Great emphasis
is laid on camouflage and concealment of such field worl
with preparation of alternative positions. Dummy air planes and dummy antiaircraft with flash equipment may "be
employed to mislead attackers, and the effort is to conceal
many of the true defense positions for surprise counter-at tack at a favorable moment. An adequate Mobile Reserve is
considered a prime necessity. It is asserted that the im portance of mobility, in case of ground attack, cannot be
overstressed; that static defense alone can never succeed;
and that the smaller the force in relation to its task, the
greater is the need for some portion of it to be mobile and
ready to take offensive action. It is felt there should be
no attempt to "ring" the airdrome with a series of defended
localities. Concealment is of more importance than an ex tensive field of fire, but each defended locality should
be so sited that fire can be developed in all directions.
The total defense system must be capable of effective action
upward, outward, and inward. —
In general, Defended Localities should comprise a number
of dug-in section posts, more or less elaborate, as facil ities may allow and the individual case demand. These range
in character from. Command Posts or Battle Headquarters with
deep shelters for telephone switchboards, map tables, runners,
and limited sleeping quarters, to mere slit trenches. Con crete or brick pillboxes may be employed sparingly as ma chine gun emplacements, ammunition or ration storage, or
communication centers. For all such works, the utmost con cealment is an absolute essential. Track discipline, strin gent fire control, and prevention of all movement during in itial stages of the attack must be- enforced, to prevent the
positions becoming known to the enemy before he is commit ted to the ground. The Mobile Reserve, a highly important
component of the defense, should be located in well conceal ed positions, where it will not suffer from preliminary
bombardments of the static defenses. It consists of such
light tanks, armored vehicles, troop carriers, motorcycles,
etc., as are available'. It is a striking force for use
against enemy concentrations which' may threaten the airdrome
from a-position where the attack cannot be engaged effec tively by the static defenses; for counter-attack on vital
part's of the static defense overrun by the enemy;- and for
swift descent on parachutists and a|Mfir-borne troops at
kv"-235
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (British) (cont'd.)
:-> . the
41MB,, I
:
iJ .li ***
Informational Intelligence Summary No. J5
6 July 19^2-A,A.C .#319.13/AUZ-35
a 41
- — The best areas for air landings — ( o n a certain British
defended island)--- have been .systematically obstructed. One
or noro of the following methods has been used*.
(l) Protected landing grounds, beyond runways, and satel .
lites -. concrete filled.tor barrele. . (2) Unguarded areas suitable for landing either with
a) Hummocks of earth irregularly spotted at about 50
feet intervals. Earth is excavated to about 10 - 12 inches
from a circular area and thrown into center.
b) Double Furrows spaced at about 100.yard intervals
and 200 yards long arranged checkerboard fashion. The Royal
Air Force would like continuous ditohos at. 100 .yards, at
least 3 feet wide and 2 deep, but this — has been out
of the question. About 50 square mileB of possible landing
grounds have beon obstructed in.one or other of those fash ions. .
M.A.R.2014-Cairo,5 November 19^1
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (German)
The basic defense of the German Gun Defended areas is static,
guns usually being.in concrete emplacements and hutments be ing provided for the personnel. It is known, however, that
use is made of guns on railway mountings and that in some
areas a; small proportion of the ordinary defences is mobile,
with the result that the gun and searchlight densities cah
be altered at short notice. It is probable that thesk mobile
units are chiefly deployed in relation to dummy installations,
with the object, of deception as to tho actual location of the
target.- In a gun defended area heavy guns are generally sited
in the outskirts with a bias in favour of.the' ejected lines
of; approach and with a certain number of positions in the
town itself where suitable locations are available. Light
guns-are concentrated at particularly vulnerable points,
such as factories, docks, etc., and, are qccasi.onally sited
on likely lines of. approach, along canals, rivers or arte rial roads. The disposition of defencc-s round an'isolated
vulnerable, point presents', a special problem which varies
•a% i %V • - A,
Mkjjs Wi
'
I *
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (German) (cont'd)
with the particular nature of the target. Aero&rpmos, for"
example, are provided with lavish protection — eight' or
possibly 12 heavy guns and 12 to 30 light guns; tho heaVy
guns are usually sighted no nearer than 2,000 yards and
the majority of light guns no nearer than 500 yards from
the perimeter.
Air Min. Weekly Int. Summary up to 27 May 19^2-#143
Thero are three German airdromes in occupied France
with the following antiaircraft defenses:
Airdrome Heavy Antiaircraft Light Antiaircraft
Guns Guns 1 12 42 2 8 30
3
8
27
In addition, there are several antiaircraft searchlights
In one of our previous reports, we "brought out that the mini mum scale of light antiaircraft guns used by Germans in de fense of airdromes was twenty-seven. —
M.A. R. 46684-London-20 February 19*1-2
There wore two raids by the Royal Air Force on (Berlin
o n ) — the night mentioned; ono lasting from 9:10 - 11:25 p.m.
and the other from 2:30 - 4:30 a.m. ---. The most important
observation that was made during the air raids was that the
characteristics of the antiaircraft defenses of Berlin were
changed entirely between the two raids. During the first
raid, British action seomod to be concentrated to the north west (dummy objective area) and to the•southeast (Potsdam
area). Several planes flew over the ciity at fairly low
altitudes and could be distinctly heard in spite of the
wind and gusts of rain. Not a single battery in the city
opened fire even though one plane dropped a salvo of bombs
in the Tiorgarten - Zoo area just north of our observation
post. Ono piano flew over the entire city from southeast
to northwest at a reasonably low altitude. Not a round was
fired until the plane reached the critical zone around the
dummy objectives about 20 miles northwest of the center of
Berlin when there was a violent artillery reaction.
Ill ere is no evidence of the use of night fighters during
either of tho two attacks. The defensive system was
changed entirely during the seqoii%r^,id. The batteries in
the city itself opened fire fr/ n ^ targets within
- 237
—
'
.
IP
—
'H ^' • "I > % L i W VI DEFENSE SYSTEMS- (German) (cont'd) % «'s 0* -i'-; ^ The battery on the two towors in the zoo used flahsless powder that made the discharges barely visi ble at our observation post which is only'about 650 yards distant. — It isvlikely that all batteries in the city use flashless powder in order to conceal their location. With the low clouds reflecting the flash of the discharge, the firing of the batteries located in the rings about the city could, be seen for many miles. .The use of flashless powder for the batteries in the city and tho use of non flashless powder for batteries outside the city suggests another method of creating deception. From our reconnaissances, we have learned that gun bat teries are rathor evenly distributed throughout the city as well as in three rings about the city. The batteries in tho city and on the two inner rings are about 5*000 meters apart. With this arrangement, it would be very easy to change the apparent location of the rings of bat teries. The mobile defense force can be used :to make such a change seem more realistic. By Varying the use of flashless and non-flashless powder, the confusion for the at tacking formations can be increased. — M.A.E.18753-Berlin,Germany-10 November 19^1
During the British and Russian air raids during the month
of August, 19^1 — ( i t was evident t h a t ) — tho heavy Ger man Antiaircraft Artillery — had increased its fire pow er considerably..- — It was noted that the guns of some
of the batteries had been increased in number from four to
six. —
. " .» M. A. R.18592-Berlin,Germany-28 August 19^1
- — A new antiaircraft tower is boing constructed at'Ges undbrunnen in north Berlin. It is said that this tower is
part of a general system of Flak towers being constructed
in tho city. The average distance between towors is about
6,000 meters-. There are really two towers in oach instal lation, one of which has the fire control apparatus mounted
on the top thereof and the other with the four:guns on
each corner of the top. —
M.A.R.18808-Berlin-28 November 19^1.
Further details — - of the Flak Tqwe a
w •
, . *
i *
Berlin give
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (German) (contM)
the dimensions of those towers as 250-ft. square arJff&ore
than 100-ft. high, each with a slightly smaller rectangu lar satellite tower at about 350 yards distance. On each
large tower, 4 heavy and 12 light guns and what appears
to. he a radiolocation instrument. Apart from the value
of those massive towers as Flak positions, It is thought
that they may "be part of the Control system. Berlin's
defences as a w h o l e — ( o r e estimated t o ) — amount to: 2^0 Heavy guns
300 Light guns
125 Searchlights.
These cover on area approximately 12 miles to the North,
East and South, and 20 miles to the west to include Pots-
dam.
Incl. #1-M. A. R. -London-30 January 19^2
The Berlin municipal area proper extends almost 20 kilo meters from N to S and about 16 kilometers W to E. —
For the past year Flak towers have been erected. The two
most outstanding ones are in tho TIergarten. These are
very massive towers, built of steel and concrete. --- The
special construction of these towers, among other things
with embrasures and armored doors pointing downward make
them appear also useable for other purposes in connection
with an infantry action. —
134/FQ-Germany-6 February 19^2
V
'i
i
\
In Berlin, in the Tiergarten and in the Friedrichshain,
there are two concrete towers approximately 250 feet square
and more than 100 feet high, each with a slightly smaller
rectangular "satellite" tower at about 350 yards distance.
On each main tower k heavy and 12 light guns are mounted,
while on the "satellites" are k light guns and what appears
to be a radiolocation instrument. Apart from the value of
these towers as Flak positions, it is thought they may poss ibly be part of the control system.
M.A.L.4698^BfWLon-17 March 19^2
I
In Eierlin, in the Tiergarten and in the Fr iedrichshain,
there are two concrete towers approximately 250 feet'square
and more than 100 feet high, each with a slightly smaller •
rectangular "satellite" tower at about 350 yards distance.
On each main tower b heavy and 12 light guns are mounted,
while on the "satellites" are 4 'light guns and what appears
to "be a radiolocation instrument. Apart from the value of
. these towers as Flak positions,, it is thought they may poss ibly be x>art of the control svateutw
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (German), CeontM)
tfee'-'I'slands. of Aldorney
A recent repprt pn the defences and Guernsey - - - (now held tile Germans)— shows that
these two islands are" sua^prisingly well defended. Tho
small island of A^fiferney has a complete mixed antiaircraft
Abteilung, comprising twelve heavy and thirty light anti aircraft guns, as well as four heavy coast defense guns
(with two more emplacements under construction), numerous
pill-"boxes and machine gun emplacements, and a most exten sive system of wire entanglements over the entire."island.
The larger island of Guernsey has at least twenty-eight
heavy and.fourteen light antiaircraft guns in seven posi tions, and nine coast defence "batteries. Crews of air craft which have flown over the Islands on recent nights
have reported — heavy flak "unseen target" fire, appar ently predictor controlled from Guernsey and Jersey.
M.A.R.47285-London-7 April 1942
The Germans have a general warning net. — The aircraft
warning service (Flugmeldedienst) net covers the entire
area of Germany and occupied territories. Observation
stations are about ten kilometers (6.25 miles) apart.
These observation stations warn their centrals who In
turn warn neighbouring centrals. Tho centrals plot the
course of the enemy aircraft from reports from their ob servation stations and transmit the information to the
antiaircraft artillery, pursuit aviation, and other warning
contrals. — The German antiaircraft artillery also has
its own local intelligence system. —
M.A.R.18739-Berlin-5 November 1941
In Berlin a small lake in the western part of the city,
has been entirely covered with a superstructure to mako it
blend with the buildings and the park in that, vicinity.
This region had suffered considerably during earlier raids.
Military objectives in that area include an important radio
tower (Funkturm) and the immediate vicinity ab'out the base
thereof have been disguised with netting and artificial
trees and other vegetation. The most important distin guishing landmark in Berlin is tho wide avenue running .
east and west through the cityj|^ttlMjalled the "Axis." —
During recent weeks an overhecu| c-av^r of wire netting inter
woven with greon materials to-rqse^fl e vegetation has cov ered one half of the.avenue ext^Kfing from the Victory Monu
^ - > >
k
v " -242
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (German) (cont'd)
ment for a distance of approximately 600 meters. — The
paved surfaces of the vide avenue itself havo "been sprayed
a dark green color to blend with the trees in the Tier garten — . It is evident that the air raid protection
organizations are endeavoring to break up the straight
line which runs through the city and which can so readily
be seen from the air at night. The tower of the Reichstag
- — which was formerly painted a bright gold color, has
now been painted a dull gray. On the outskirts of the city
the paved surface of the Reichsautobahnen have been spray-,
ed with a dull colored creosote mixutre to prevent light
rofloction. — Local air raid defense organizations are
carrying out a wide spread camouflage program to mako it ,
difficult for onomy flyors to orient themselves and thus
locate important military objectives. — False installa-.
tions have — boon — erected outside of the city of Ber lin, particularly in tho west, to resomblo distinguishing
landmarks which are in the city itself. —
M.A.R.18507-Berlin-22 July 19^1
The German air raid protection organizations ("Luftschultz")
have been working intensively in improving passive defense
measures in and about tho city. Work along tho Axis indi cates that the entire section of the avenue which runs east
and west through the "Tiergarten" is to be camouflaged. —
M.A.R.18592-Berlin-28 August 19>1
Charlottenburger-chausee, main oast-west highway running
wost from tho Bradenburger through the Tiergarten on to
Potsdam, has — boon heavily camouflaged with heavy net ting supported by stool posts, in turn coverod with green
material. Real tree-tops are set in this material at irregu lar Intervals and small scaffoldings to represent bushes
are constructed above the netting. This camouflaging ex tended as far as tho Grosse Stern, where preparations were
being made to camouflage tho large statue in its center and
to continue the camouflage along the Charlottenburger-chau see.~ Source had heard report that whole waterway system
Wannseo-Havel-Tegelsoe has been duplicated a considerable
distance west of tho city. --' M.I.D.-New York-R.1911-1 Novei
- 243
f f1 • _
VI - AIR D t e N S E SYSTEMS (Miscellaneous)
The harbor ---(at Murmansk)-— |p?#lgpcted with antiair craft; each dock has two guns, "believed to
"be the Oerlickon type, which are "by gun crews twenty-
four hours a day. The air patrol of the harbor is con stant and the morale of the people on shore, who seem to-,
be very friendly and choerful, Is good. -- Incl.#I-Rpt. -Conditions Existing at Murmansk
9 June 19^2-Serial JJO.M+22-AAC-I35/BK
On March 5., 19^1 the following brief official announcement
was made in Rome. "The antiaircraft protection of the
country has been transferred from the Ministry of War to
th'e Ministry of Interior". 'Initially the ground defense
against aircraft was entrusted to the Fascist Militia. The
Militia proved to be very ineffective in its efforts and to
increase its efficiency the antiaircraft miiitia units were
placed under the Ministry of War. There was a great deal
of friction between the Army and Militia units and the
antiaircraft defenses suffered accordingly, — In Rome to
date people were reported to have boon killed by antiair craft fire, although no bombs have been dropped and prob ably no enemy aircraft have flown over the city. The Ital ians describe antiaircraft as the "sutarchic" arm because
as they say, all the guns are Italian, all the officers
are Italian, all.the men are Italian, all the shells are
Italian and all the casualties have been Italian. The
transfer of the antiaircraft protection to the Ministry of
Interior will remove some of the friction between the Army
and the Militia, but most observers — fail to see how
the — change can serve to increase the effectiveness of the defense against --- enemy — aircraft. •'
M. A. R. 17836-Rome, Italy-11 March 19^2
'
In,the Air Defense Warning System --- the observers at the
outlying stations perform their duties in a most commend- .
able manner. They are particularly good at accurate iden tification by typo and number, even at night and during
overcast weather. They are extremely reliable, and de spite constant air raids, on only one occasion, two years
ago, did enemy aircraft come in unwarned. --- Since near ly all Japanese air fields are in occupied China it has
been possible to use spies who contact the warning net as
soon as the enemy makes preparations for a raid. — The
I 8
jR O C ^ ' g i T f
l | 'ii V fe I
it
VI - AIR DEFENSE SYSTEMS (Miscellaneous)
warning net usually goes into operation when enemy planes
prepare to leave their field. This information Is radioed
by spies. Planes are under observation by distant stations
which operate a North-South and East-West telephone net
corresponding to grids on the master defense chartf — At
a distance of 15 minutes flying time, an emergency signal
is given, at which time all movement stops, dugouts ard
closed, and ground defenses go into action. An air force-
cooperation net is maintained at all times for identifica tion of friendly aircraft. At the- time the emergency alarm
is given, the intelligence personnel can usually predict
the arrival of enemy aircraft within one minute. —
M.A.R.#16-China-September 19UI
B I B L I O G R A P H Y
(l)* Page 5 - Inclosure #1 - The Kutonase Anti-Balloon
Device.
A.A.C.#319.13/AUF-11
-245
w
The concept
of the operation was highly imaginative, daringly new. Com bat elements drawn from Central' Europe moved with precision
into funnel shaped Greece. Here they re-formed, took shape
as a balanced force, were given wings. The operation had
the movement, rhythm, harmony of a master's organ composi tion." On 20 May and succeeding days this force soared
through space; its elements broke over Crete in thundering
crescendos - all stops out. For the first time in history
air-borne troops, supplied and supported b~ air, landed in
the face of an enemy, defeated him* For the first time an
air force defeated a first-rate Navy, inflicted such stag gering losses that, the fleet was ordered back to Alexandria
three days after the battle started. In the spring of 1941
the British forces in Middle East were spread too thin.
With inadequate means to justify the expedition^ Great Britiaj
made a valiant attempt to carry the war from Africa to
Europe* In Greece this attempt failed. Lack of sea trans port and force of naval circumstances dictated that evacues
from Greece be taken to Crete rather than Egypto At Crete,
with time and means limited, defenses were stiffened, but
effective preliminary and superb hand to hand fight ing were not enougha Crete fell because the British had
no air power to oppose the German air invasion, Soon
after dawn 20 May the Luftwaffe struck the Kaleme-Canea
area in Crete. The objective was to silence antiaircraft
batteries and to prevent use of roads between Suda and
Maleme. At Maleme the attack was especially heavy. The
New Zealand 22nd Battlaion gurdir g Maleme airdrome was
heavily bombarded and machine gunned for ninety minutes
bv Ju 87's, Ju 88's, Me 109's, Me 110's. Intensity was so
terrific that everyone was dri.en to slit trenches; some
participants claim the severity of the attack exceeded the
heaviest artillery preparations of the Viorld War. Before
the dense cloud resulting from this attack lifted, fifty
gliders had landed in the dry river bed directly in front
and to the west of the 22nd Battalion. - — The big scale
Blitz was an awful spectacle. General Freyberg relates how
he stood on a hill watching the attack over Maleme enthralled
by the magnitude of the operation. While he was watch ing the bombers he suddenly became aware of the great throb bing, or overtone, during the moments of comparative quiet.
Looking to sea he saw hundreds of planes, tier upon tier,
slow moving troop car-
P had been expecting. They
- 246
VII - OPERATIONS
(cont'd)
/;
circled counter.clock-wise over Maleme airdrome and'w the«, J* SIZI only 200 feet above the ground, as if by magic white
suddenly appeared beneath the planes. Colored clouds oj
parachutists floated slowly to earth* The dry stream banks
afforded shelter, to the glider-borne troops who landed there.
Fully armed and organized as combat teams, troops poured out
of gliders, took up positions facing the 22nd Battalion so
as to cover their parachutists landing west of the stream
bed* Flying at low altitude in circles whose center, was
about a half mile west of the 22'nd Battalion position, Nazi
fighters covered the descent of the parachutists b'r contin uous muraerous straffing of ground troops, Most of 'the para chutists who landed near defending troops ware killed. Some
who landed on the Maieme-Canoa road interrupted communica tions, On the airdrome defending troops were overwhelmed
by parachutists who, with stores and equipment, actually
landed on top of them. To the eafet and west of the airdrome
Ju 52's crash-landed on the beaches, disgorged troops. The
eastern group threatened the rear of the 22nd Battalion; »
the western group joined those in the wadi. The wadi troops
„ formed the nucleus of the forces which eventually captured
J '
the island, The day of bitter fighting was replete with intense bom bardment and straffing. The New" Zealanders made eight suc cessful bayonet charges; murderous air attacks froced them
to relinquish their gains.. During the night, the 22nd Bat talion withdrew a half mile to the e'ast, Maleme airdrome,
however, was still held under.artillery and machine gun-fire,
Thursday 22nd - Day 3 - at dawn two. battalions of the New
Zealand Division attacked with bayonett, reached Maleme air drome, The fierceness of the fighting was not surpassed by
anything the participating officers had seen at Gallapoli or
in France in the first World War. But during daylight no
troops cuuld hold the airdrome. Under the murderous fire'
power, which four hundred .unopposed fighters delivered,
troops were dive bombed and machine gunned off the airdrome,
driven back, held in cover positions, On the Akrotiri
Peninsula eleven gliders landed soon after dawn. These
troops, as well as those who landed about Suda Bay, attacked
antiaircraft..gun crews. Few antiaircraft gunners had rifles;
their losses were heavy," Throughout entire day air- !
borne troops^ poured in, quickly builjfing resh formidable ° ! "' 1 r **
smonstrated
forces* The" operations^ about Crete&pi'' .thftut fighter
the complete inability of a fleet to ejfis *|ority,
support in waters over which the enemy he if
-247
VII - OPERATIONS (cont'd)
**
^ i % \
dn
e %effectiverfeas^ Naval
Antiaircraft
% Shadov#1|>|t Mfe screen of the .magical Radio Detection Finder
gave aj^Je warning. Qf^thfe approach of aircraft. Yet through out the:. aciibrf^bur American Naval Observer had knowledge of
only two planes shot down Q.Sy cable No. 1950 B.F.F.); our
iunerican vVar correspondent on the Valiant off Kythera Straits
saw only seven shot down (Appendix 1, page 5J• In some cases
of major damage or sinking the air attack had been of such
intensity and duration and the naval barrages put up had % ,
been so wasteful and ineffective that the vessels were out
of ammunition long before the bombing ceased. Saturday 24th
- Day 5 - The German intensified his air attacks, strength ened his forces with fresh, newly arrived airborne troops,
prepared to attack the New Zealand position. All British
troops were very tired. Fighting had been savage; man to ,
man British forces were superior. But unfortunately this
was not a man to man battle. Air support gave the German
tremendous advantage. At eight in the evening the Ger- *
man broke trhrough the New Zealand position, captured Gala-.
tos;the tired 18th and 20th Battalions counter-attacked with
the bayonet, retook the village, General Freyberg rates this
bayonet attack one of the great efforts of the Crete defense.
It is reported that Germans have erected a joint German-New
Zealand memorial at Galatos. So far astheroism is con cerned possibly there are no more valiant deeds in British
history than those of the Navy in attempting to supply, de fend and evacuate Crete. But the fact that in eight days
the Nazi attack drove the'Navy to Egypt, forced an evacua tion -which left more than half the -arrison behind, testi fies to the total inability of a Navy to operate in waters
ove. which the enemy controls the air.
Because the German attack was successful one is likeljr to
gather the impression that there had been little antiair craft fire to be silenced. About the two by six mile
horse-shoe shaped Suda Bay the British placed four batteries,
each with four 3.7-inch antiaircraft guns; five sections
each with two 3-inch antiaircraft guns; 16 Bofors; two. 50 caliber four barrel machine guns and a number of ,303-cali ber machine guns (Map LA)* In speit of this impressive
air defense Suda Bay was untenable for vessels. At Maleme
airdrome two 3-inch antiaircraft, guns, 10 Bofors, were put
out of action quickly on.the 20th, At Heraklion airdrome
wer e four 3-inch antiaircraft guns* 10 Bofors, 2 Pom Poms, Each airdrome had about foriy machine guns. Retimo had no
antiaircraft protection exbepWiachine guns. No complete
data is available showingHtf(e vlabses antiaircraft guns in flicted. Lieuteneat-. Hugh.e'$^v$j|Jpommanded the Bofors at
VII - OPERATIONS (contld)
of re Suda Bay, reports hits wore nume] l|pt down,
ports available discloses only a few 'pi^jei kMcsni%On
On 10 May a Bofors shot down two bombers the 16th antiaircraft at Heraklion shot down
ana destroyed three Others, Anti air craft fire, on
drove off thirty 109's from Mai e •.. e airdrome- and snoi
one Do 17. -.On the.18th ^antiaircraft shot down one, plane,
the 20th at Heraklion antiaircraft shot down sixteen.out Of
130 troop carriers. Due to extraordinary battle confusion
no list-of-planes shot down after the 20th exists, — That sites for airdromes must be selected with a view to
•I-heir defense against air and land attacks and that, at. air dromes of importance, defenses must be prepared as thoroughly
as-are modern.harbor defenses, That based on the experience
of-the British during the Crete operation it is clear that
no island, or canal, or strategic area can be considered secure
unt.il all bases within effective Air Force range .can be' denied
the enemy,
M.A.R,19B7-Cairo, Egypt-8 September 1941 '
The.two Antiaircraft Regiments employed inoperations in
Cyreniaca (early in 1941) were-each provided with a
workshop (R.A.O.C.) ;
vis; 51 Heavy Antiaircraft Workshop section
13 Light Antiaircraft Workshop section
Owing to the large area and the necessary tactical grouping
of Heavy and Light Antiaircraft guns, each Section had to be
responsible for both types of gun in a-certain area, (The
Light Antiaircraft Guns included 40 mm, Bofors and 20
mm* Bredas), In fact at one stage it was necessary to
split the Heavy Antiaircraft Workshop Section into parts.
M.A,R,43463-London-5 July 1941
During the period 11 A p r i ^ , 2 4 fy^J-941, (forty-seven)—
dive bombing attacks wereCtade on the T ^ r ^ area. Apart
from damaging shipping tfie-amount o M ( ^ a f | 4one — ( w a s
inconsequential) in proportion to'* the" weight • of'^e^rt-r.
tacks. This was not due to lack.of determined spir^forJ^ljie
part of the attack but to the deterrent effect" of thi
and Light Antiaircraft fire offered by the defense^ ^ A M b f
959 dive bomber aircraft which attacked during the period
11 April to 27 June 1941, fifty-five were destroyed forcer-,
tain by antiaircraft fire* — Of 47 attacks, eleven includ
-249
VII - OPERATIONS(contM)f^MlIIM ed deliberate afl^^q^s^oa.'Heavy Antiaircraft Gun Sites. This
is apart from nuirterpus 'machine gun attacks made by Ju 87s and
fighters on Light "Antiaircraft Positions during the"dive
bombing attachs. Some gun sections showed high morale and
good training and were able to withstand Stuka attacks and
turn the attacks into routs. Other sections by a lower stand ard' of training, a lack of ."quick-thinking" by their officers
and Nos. 1, and carelessness in providing proper protection
failed initially in driving off the enemy. The enemy gave
these latter positions little rest. A crucial moment in a
dive bombing attack on a Heavy gun site is when - — ( i t must
be decided whether-or not) the personnel — shall take
cover. - — The first dive bomber may be above the gun sec tion — - at 4000 feet. A ferocious burst of fire at this
moment from the guns will make hi71 release his bombs prema turely and make his successors pause in their attack. Com plete silence at this moment if the section goes to ground
will probably - — allow every Stuka in the formation to
pick the arm position as a mark and come-down to 500
feet. Then, and only then, will guns and command, posts be
damaged and personnel killed. Experience has indicated
that if the section fights and fights for all it is worth
a single bomb may hit a gun pit but it will be rare.
Heavy gun positions should be four gun stations if they are
to protect themselves effectively against Stuka attacks./
Stuka attacks can usually be divided into.either:
(1) Direct attack on gun positions from several directions
at once.
(2) A neutralizing attack on a gun position to prevent its
giving protection to some neighboring vulnerable area which is
also being attacke.d. r
The light Antiaircraft in Tobruk has been singled cut for iso lated attacks on their gun positions by individual aircraft.
But there have been no concerted attacks on them by fighters.
The reason for this is that guns in the perimeter are well
camouflaged and often moved, and planes dare not fly low over
the harbor, vvhen isolated attacks have occured de tachments have acquitted themselves well. It is agreed that
these-detachments -—.would fight better if an arrored shield
"were "provided:for them and if dummy guns — - are emplaoed
to draw —-(the enemy fire)—-£tfote; The British were:not
equipped with .50 caliber ad^kmcraft'machine guns.) " % M ,1^74-London-11 September 1941
>
~
V
In more tJ^i^.onV ca^j Bofors were used to cover the rear sub -25O
f ^ M l
VII - OPERATIONS (contM)
„
I
I
k
M
formations of withdrawing columns, They ha
mainly in an antitank role. The ground on their line •
of withdrawal was on occasions badly cut up and resulted
in guns being "bogged", and overrun by enemy armored forcp
vehicles. This resulted in losses of antiaircraft equip ment which could ill be spared, .
Experience in Employment of AA units in Middle East
Supplement to Rpt.#4 (Part - I)
On the 5th of December the 7th Brigade, motorized, was form ing to continue its advance when the Brigade.group was at tacked from the. rear b; seven Messerschmidt M-llOs flying
at not over a hundred feet. The planes flew completely
over our formation, machine gunning and firing cannon. The
drivers and other personnel ran from their vehicles and lay
flat on the ground. Two men were killed and eight wounded
in the attack, many vehicles were hit, two bullets went
through the Brigadier's car, but all vehicles ere able to
continue in the column. This was the first experience of
the Brigade in this form of attack. rJe had no slit trenches
as we were not in a camp area and fire was not, on this oc casion, returned from the ground. After this the Brigade was
straffed from the air and dived bombed a number of times.%
Slit trenches uug at least, ten yards, from the vehicles pro vided almost perfect protection. A dive bombing attack
provides the best instructions that can be given of the
necessity for digging. The Brigade now automatically digs
in at every halt of any duration. The trench need not be
deep, just enough that the body of the man is below the sur face of the ground. After the first attack, all low eleva tion and dive bombing attacks were replied to be Bren guns .
mounted for antiaircraft fire, by Bofors antiaircraft, and'
by the men firing rifles from slit trenches. "Almost always
the Brigade brought down at least one of the attacking planes.
Casualties were negligible - — . The most disagreeable form
of attack from the viewpoint of.ground troops.is the machine
gun attack. Low flying planes and dive bombers can be shot
down by•a sufficient.volume of small arms fire and.the morale
effect of-replying by fire to such attacks is of great impor tance, If our training does not now require that-slit trenches
be dug" habitually at the halt it should be required.
•• * M. A.R. 21A0-Cairo, Egypt-11 January 1942 •
During • the whole of the .per^d i^f-^frjjm ^tS|.,27%Decembei
-251
VII - OPERATIONS
the 57th Light Mt^^rcraft Regiment in the middle east
wa§, -actively er^Jaged in its —-- pursuit,of aerial targets,;
and, hac^ duels with no less that 7B'0 aircraft in 187 engage ment^, -Tfle attacks were malnlr delivered on motor trans port concentrations but division Headquarters was a partic ular objective of the Ju 87* One of the most noticeable
features of these duels was the extreme respect with which
the bomber treated "f.la'k" his approach being at greater
heights and his dive shallower on each successive occasion.
There can be no doubt that the Light Antiaircraft complete ly spoilt his aim and helped to maintain the morale of the
ground troops. The majority of this fire was outside nor mal Bofors range but it served its purpose. Eighteen enemy
aircraft were destroyed by the Regiment during the period,
Unfortunately no Me 109F's were bagged. These fleet
"birc.sn give little opportunity for practice,
M..i.a .2272-Cairo Egypt-1 March 1942
On une occasion the enemy used a captured Hurricane to
lead a force of fighters and bombers which attacked one
of our (British) landing grounds. The Hurricane
approached the aerodrome at a low altitude with its wheels,
down. On another occasion an attack on a formation Battle
Headquarters was preceded by a reconnaissance by an old
type of craft which circled slowly as though about to land,
but made off as soon as light antiaircraft opened fire.
No,47074-23 March 1942-AAC#319.13/AUF~15
On 28 January, "A" Troop of the 57th Light Antiaircraft Regiment was part of a mobile column south of Bengazi mov ing along the main road towards Bengazi, H. spotter on one of the guns suddenl" observed a Me 110 flying fast down the road towards them at a height of approximately 50 feet.. He ' gave the warning, and the gun was dropped into action. The Me 110 was now almost on JLOP of the gun and there was np time to unload any a m m u n i t ^ n W ^ m the Tractor, There were, how ever, seven round^fb^^aci^/jki the auto-loader and No. 8 the layer f o r N o , 4 - the firing number leaped te t^irv^^ijiwns, No. 7 - the layer for line - had not yet ^et to his seat and so No, 10, as the Me, llQC^El^shfedfoJ&^machine-gunning at a range of not more than
ifeom the gun, pulled the gun onto the target with
^eVt^LV^i'sing lever and ordered "Fire." The fifth round-
plane full in the fuselage and brought it in flames
- 252
VII - OPERATIONS (cont'd)
" •"
to the ground. Meanwhile, the other two guns were engagim
a second. Me 110 which had appeared, and drove it away. A
few minutes later, a force of fourteen Stukas and eight Me
109s, flew over the column and wore engaged "by the Bofors.
One Stuka crashed within a few yards of a gun; another was
hit and crashed 3 miles to the South, the latter "being con firmed "by the Battery Command 'of 31 Forward Battery Royal
Artillery. In these three engagements the troop expended
113 rounds of ammunition. Their "bagtfasfour Stukas, one
Me 110, and one CR 42. All these (destroyed enemy)- planes were seen on the ground.
M.A.L.48165-London-2 June 1942
---(The South African Division u s e d ) — the town of Mersa
Matruh — ( i n North A f r i c a ) — very little — for shelter,
the unit preferring to use open and less conspicuous areas.
The relatively few casualties in spite of numerous Axis air
"bombings attests to the soundness of this course of action;
BES-353-Waahington-24 July 1942
Heavy Gun Positions have not so far as known "been directly -:
attacked in Great Britain — . Several gun positions
have been hit by bombs at night but this is thought to have
been — - by chance. Recently the fir3t Womens Auxiliary
Territorial Service casualty occurred on a Mixed Heavy An tiaircraft Gun Site. The conduct of the remainder of the
ATC crew was gratifying, another ATS took tho place of
the casualty and the firing continued.
M.A.R.47594-London-27 April 1942
During an attack on one of our aerodromes at night an
enemy aircraft flashed its landing light several times • — .
It then approached as if to land but at about 50 feet
opened fire at the aerodrome floodlight and then attacked a
Hurricane circling the aerodrome.
BAC Technical Services Memo. #8
21-May 194l-OCjA#|§3j,13l/OG
Total numbers of enemy aircraft destroyed or d
tiaircraft fire to 6 June 1942 ---on the Air Defen
Great Britain have been:
- 253
BSUs&ign *
CAT. 1. 629
CAT. 2. CAT. 3.
206 274 M.A.L.48364-6 June 1942
— ( i n Great Britain)--?- the antiaircraft defense of
has --- "been largely taken over "by rockets (80 to 100
single projectors). In one attack on this place in May two
salvos from tho — ( R o c k e t ) — "batteries "brought down two
planes at night.
N.A.R.Ser.M-l:X-29-Great Britain-3 July 1941
During recent air attacks over Berlin and its suburbs,
cloud "banks have "been seen to form and "blanket whole areas.
It was particularly marked in the early morning of one at tack, — - When the British attacked two airplane factories
at Oranidriburg Worth of Berlin. When the air attack first
appeared a light thin cloud layer at an altitude of about
500 feet was noticed. As time passed, the cloud layer
grew denser and after a half hour tho cloud bank was quite
thick and extended fVom the ground up to a thousand foet.
Except over Oranienburg, the sky was quite clear. The
only other information available is that the artificial
smoke is quite expensive, — an admission that such a
means exists.
M.A.R.17694-Berlin,Germany-8 November 1940
Billancourt — (Renault works near P a r i s ) — had not a
single antiaircraft gun or searchlight for its defense.
With the result that the Royal Air Force was able to de stroy its target with unhurried and devastating accuracy.
Unopposed by gunfire, untroubled by searchlight beams, the
bombers were able to fly as low as a thousand feet over
their objective. The situation was aptly summed up by a
remark from Royal Air Force sources — "you don't real ize the value of Ack Ack until thore isn't any".
' M.A.L.47190-London-1 April 1942
A Wellington bomber on.$ -n%ght mission struck by antiair craft fire.'"iras inspected on. tho ground the next morning
ft England)--. The pilot stated that he was flying
- 254
VII - OPERATIONS (contld)
at 19>000 feet over a solid overcast, when the^
of antiaircraft fire was so close that the plane*%<
small splinters, These did superficial damage oni;
A B-17 "bomber conducting a daylight raid on Brest
ing at 27,000 foet when i,t was fired on "by ant i aircraft^
Tho "bursts we're correct for altitude "but fell about 700
yards short. —
• M. A. R.44060-London-15 August 1941
One aircraft when at 18,000 feet within 5 miles of the Dutch
coast, abeerved one large Flak burst dead ahead at 20,000
feet. Feathered sparks resembling those of a rocket fell
from the burst. Some 5 seconds later, a parachute flare
appeared dead.ahead and accurate for height.., Tho interfer ence was that the flare was fired from a Heavy.Antiaircraft
gun to indicate to night fighters the point where the air craft crossed the coast.
Hq. A. A. Command -" G-lenthorn", Stonmore,Middx. -28 February 1942
Camouflage -- During a, recent daylight sweep, a number of
Mo. 109fs were encountered camouflaged white underneath.
This —(tended to)--- make'them invisible from about 1,000
feet below.
Incl. #1-M. A. R.44495-London-13 September 19^1
Normal enemy tactics — ( a t Malta between Pecember and May
19^2 h a v o ) — consisted mainly of mass attacks at regular in tervals by day. Every morning, mid-dhy and.;Evening he would
send over up to 75 wingers. The Ju.88s apprptched at from
18,000 to 12,000 feet, shallow diving to \6,<500,J5pet, while
the Ju.87s employed steep dives often feirfti one objec tive while the main attack was aimed at a secon< e enemy
made skilful use of cloud and evasive action ter
escorts were always employed.. Direct attacks e .on:
antiaircraft gun positions, but if fire was maiii^a; small
casualties and little damage to equipment was experi
A system of rest rosters insuring that every j&m
hours.ponsecutive sleep and one hot meal per 24 ho e-
suited in the personnel standing the strain well.
M.A.R.48205-London-4 June 19^2
-255
VII - OPERATIONS (cont
— A Germair Iceland on l4th May was identified
as Focke Motors wore unusually quiet. - —
It is " t e t a S t e v ^ d ^ — the plane was.equipped with a new
>e of silencer.
V ' " Rpt.No.64i G-2, War Department, 16 May 1942
— ( O n the evacuation of Penang "by the British)-— six-inch
guns were wrecked by exploding gelignite in chambers. —
One gun inspected, subsequently had top half of chamber from
cone seating to beginning of rifling completely blown away
together with breech carrier, top and side of shields, dials,
telescope brackets and cams.- — • Guns in view of enemy on
mainland and explosion might have drawn premature attention to evacuation. Breech screws and threads burred and broken
with slodges, and breeches then jammed home. Detachable
small parts of breeches were removed and thrown Into sea.
Sights, instruments, dials, switches, etc. wore smashed and .
buffers emptied. Engines having been drained of oil, pumps
were filled with sand and engines run until they seized. All
breakable parts of engines and Coast Artillery Searchlights
wore removed to a distance and thrown into s e a . —
BAS-Washington, D. C.-22 April 1942
For the blinding of the Antiaircraft batteries the Russian
— fighters have been spraying a smoke producing liquid.
Rpt.#443-Helsinki,Finland-22 October 1941
Antiaircraft artillery today shot down one hoavy Japanese-
bomber at an altitude of 27300 feet. .. Wainwright—Phillipines-30 March 1942
The enemy- continues to bomb Corregidor and rear areas of
Bataan with flights of two planes. An air raid alarm, No.
Il6> -on Corregidor which tooki^lace.at 5:00 P.M. was imme diately ended by both apprc^llmg heavy bombers being shot
down. — . .
..Wal*iwri^ht-31 March 1942-1321/K
T ~ %
*
'
against the harbor defenses (of }^-^4ijring -£¥fe past 24 hours. Enemy bombs against
the ^S^bqra defgraces were ineffective because accuracy of
-256
VII - OPERATIONS (cont'd)
the harbour defense antiaircraft
to fly above 27 thousand feet
No.
The Japanese avoided damaging the runways at Midway. If
they had been bombed it would have added greatly to our op erational difficulties.
Informational Intelligence Summary No., b-2
11 July 19^2-AAC#31'9.13 /AUZ-42
---(in the Midway a c t i o n ) — we were at a medium altitude
because of clouds and antiaircraft was soon spitting at us.
It was more accurate than we expected and many of our planes
were bounced around, but none was seriously damaged. We
picked the biggest Japanese carrier and headed for it. : The
minute our bomb-bays opened, the ack ack started coming up.
It was fine shooting, and the Japs must have good range,
finders because the first shots were right at our altitude.
Even in the midst of the attack ve had time to chuckle at
our bombardier, who remarked over the planes radio: "My
that antiaircraft looks beautiful through this telescope".
It looked beautiful, all right, but it also looked danger ous . —
Air Corps Colonel - Army Navy Register-13 June 19^2
Among Japanese attacks on airdromes., the following methods
have "been noted:
(1) Fighter forces, after a low-level strafing attack,,
withdraw by flying on at low level. One fighter remains
behind at 12,000 to 18,000 feet, circling to observe re- .
suits. Soon after, a second attack is made, probably guid ed by details obtained during the first attack.
(2) In attacks by several flights, one or more flights
came in at low level, strafing, while one or more flights
: : remained behind at 16,000 to 20,000 foot. These dived at
' high speed on planes trying to get off the airdrome.
(3) On one occasion a flight of Japanese planes five
minutes away from a United States field called in on the
radio in perfect English: "Nine American pursuit planes
approaching Field from the east," then came down — they
looked much like our At-6fs -- and attacked.
- (4) A few Japanese planes draw antiaircraft fire and
searchlights overhead, whereupon a singie plane-comes 'in )
at zero altitude with navigation lights on and wheels down,
At.
VII * OPERATIONS (cont'd)*/^
and strafes the ^^drCaa^* This is followed "by clinfb at
full "boost int^tTten&a^est cloud.
s ' v%JnformatIonal Intelligence Summary No.35
% y^ 6 July 19^2 -A. A. C. #319.13/AUZ-35
— f i r s t Japanese air raid on Darwin Australia)-—
signal^Hs received from'Bathurst Island Mission Station - —
(at 9:^5 a.m.)-— reporting largo numbers of aircraft fly ing south — ( e l e v e n ) — P40 Fighters took off shortly after.
— Antiaircraft Batteries engaged the first formation of
27 "bombers, — which approached at about 13,000 to 15,000
feet flying in perfect formation in groups of 9 i.e» 3 V's
of 3 to each flight. First bombs fell — ( a t 10:04 a.m.) —
each group of 9 dropping their bombs together (bombs could
be seen distinctly as they left the aircraft) these bombs
probably fell in the Harbour, one stick cutting the shore
leg of the wharf. Ei'om this time until 1220 Light bombs
were falling continuously, dive bombers peeling off and at tacking ships at anchor from about 200 feet. Fighters after
dispersing of P^O's flew low over streets and houses machine
gunning everything that offered a target. At about this time
5 very hbavy bombs thought to be 1,000 lbs. each were dropped
— all these made craters about 15 feet deep by 35 feet
across — Tho dive bombers were particularly efficient in
their attacks on the ships, dropping their bombs as low as
200 feet. — ( A t 11:55 a.m. — 27. twin-engined bombers flew
over from the NW at about 15,000 feet, Antiaircraft Batteries
went into action. This force flew in formation but there is
some doubt as to whether they were in flights of 9 or a "Doub
le VIC" formation. This raid was confined to the Royal Aus tralian Air Forces Aerodrome. — Accounts differ widely —
(but it)-— is probable that the correct figures ---(for the
1st attack)—- were as follows:
Heavy Bombers bO '
Dive Bombers 30
Type "0" Fighters 18
• Rpt. of First Air Raid on Darwin
23 February 1942-AAC#319.13l/APM
B I B L I 0. G E A P H Y
^
(l) Antiaircraft Defense of Tobruk Fortress - (l April to
V.
1
VII - OPERATIONS
,
^
Bibliography (cont'd)
10 October 19^1) (Published in full in A.A.Command Intelli gence Circular No.6.)
M.A.R.23&L-Cairo-2 April 19^2
(2) Experience in Employment of Antiaircraft Units in Mid dle East. M.A.R.2357 and 2$59-Cairo-2 April 19k2 (3) (Intelligence Circular No. 10) Performance of United
States Army Coast Artillery Personnel and Equipment in the
Manila - Bataan Military Campaign.
AAC#319.132l/Z
D I S T R I B U T I
1 Assistant Chief of Staff, G-l, W.D. General Staff
2 Assistant Chief of Staff, G-2, W.D. General Staff
Assistant Chief of Staff, G-3, W.D. Genoral Staff
3 4 Assistant Chief of Staff, G-4, W.D. General Staff
Commanding General, Army Air Forces
5 6 Commanding General, Services of Supply
7-16 Commanding General, Army Ground Forces
17-21 Commanding General, Eastern Defense Command
22-26 Commanding General, Western Defense Command
27-29 Commanding General, Central Defense Command
30-32 Commanding General, Southern Defense Command
33 Chief Signal Officer
3^ Chief of Engineers
35 Chief of Ordnance
36-UO Commanding General, Hawaiian Department
41-45 Commanding General, Carribean Defense Command
46-48 Commanding General, Alaska Defense Command
49-50 Commanding General, Greenland Base Command
51-52 Commanding General, U.S. Forcos in Iceland
53-5*1 Commanding General, Bermuda Base Command
55 Chief of Chemical Warfare Service
56 Superintendent, U.S. Military Academy
57 Commandant, Command & General Staff School
58-60 Commanding General, American Forces in the Far East
Commanding General, Headquarters Antiaircraft Command 61-68 69-fo Commanding General, AATC, Fort Bliss, Texas
Commanding General, AATC, Fort Sheridan, Illinois
n-n 73-7^ Commanding General, AATC, Camp Davis, Worth Carolina
Commanding General, AATC, Camp Edwards, Massachusetts 75-76 Commanding General, AATC, Carrp Hulen, Texas
77-78 Commanding General, AATC, Camp Stewart, Georgia
79-80 Commanding General, AATC, Camp Haan, California
81-82 Commanding General, AARTC, Fort Eustis, Virginia
83-84 Commanding General, AARTC, Camp Callan, California
85-86 Commanding General, AARTC, Camp Wallace, Texas
87-88 Commanding General, BBTC, Camp Tyson, Tennessee
89-91 President, AA Board
92-93 Commandant, AA Artillery Schooj
9^-100 File
101-150
- 260
teT;
«V U
#021075